TM 11-5815-334
TM 11-5815-334-10
copy is a reprint which includes current
pages from Changes 1and 2.
This
TECHNICAL MANUAL
OPERATOR’S MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
PAGE 1-5
TECHNICAL PRINCIPLES
OF OPERATION
PAGE 1-29
OPERATION INSTRUCTONS
PAGE 1-29
OPERATOR PMCS
PAGE 2-28
OPERATOR
TROUBLESHOOTING
PAGE 3-1
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
PAGE 3-20
RADIO TELETYPEWRITER SETS
AN/GRC-122 (NSN 5515-00-401-9719)
AN/GRC-122A (NSN 5815-00-167-7998)
AN/GRC-122B (NSN 5815-00-937-5295)
AN/GRC-122C (NSN 5815-01-095-1211)
AN/GRC-122D (NSN 5815-01-096-0428)
AN/GRC-122E (NSN 5815-01-095-1212)
AN/GRC-142 (NSN 5815-00-401-9720)
AN/GRC-142A (NSN 5815-00-168-1556)
AN/GRC-142B (NSN 5815-00-443-5511)
AN/GRC-142C (NSN 5815-01-100-6815)
AN/GRC-142D (NSN 5815-01-104-7264)
AN/GRC-142E (NSN 5815-01-095-6258)
HEADQUARTERS I DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
5 MARCH 1985
TM 11-5815-334-10
C4
Change
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
Washington, DC, 1 October 1994
No. 4
Operator’s Maintenance Manual
RADIO TELETYPEWRITER SETS
AN/GRC-122
AN/GRC-122A
AN/GRC-122B
AN/GRC-122C
AN/GRC-122D
AN/GRC-122E
AN/GRC-142
AN/GRC-142A
AN/GRC-142B
AN/GRC-142C
AN/GRC-142D
AN/GRC-142E
(NSN 5815-00-401-9719) (EIC: GFE)
(NSN 5815-00-167-7998) (EIC: GFA)
(NSN 5815-00-937-5295) (EIC: GFJ)
(NSN 5815-01-095-1211) (EIC: GFL)
(NSN 5815-01-096-0428) (EIC: GFP)
(NSN 5815-01-0951212) (EIC: GFM)
(NSN 5815-00-401-9720) (EIC: GFF)
(NSN 5815-00-168-1556) (EIC: GFB)
(NSN 5815-00-443-5511) (EIC: GFG)
(NSN 5815-01-100-6815) (EIC: GFR)
(NSN 5815-01-104-7284) (EIC: GFT)
(NSN 5815-01-095-6258) (EIC: GFN)
USED WITH OR WITHOUT lNSTALLATION KIT,
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT MODIFICATION KIT MK-2488/G
TM 11-5815-334-10, 5 March 1985, is changed as follows:
1. Remove old pages and Insert new pages as indicated below. New or changed material is indicated by
a vertical bar in the margin of the page.
Remove pages
i through 1-2
1-5 and 1-6
1-23 through 1-26
2-5 and 2-6
2-11 through 2-14
2-23 through 2-26
2-65 and 2-66
2-68.1 and 2-68.2
2-68.5 and 2-68.6
2-71 and 2-72
2-83 and 2-84
2-107 through 2-110
2-131 and 2-132
B-3 through B-30
C-1 and C-2
Insert pages
i through 1-2
1-5 and 1-6
1-23 through 1-26
2-5 and 2-6
2-11 through 2-14
2-23 through 2-26
2-65 and 2-66
2-68.1 and 2-68.2
2-68.5 and 2-68.6
2-71 and 2-72
2-83 and 2-84
2-107 through 2-110
2-131 and 2-132
B-3 (blank) through B-36 (blank)
C-1 and C-2
2. File this change sheet in the front of the publication for reference purposes.
Distribution authorized to the Department of Defense and DOD
contractors only for official use or for administration or operational
purposed. This determination was made on 15 August 1993. Other
requests for this document will be referred to (Commander, US Army
Communication—Electronics Command and Fort Monmouth, ATTN:
AMSEL-LC-LM-LT, Fort MonmouthNJ 07703-5007.
DESTRUCTION NOTICE - Destroy by any method that will prevent
disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document.
TM 11-5815-334-10
C 3
Change
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
No. 3
Washington,
DC,
15
July
1989
Operator's Maintenance Manual
Radio Teletypewriter Sets
AN/GRC-122 (NSN
AN/GRC-122A(NSN
AN/GRC-122B(NSN
AN/GRC-122C(NSN
AN/GRC-122D(NSN
AN/GRC-122E(NSN
AN/GRC-142 (NSN
AN/GRC-142A(NSN
AN/GRC-142B(NSN
AN/GRC-142C(NSN
AN/GRC-142D(NSN
AN/GRC-142E(NSN
5815-00-401-9719)
5815-00-167-7998)
5815-00-937-5295)
5818-00-095-1211)
5815-01-096-0428)
5815-01-095-1212)
5815-00-401-9720)
5815-00-168-1556)
5815-00-443-5511)
5815-01-100-6815)
5815-01-104-7264)
5815-01-095-6258)
TM 11-5815-334-10, 5 March 1985, is changed as follows:
1.
Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below. New or
changed material is indicated by a vertical bar in the margin of the
page.
Remove pages
Insert pages
i and ii
2-25 through 2-28
None
i and ii
2-25 through 2-28
2-28.1 through 2-28.8
2.
File this change sheet in the front of the publication for
reference purposes.
Distribution authorized to the Department of Defense or DOD contractors only
for official use or for administration or operational purposess. This determination
was made on 15 May 1989. Other requests for this document will be referred
to Commander, US Army Communications-Electronics Command and Fort
Monmouth, ATTN: AMSEL-LC-ME-P, Fort Monmouth, NJ 07703-5000.
DESTRUCATI0N NOTICE – Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of
contents or reconstruction of the document.
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
CARL E. VUONO
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
WILLIAM J. MEEHAN II
Brigadier General, United States Army
The Adjutant General
DISTRIBUTION:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-31 operator requirements for AN/GRC-122, A-E and AN/GRC-142, A-E.
TM 11-5815-334-10
C2
CHANGE
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
Washington, DC, 15 December 1988
No. 2
OPERATOR’S MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RADIO TELETYPEWRITER SETS
AN/GRC-122 (NSN 5815-00-401-9719)
AN/GRC-122A (NSN 5815-00-167-7998)
AN/GRC-122B (NSN 5815-00-937-5295)
AN/GRC-122C (NSN 5815-01-095-1211)
AN/GRC-122D (NSN 5815-01-096-0428)
AN/GRC-122E (NSN 5815-01-095-1212)
AN/GRC-142 (NSN 5815-401-9720)
AN/GRC-142A (NSN 5815-00-168-1556)
AN/GRC-142B (NSN 5815-00-443-5511)
AN/GRC-142C (NSN 5815-01-100-6815)
AN/ GRC-142D (NSN 5815-01-104-7264)
AN/GRC-142E (NSN 5815-01-095-6258)
USED WITH OR WITHOUT INSTALLATION KIT,
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT MODIFICATION KIT MK-2488/G
TM 11-5815-334-10, 5 March 1985, is changed as follows:
1.
Title of the manual is changed as shown above.
2. Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below. New or changed material is indicated by a vertical bar
in the margin of the page. Added or revised illustrations are indicated by a vertical bar adjacent to the identification
number,
Remove pages
Insert pages
E and F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E and F
i and ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. i and ii
1-1 and 1-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-l and l-2
l-5 and 1-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-5 and l-6
l-9 and l-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 and l-10
l-13 and l-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l-l3 and 1-l4
l-17 through l-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17 through l-20
l-23 through l-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l-23 through l-30
Distribution authorized to the Department of Defense and DOD contractors only
for official use or for administration or operational purposes. This determination
was made on 26 August 1988. Other requests for this document will be referred
to Commander, US Army Communications-Electronics Command and Fort
Monmouth, ATTN: AMSEL-LC-ME-P, Fort Monmouth, NJ 07703-5000.
DESTRUCTION NOTICE – Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of
contents or reconstruction of the document.
Remove pages
Insert pages
2-9 and 2-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..2-9 and 2-10
2-21 and 2-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2l and 2-22
2-25 and 2-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25 and 2-26
2-43 and 2-44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43 and 2-44
2-47 and 2-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47 and 2-48
2-65 and 2-66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65 and 2-66
None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68.1 through 2-68.8
2-69 and 2-70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-69 and 2-70
None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-70.1 through 2-70.8
2-71 and 2-72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71 and 2-72
None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72.1 and 2-72.2
2-77 and 2-78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77 and 2-78
2-79 and 2-80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-79 and 2-80
2-83 and 2-84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-83 and 2-84
2-85 and 2-86 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-85 and 2-86
2-89 and 2-90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-89 and 2-90
2-95 through 2-98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..2-95 through 2-98
2-111 and 2-112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-111 and l-112
2-117 and 2-118 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-l17 and 2-118
2-127 and 2-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-l27 and 2-128
2-133 and 2-134 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-133 and 2-134
2-141 and 2-142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-141 and 2-142
None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-142.1 through 2-142.11/
(2-142.12 blank)
2-143 and 2-144 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-143 and 2-144
3-3 and 3-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 and 3-4
3-9 and 3-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9 and 3-10
None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..3-10.1 through 3-10.8
3-15 and 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..3-l5 and 3-l6
None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16.1 and 3-16.2
3-17 and 3-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17 and 3-18
3-19 and 3-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19 and 3-20
A-3 and A-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-3 and A-4
B-l and B-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1 and B-2
B-13 through B-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-13 through B-16
B-23 through B-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-23 through B-28
B-28.1 and B-28.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-28.1 and B-28.2
B-29 and B-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-29 and B-30
C-l and C-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1 and C-2
None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C - 3 / ( C - 4 b l a n k )
None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure FO-1.1
None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure FO-2.1
None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure FO-3.1
None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure FO-4.1
None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure FO-5.1
None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure FO-6.1
3. File this change sheet in the front of the publication for reference purposes.
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
CARL E. VUONO
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
DISTRIBUTION:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-51 Operator
requirements
for
AN/GRC-122/142.
TM 11-5815-334-10
C1
CHANGE
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
No. 1
Washington, DC, 1 October 1987
OPERATOR’S MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RADIO TELETYPEWRITER SETS
AN/GRC-122
AN/GRC-122A
AN/GRC-122B
AN/GRC.122C
AN/GRC-122D
AN/GRC-122E
AN/GRC-142
AN/GRC-142A
AN/GRC-142B
AN/GRC-142C
AN/GRC-142D
AN/GRC-142E
(NSN
(NSN
(NSN
(NSN
(NSN
(NSN
(NSN
(NSN
(NSN
(NSN
(NSN
(NSN
5815-00-401-9719)
5815-00-167-7998)
5815-00-937-5295)
5815-01-095-1211)
5815-01-096-0428)
5815-01-095-1212)
5815-00-401-9720)
5815-00-168-1556)
5815-00-443-5511)
5815-01-100-6815)
5815-01-104-7264)
5815-01-095-6258)
TM 11-5815-334-10, 5 March 1985, is changed as follows:
1. Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below. New or changed material is indicated by
a vertical bar in the margin of the page. Added or revised illustrations are indicated by a vertical bar adjacent to
the identification number.
Remove pages
Insert pages
E and F
1-1 and 1-2
1-5 and 1-6
1-15 through 1-18
2-9 and 2-10
2-15 and 2-16
2-21 and 2-22
2-27 and 2-28
2-63 through 2-66
2-69 and 2-70
2-147 and 2-148
A-1 and A-2
B-5 through B-8
B-11 and B-12
B-17 and B-18
B-23 and B-24
B-29 and B-30
E and F
1-1 and 1-2
1-5 and 1-6
1-15 through 1-18
2-9 and 2-10
2-15 and 2-16
2-21 and 2-22
2-27 and 2-28
2-63 through 2-66
2-69 and 2-70
2-147 and 2-148
A-1 and A-2
B-5 through B-8
B-11 and B-12
B-17 and B-18
B-23 and B-24
B-29 and B-30
2. File this change sheet in the front of the publication for reference purposes.
Distribution authorized to the Department of Defense and DOD contractors only
for official use or for administration or operational purposes. This determination
was made on 23 June 1987. Other requests for this document will be referred
to Commander, US Army Communications-Electronics Command and Fort
Monmouth, ATTN: AMSEL-ME-P, Fort Monmouth, NJ 07703 -5000.
DESTRUCTION NOTICE–Destroy by any method that will
prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the
document.
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
CARL E. VUONO
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
R.L. DILWORTH
Brigadier General, United States Army
The Adjutant General
DISTRIBUTION:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-51 literature
requirements for AN/GRC-122; AN/GRC-142.
TM 11-5815-334-10
+
SAFETY STEPS TO FOLLOW IF SOMEONE IS THE
VICTIM OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK
DO NOT TRY TO PULL OR GRAB THE INDIVIDUAL
IF POSSIBLE, TURN OFF THE ELECTRICAL POWER
IF YOU CANNOT TURN OFF THE ELECTRICAL
POWER, PULL, PUSH, OR LIFT THE PERSON TO
SAFETY USING A WOODEN POLE OR A ROPE OR
SOME OTHER INSULATING MATERIAL
SEND FOR HELP AS SOON AS POSSIBLE
AFTER THE INJURED PERSON IS FREE OF
CONTACT WITH THE SOURCE OF ELECTRICAL
SHOCK, MOVE THE PERSON A SHORT DISTANCE
AWAY AND IMMEDIATELY START ARTIFICIAL
RESUSCITATION
A
TM 11-5815-334-10
WARNING
WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE
IS USED IN THE OPERATION OF THIS EQUIPMENT
DEATH ON CONTACT
MAY RESULT IF PERSONNEL FAIL TO OBSERVE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Never work on electronic equipment unless there is another person nearby
who is familiar with the operation and hazards of the equipment and who is
competent in administering first aid. When the technician is aided by
operators, he must warn them about dangerous areas.
Whenever possible, the power supply to the equipment must be shut off
before beginning work on the equipment. Take particular care to ground every
capacitor likely to hold a dangerous potential. When working inside the equipment, after the power has been turned off, always ground every part before
touching it.
Be careful not to contact high-voltage connections of 115 volt ac input connections when installing or operating this equipment.
When installing or operating this equipment, be careful not to touch highvoltage connections of 115 vac.
Whenever the nature of the operation permits, keep one hand away
from the equipment to reduce the hazard of current flowing through vital
organs of the body.
Remove all jewelry before working on electronic equipment.
WARNING Do not be misled by the term “low voltage”. Potentials as low as
50 volts may cause death under adverse conditions.
For Artificial Respiration, refer to FM 21-11.
B
TM 11-5815-334-10
WARNING
RADIATION HAZARD
RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL
CONTROLLED DISPOSAL REQUIRED
ACCOUNTABILITY NOT REQUIRED
STD RW–2
Meter
Meter
Meter arbitrary
scale
Meter, arbitrary
scale
Ra226
Ra 226
Ra 226
1.0uCi
0.6uCi
1.0uCi
6625-00-257-1103
6625-00-226-5680
6625-00-226-5679
Ra 226
1.0uCi
6625-00-226-5681
Radiation Hazard Information: The following radiation hazard information must be read and understand by all Personnel operating or
repairing Radio Teletypetwriter Sets AN/GRC-122/142(*).
Hazardous radioactive materials are present in the above listed components of the MD-522/GRC. RT-662/GRC, RT-824/GRC, and the AM3349/GRC. The components are potentially hazardous when broken. See
qualified medical personnel and the local Radiological Protection Officer
(RPO) immediately if you are exposed to or cut by broken components.
First aid instructions are contained in TB 43-0116, and TB 43-0122.
NEVER place radioactive components in your pocket.
Use extreme care NOT to break radioactive components while handling
them.
NEVER remove radioactive components from cartons until you are ready
to use them.
If any of these components are broken, notify the local RPO immediately.
The RPO will survey the immediate area for radiological contamination
and will supervise the removal of broken components.
The above listed radioactive components will not be repaired or
disassembled.
Disposal of broken, unserviceable, or unwanted radioactive components
will be accomplished in accordance with the instructions in AR 755-15.
C
TM 11-5815-334-10
WARNING
SERIOUS INJURY OR EVEN DEATH CAN HAPPEN IF THE FOLLOWING ARE NOT CAREFULLY
OBSERVED WHEN INSTALLING AND USING THE ANTENNAS USED WITH YOUR RADIO SETS
1. ARE THERE ANY POWERLINES IN YOUR AREA OF OPERATION ?
2. HOW HIGH ARE THESE POWERLINES ?
3. HOW TALL ARE THE POLES OR TOWERS CARRYING POWERLINES ?
MOBILE OPERATION WITH WHIP ANTENNAS
DO NOT STOP YOUR VEHICLE UNDER POWERLINES.
●
IF POSSIBLE, TRY TO MAINTAIN MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS WITH
YOUR ANTENNA(S) TIED DOWN .
●
MAKE SURE AN ANTENNA TIP CAP IS SECURELY TAPED ON THE
END OF EACH WHIP ANTENNA.
●
DO NOT LEAN AGAINST OR TOUCH A WHIP ANTENNA WHILE THE
TRANSMITTER IS ON.
● DURING
CROSS-COUNTRY OPERATION, DO NOT ALLOW ANYONE
TO STICK AN ARM, LEG OR WEAPON OVER THE SIDES OF THE
VEHICLE.
IF YOUR ANTENNA ACCIDENTALLY TOUCHES A
POWERLINE AND A LEG, ARM OR WEAPON CONTACTS A DAMP
BUSH OR THE GROUND, A SERIOUS OR FATAL ACCIDENT CAN
HAPPEN .
●
D
IF YOU ARE NOT SURE THAT AN ANTENNA ON YOUR VEHICLE
WILL CLEAR A POWERLINE, STOP BEFORE YOU GET CLOSE
TO THE POWERLINE AND EITHER CAREFULLY TIE DOWN THE
ANTENNA OR REMOVE ANTENNA SECTIONS TO MAKE SURE
THAT YOU CAN SAFELY DRIVE UNDER THE POWERLINE.
TM 11-5815-334-10
FIXED OPERATION WITH LONG RANGE ANTENNAS
WARNING
TELECOPING ANTENNA
TYPICAL TOWER
MAST
EXTENDED RANGE
DOUBLET ANTENNA
ANTENNA
NEVER ERECT THESE L0NG RANGE ANTENNAS DIRECTLY UNDER POWERLINES.
IF YOU MUST ERECT THESE LONG RANGE ANTENNAS NEAR POWERLINES, POWERLINE POLES OR
TOWERS, OR BUILDINGS WITH OVERHEAD POWERLINE CONNECTIONS, NEVER PUT THE ANTENNA
CLOSER THAN TWO TIMES THE ANTENNA HEIGHT FROM THE BASE OF THE POWERLINE, POLE,
TOWER OR BUILDINGS.
NEVER ATTEMPT TO ERECT ANY LONG RANGE ANTENNA WITHOUT A FULL TEAM.
BEFORE ERECTING ANY LONG RANGE ANTENNA, INSPECT ALL THE PARTS MAKING UP THE
ANTENNA KIT. DO NOT ERECT THE ANTENNA IF ANY PARTS ARE MISSING OR DAMAGED.
DO AS MUCH OF THE ASSEMBLY WORK AS POSSIBLE ON THE GROUND.
WHEN ERECTING THE ANTENNA, ALLOW ONLY TEAM PERSONNEL IN THE ERECTION AREA.
MAKE SURE THAT THE AREA FOR THE ANCHORS IS FIRM. IF THE GROUND IS MARSHY OR SANDY,
GET SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS FROM YOUR CREW CHIEF OR SUPERVISOR ON HOW TO REINFORCE
THE ANCHORS,.
WHEN SELECTING LOCATIONS FOR ANCHORS, AVOID TRAVELED AREAS AND ROADS. IF YOU CANNOT
AVOID THESE AREAS, GET SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS FROM YOUR SUPERVISOR AS TO WHAT CLEARANCE YOUR GUY WIRES AND ROPES MUST HAVE OVER THE TRAVELED AREAS AND ROAD.
CLEARLY MARK ALL GUY WIRES AND ROPES WITH THE WARNING FLAGS OR SIGNS SUPPLIED BY YOUR
U N I T . IN AN EMERGENCY, USE STRIPS OF WHITE CLOTH AS WARNING STREAMERS,
IF YOU SUSPECT THAT POWERLINES HAVE MADE ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH YOUR ANTENNA, STOP
OPERATING, ROPE OFF THE ANTENNA AREA, AND NOTIFY YOUR SUPERIORS.
IF THE WEATHER IN YOUR AREA CAN CAUSE ICE TO FORM ON YOUR LONG RANGE ANTENNA AND ITS
GUY WIRES AND ROPES, ADD EXTRA GUYS TO SUPPORT THE SYSTEM. ROPE OFF THE AREA AND
POST IT WITH WARNING SIGNS LIKE “BEWARE OF FALLING ICE".
DO NOT TRY TO ERECT ANY ANTENNA DURING AN ELECTRlCAL STORM.
KEEP A SHARP EYE ON YOUR ANCHORS AND GUYS.
BEFORE AND AFTER BAD WEATHER.
CHECK THEM DAILY AND IMMEDIATELY
Change 2
E
TM 11-5815-334-10
WARNING
TRICHLOROTRIFLUOROETHANE
Fumes of TRICHLOROTRIFLUOROETHANE are poisonous. Provide adequate ventilation
whenever you use TRICHLOROTRIFLUOROETHANE. Do not use solvent near heat or open
flame. TRICHLOROTRIFLUOROETHANE will not burn, but heat changes the gas into
poisonous, irritating fumes. DO NOT breathe the fumes or vapors. TRICHLOROTRlFLUOROETHANE dissolves natural skin oils. DO NOT get the solvent on your skin, use
gloves, sleeves and an apron which the solvent cannot penetrate. If the solvent is taken
internally, consult a physician immediately.
WARNING
COMPRESSED AIR
Compressed air is dangerous and can cause serious bodily harm if protective means or
methods are not observed to prevent a chip or particle (of whatever size) from being
blown into the eyes or unbroken skin of the operator or other personnel. Compressed air
shall not be used for cleaning purposes except where reduced to less than 29 psi,
(199.95 Kilopascals) and then only with effective chip guarding and personnel protective equipment. Do not use compressed air to dry parts when TRICHLOROTRIFLUOROETHANE has been used.
CAUTION
Throughout the manual, the primary power rating is given as 115 v ac ±10%. AS the
equipment power switches are turned on, the primary voltage may drop to some value
in the ±10% range, but it should not remain at the changed level, but return to the
original 115 v ac. If the level does drop and stay at a constant level, have the repair
person check the condition of the last circuit turned on which created this condition.
F
Change 2
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
Washington, DC, 5 March 1985
Technical Manual
No. 11-5815-334-10
OPERATOR’S MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RADIO TELETYPEWRITER SETS
AN/GRC-122 (NSN 5815-00-401-9719)
AN/GRC-122A (NSN 5815-00-167-7998)
AN/GRC-122B (NSN 5815-00-937-5295)
AN/GRC-122C (NSN 5815-01-095-1211)
AN/GRC-122D (NSN 5815-01-096-0428)
AN/GRC-122E (NSN 5815-01-095-1212)
AN/GRC-142 (NSN 5815-00-401-9720)
AN/GRC-142A (NSN 5815-00-168-1556)
AN/GRC-142B (NSN 5815-00-443-5511)
AN/GRC-142C (NSN 5815-01-100-6815)
AN/GRC-142D (NSN 5815-01-104-7264)
AN/GRC-142E (NSN 5815-01-095-6258)
(EIC: GFE)
(EIC: GFA)
(EIC: GFJ)
(EIC: GFL)
(EIC: GFP)
(EIC: GFM)
(EIC: GFF)
(EIC: GFB)
(EIC: GFG)
(EIC: GFR)
(EIC: GFT)
(EIC: GFN)
USED WITH OR WITHOUT INSTALLATION KIT, ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT KIT MK-2488/G
REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS
You can help improve this manual. If you find any mistakes or if you know of a
way to improve the procedures, please let us know. Mail your letter, DA Form
2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms), or DA Form
manual
direct
to:
in
this
located
back
of
2028-2
Commander, US Army Communications-Electronics Command and Fort
Monmouth, ATTN: AMSEL-LC-LM-LT, Fort Monmouth, NJ 07703-5007. A reply
will be furnished direct to you.
Page
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ii
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
Section I
II
III
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Principles of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-5
1-29
CHAPTER 2
OPERATING lNSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Section I
Description and Use of Operator’s Controls
and Indictors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS)
and System Readiness Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.................................................
Operation Under Usual Conditions
Operation Under Unusual Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHAPTER 1
II
III
IV
Change 4
2-1
2-26
2-29
2-147
i
TM 11-5815-334-10
Page
CHAPTER 3
Section I
II
III
APPENDIX A
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Lubrication Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
B
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
C
ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
D
EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
INDEX-1
INDEX
FOLDOUTS
...........................................................................................................................
FO-1
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This manual is designed to help you operate and maintain the AN/GRC-122/142(*).
The front cover table of contents is provided for quick reference to important information. There is also an index located in the final pages for use in locating specific items
of information.
Measurements in this manual are sometimes given in both US standard and metric units.
A metric to US standard conversion chart can be found on the inside back cover.
Read all preliminary information found at the beginning of each task. It has important
information and safety instructions you must follow before beginning the task.
Warning pages are located in the front of this manual. You should learn the warnings
before operating or doing maintenance on the equipment.
Paragraphs in this manual are numbered by chapter and order of appearance within a
chapter. A subject index appears at the beginning of each chapter, listing sections that
are included in that chapter. A more specific subject index is located at the beginning of
each section to help you find the exact paragraph you’re looking for.
This manual covers 24 different models. Applicable model numbers will be listed in
paragraph titles. If paragraphs are applicable to all models of the equipment, an
asterisk (*) will follow the model number.
Instructions for performing operator PMCS are located in paragraph 2-4.
Instructions for using operator troubleshooting tables are located in paragraph 3-1.
ii
Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
Subject
Section
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I
Equipment Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II
Technical Principles of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III
Page
1-1
1-5
1-29
Section I GENERAL INFORMATION
Subject
. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Forms, Records, and Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hand Receipts (-HR) Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Consolidated Index of Army Publications and Blank Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reporting Equipment Improvement Recommendations (EIRs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Destruction of Army Electronics Materiel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Administrative Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nomenclature Cross-Reference List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Abbreviations .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security Classification Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Para
Page
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-6.1
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-10
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-4
1-1. SCOPE.
Type of Manual: Operator’s maintenance manual.
Equipment Name and Model Number: The 12 shelters described in this manual are radio teletypewriter
sets. There are two basic configurations; AN/GRC-122, which can be configured as AN/GRC-122A,
AN/GRC-122B, AN/GRC-122C, AN/GRC-122D or AN/GRG122E, and AN/GRC-142, which can be
configured as AN/GRC-142A/AN/GRGC-142B, AN/GRC-142C, AN/GRC-142D or AN/GRC-142E. The
asterisk (*) following AN/GRC-122(*) or AN/GRC-142(*) Indicates all models of that configuration. An
asterisk (*) following AN/GRC-122/142(*) indicates all 12 models.
Purpose of Equipment Provides a front-line secure or nonsecure radio or teletypewriter one-way
reversible, AN/GRC-142(*), or simultaneous transmission and reception, AN/GRC-122(*),
communications system. The communications system is housed in a mobile, all weather front-line
shelter.
1-2. MAINTENANCE FORMS, RECORDS, AND REPORTS.
a. Reports of Maintenance and Unsatisfactory Equipment Department of the Army forms and
procedures used for equipment maintenance will be those prescribed by DA Pam 738-750, as contained
in Maintenance Management Update.
b. Reporting of item and Packaging Discrepancies. Fill out and forward SF 364 (Report of
Discrepancy (ROD)) as prescribed in AR 735-11-2/DLAR 4140.55 SECNAVINST 4355.18/AFR
400-54/MCO 4430.3H.
c. Transportation Discrepancy Report (TDR) (SF 361). Fill out and forward Transportation
Discrepancy Report (TDR) (SF 361) as prescribed in AR 55-38/NAVSUPINST 4610.33C/AFR 75-18/MCO
P4610.19D/DLAR 4500.15.
Change 4
1-1
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-3. HAND RECEIPT (-HR) MANUALS.
This manual has a companion document with a TM number followed by -HR (which stands for Hand
Receipt). The TM 11-5815-334-10-HR for AN/GRC-122/142(*) consists of preprinted hand receipts (DA
Form 2062) that list end item related equipment (i.e., components of end item list, basic issue items list,
and additional authorization list) you must account for. As an aid to property accountability, additional
-HR manuals maybe requisitioned from the US Army Adjutant General Publications Center in Baltimore,
Maryland, in accordance with the procedures in Chapter 3, AR 310-2 and DA Pam 310-10.
1-4. CONSOLIDATED INDEX OF ARMY PUBLICATIONS AND BLANK FORMS.
Refer to the latest issue of DA Pam 25-30 to determine whether there are new editions, changes, or
additional publications pertaining to the equipment.
1-5. REPORTING EQUIPMENT IMPROVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS (EIRs).
If your equipment needs improvement, let us know. Send us an EIR. You, the user, are
the only one who can tell us what you don’t like about your equipment. Let us know why
you don’t like the design or performance. Put it on an SF 368 (Product Quality Deficiency
Report). Mail it to: Commander, US Army Communications-Electronics Command and
Fort Monmouth, ATTN: AMSEL-LC-ED-CFO, Fort Monmouth, New Jersey 07703-5023.
We’ll send you a reply.
1-6. DESTRUCTION OF ARMY ELECTRONICS MATERIEL
Destruction of Army electronics materiel to prevent enemy use shall be in accordance with TM 750-244-2.
Comsec equipment and keying information has first priority. in addition, refer to KOA-133( ) TSEC for
additional information on the TSEC/KG-27.
1-6.1. ADMINISTRATIVE STORAGE.
Administrative storage of equipment issued to and used by Army activities will have Preventive
Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) performed before storing. When removing the equipment
from administrative storage, the PMCS checks should be performed to assure operational readiness.
1-7. NOMENCLATURE CROSS-REFERENCE LIST.
This list contains common names used throughout this manual in place of official nomenclature.
COMMON NAME
amplifier
AN/UGC-74 A(V)3 or
AN/UGC-74 B(V)3
control group
control panel
doublet antenna
dummy box
handset
headset
1-2
Change 4
I
OFFICIAL NOMENCLATURE
Amplifier RF AM-3349/GRC-106
Terminal, Communications AN/UGC74A(V)3 or Terminal, Communications
AN/UGC-74B(V)3
Control Group, AN/GRA-6
Switch Assembly SA-1554/GRC-142
Antenna Group, AN/GRA-50
Dummy Box J-2728/GRC-142
Handset, H-33( )PT
Headset, Electrical H-227/H
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-7.
NOMENCLATURE CROSS REFERENCE LIST. (CONT)
COMMON NAME
key telegraph
local control
loudspeaker
microphone
modem
power meter
power supply
radio set
remote box
remote control
RT-662/GRC
shelter
switch assembly
switch box
telephone
o rTA-312/PT
TT-76(*)/GGC
TT-98/FG
voltmeter
whip antenna
1-8.
OFFICIAL NOMENCLATURE
Key Telegraph KY-116/U
Local Control, C-434/GRC
Dynamic Loudspeaker LS-166/U
Microphone, M-29B/U
Modem, MD-522(*)/GRC
Standing Wave Ratio Power Meter
ME-165/GRC
Power Supply PP-4763(*)/GRC
Radio Set, AN/GRC-106
Remote Control Box, C-7279/GRC-142
Remote Control, C-433/GRC
Radio Transmitter RT-662/GRC
Shelter Electrical Equipment
S-250/G or S-318(*)/G
Switch Assembly SA-1650/GRG
Switch Box SA-1555/GRC-142
Telephone Set TA-312/PT
Teletypewriter Reperforator/Transmitter
TT-76(*)/GGC
Teletypewriter, TT-98/FG or TT-722(*)/TG
Voltmeter, ME-345/GRC
Whip Antenna Consisting of:
Mast Base AB-652/GR
Mast Section MS-116A
Mast Section MS-117A
Mast Section MS-118A
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS.
ABBREVIATION
agc
am.
bfo
CW
dx
fsk
ma
nik
nsk
OW
owr
ssb
tty
vswr
wpm
WORD OR TERM
automatic gain control
amplitude modulation
beat frequency oscillator
continuous wave
duplex
frequency shift keyed
milliamps
normal input keying
narrow frequency shift keyed
order wire
one way reversible
single sideband
teletypewriter
voltage standing wave ratio
words per minute
1-3
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-9.
GLOSSARY.
This list contains definitions of unusual words or terms used in this manual.
WORD OR TERM
1-10.
DEFINITION
ASCII
A code that uses eight bits to make up one
character.
Baudot Code
A transmission code used in tty operation. One
character is made up of five bits.
Baud Rate
A unit of measurement used to determine the
speed of data transfer.
Compatible AM.
An am. signal that is compatible with ssb.
Continuous Wave (CW)
Electric current of constant amplitude and
frequency.
Diversity
The capability of sending the same signal
simultaneously over several different transmission paths.
Duplex (dx)
Transmission and reception at the same time.
Frequency Shift Keying (fsk)
850 Hz, Narrow Frequency Shift
Keying (nsk) 85 Hz
A form of frequency modulation in which the modulating wave shifts the output frequency between
two predetermined values (mark and space).
Halyard
A rope for hoisting and lowering.
One-Way Reversible (owr)
Transmission in one direction, and back in the
opposite direction but not at the same time.
Order Wire (OW)
Transmission path between two stations that is
independent of channels in use.
Single Sideband (ssb)
Transmission of either upper or lower sideband
to cut power and bandwidth to one-half that of
a normal transmission.
SECURITY CLASSIFICATION MARKINGS.
The following codes tell you the classification of the title and contents of a manual:
a. When a (U) appears before the title of the document, it means that the title of the document is
unclassified.
b. When a (C) appears before the document number, it means the contents of the document are
classified confidential.
1-4
TM 11-5815-334-10
Section II EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
Para
Subject
Equipment Characteristics, Capabilities and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Location and Description of Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Difference Between Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Equipment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Page
1-5
1-6
1-23
1-24
1-11. EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS, CAPABILITIES AND FEATURES.
CHARACTERISTICS
Can be operated over land lines from a remote site up to 1 mile away from shelter.
The AN/GRC-122(*) is capable of simultaneously transmit and receive (Duplex operation).
Remote duplex operation.
Teletypewriter one-way reversible transmit/eceive over land lines when not operating in duplex mode.
Can operate on 110 vac 60 Hz, or 28 vdc.
CAPABILITIES AND FEATURES
Transportable by air or truck.
Can be used in secure or nonsecure operations.
Accommodates security equipment.
Can be used with up to six teletypewriters.
Communication between shelter and remote site over land lines.
AN/GRC-122/142C, D, and E models (with or without MK-2488/G) are modified to incorporate
Communications Terminal AN/UGC-74A(V)3.
AN/UGC-74A(V)3 can compose, edit, transmit, receive, store, and print messages.
Terminal is usable at signaling speeds of 45.5, 50,7 5, 150, 300, 600, and 1200 baud (bits per
second) using the internal clock. (45.5, 50 and 75 with MK-2488/G.)
AN/GRC-122/142(*) operates at a frequency range of 2.0 to 29.999 MHz and is capable of the
following modes of operation:
I
85 Hertz, 85-Hertz diversity, or 850-Hertz fsk local owr operation,
Compatible am or ssb voice owr local or remote operation.
Simultaneous local 85-Hertz nsk and voice owr reception.
Cw local or remote operation.
Change 2
1-5
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-11.
EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS, CAPABILITIES AND FEATURES. (CONT)
AN/GRC-122(*) contains the following additional equipment for duplex operations:
RT-662/GRC
Antenna
Auxiliaty loudspeaker
Invertor or motor generator
Additional TT-98/FG or Communications Terminal AN/UGC-74A(V)3.
AN/GRC-142(*) does not have the additional units listed above but is wired to accommodate this
equipment. With the addition of teletypewriter TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3 at a remote site, the
following modes of operation are possible:
85 Hertz, 85-Hertz diversity, remote owr operation
85-Hertz nsk plus voice remote owr operation.
Radio Teletypewriter Sets AN/GRC-122/142(*) (without MK-2488/G) can be used with each other
and also with radio teletypewriter sets:
AN/VSC-2
AN/VSC-3
AN/GRC-46 series
AN/GRC-114
AN/GRC-26 series.
Radio Teletypewriter Sets AN/GRC-122/142(*)(with MK-2488/G) can be used with each other and with
Radio Teletypewriter Sets AN/VSC-2 and AN/VSC-3 (with MK-2488/G).
1-12.
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS.
The two different shelters used (S-250 and S-318(*)/G) provide three basic configurations of equipment by
the rack arrangement. The location and description of major components are described in three sections:
AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C; AN/GRC-122/142A and B; and AN/GRC-122/142D and E models.
NOTE
The following illustrations and descriptions are directly applicable to models which do
not have the MK-2488/G. The MK-2488/G is installed by modification described in
TM 11-5815-616-13 for shelter configuration. Application of the modification does not
change the location of the major components in the shelter. The modification will
adapt the COMSEC shelves which hold current security equipment to hold a mounting
base MT-6442/G which will support a Digital Loop Encryption Device (DLED)
TSEC/KG-84 or TSEC/KG-84A and on Interconnecting Box J-4024A/U for interfacing the
DLED to the Teletypewriter inputs and to a VF (Voice Frequency) terminal or a Radio
MODEM. The TSEC/KW-7 will be replaced by the TSEC/KG-84/J-4024 combination.
Except for TSEC/KG-84(*)/G, the MK-2488/G provides all necessary material to make
the change.
1-6
Change 4
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-12.
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS. (CONT)
EXTERIOR ROADSIDE AND REAR WALL OF AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND C MODELS
(S-318(*)/G Shelter Shown)
EL6VR010
1 AC Entrance Box. Provides for connection to an external 110 vac power source through AC INPUT
connector.
2 Ground Rods. Used for externally grounding shelter to earth.
3 Fuel Can. Used for storage and supply of fuel for fuel heater.
4 Owr-Dx-Send Doublet Antenna Connector. Used for connection of doublet antenna to shelter
during fixed or mobile-at-halt operation. Owr lead-in cable connector is located on roadside and
dx receive on rear wall under antenna base.
5 Shade Tarpaulin Supports. Provides mounting facilities for shade tarpaulin to top of shelter.
6 Antenna Assembly., Consists of Mast Sections MS-116-A, MS-117-A, MS-118-A, and Antenna
Base AB-652/GR. Used primarily for mobile operation. A second duplex antenna assembly,
used on AN/GRC-122(*) models only, is mounted on upper rear curbside wall.
7 Personnel Exhaust Blower. Draws in fresh air, through filtered inlet in door, to cool shelter.
8 DC Entrance Box. Provides for connection to an external 28.5 dc power source through DC lNPUT connector. Contains shelter ground stud for grounding and connector terminals for remote
operation.
1-7
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-12.
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS. (CONT)
FRONT AND CURBSIDE WALL OF AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND C MODELS
EL6VR007
1 Radio Set AN/GRC-106(*). High-frequency, single sideband, radio receiver- transmitter set,
consisting of Radio Transmitter RT-662/GRC or Radio Transmitter RT-834/GRC and Amplifier
AM-3349/GRC-106. Installed with amplifier mounted on top of radio, and operates over a
frequency range of 2.0 to 29.999 MHz. For a detailed description, refer to TM 11-5820-520-12.
2 Modem MD-522(*)/GRC. Modulator-demodulator designed primarily for use as part of a radio
tty system, Converts dc pulses from tty equipment to frequency shifted audio tones (850 Hz fsk or
85 Hz nsk). During reception, converts received audio tones to dc pulses, which are applied to
tty equipment. For a detailed description, refer to TM 11-5805-387-15-1 or -2.
3 Duplex Receiver-Transmitter RT-662/GRC (used on AN/GRC-122(*) models only). Receiver
and low-level transmitter primarily used for duplex operation. Allows operator to receive and
transmit simultaneously when used with radio set. For a detailed description, refer to
TM 11-5820-520-10.
4 Power Distribution Panel SB-3018/GRC-142, Controls all dc power within shelter and is rack
mounted. All controls and indicators are front panel mounted.
1-8
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-12.
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS. (CONT)
5 Interconnecting Boxes J-2728/GRC-142. Used as tty junction boxes during normal operation.
Removed, and replaced by security equipment, when shelter is operated in secure mode.
6 Control Group AN/G RC-6. Allows operator to control radio set from remote site up to 1 mile
away. Makes provisions for local control of radio set through continuous dc circuit and for twoway telephone communication between remote and local control operators. Consists of Local
Control C-434/GRC, Cable J-654/G, Remote Control C-433/GRC, and Handset H-33/PT.
Remote control and associated components are stored in shelter. For a detailed description,
refer to TM 11-5038.
7 Heater. Provides heated air when needed. Operates only in ac operation. For a detailed
description, refer to TM 5-4520-236-14.
8 Telephone Set TA-312/PT. Two-wire, battery-operated, field telephone containing handcrank
for generating ring-down signal. Used for telephone communication from shelter. A second
telephone is stored in compartment underneath TT-76A/GGC and is used for communication between local and remote operators. For a detailed description, refer to TM 11-5805-201-12.
9 Storage Compartment. Used to store spare parts and items needed to maintain shelter. A
second storage compartment is located on roadside of shelter.
10 Motor-Generator Inverter PU-724/U (owr inverter). Converts 28.5 vdc input to 110 vac output.
Provides power to TT-76A/GGC, TT-98/FG, or AN/UGC-74A(V)3, A second duplex motor
generator, used on AN/G RC-122(*) models only, is located in front of owr inverter and is used
for duplex TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3. Inverters are not used during ac operation.
11 DC Power Supply PP-4763(*)/GRC. Converts 115 vac, 60 Hz to 28.5 vdc at 50 amp. Provides
major components with dc voltage in ac operation. For a detailed description, refer to
TM 11-5820-765-12.
12 Distribution Box J-2776/GRC-142. Mounted under front TT-98/FG. Provides switching and
power distribution for shelter operation from ac or dc power source combinations.
1-9
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-12.
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS. (CONT)
FRONT AND CURBSIDE WALL OF AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND C MODELS (CONT)
EL6VR008
1 TT-76A/GGC Storage Drawers, Used for storage of TT-76A/GGC punched or unpunched tapes.
2
Terminal Communications AN/U GC-74A(V)3 (used in AN/GRC-122/142C models only)
Provides a full-duplex, asynchronous (ASCll or baudot) communications capability with MlL-STD188C and normal input keying (nik) interfaces. Used to compose, edit, transmit, receive, store,
and print messages at signaling speeds of 45.5, 50, 75, 150, 300, 600, and 1200 baud (bits per
second) utilizing internal clock. Other rates may be used when external clock i S provided A
second duplex AN/U GC-74A(V)3 is used in AN/GRC-122(*) models durlng duplex operation. For a
detailed description, refer to TM 11-5815-602-12. When your equipment is modified with MK2488/G, the baud rates are Iimited to 45.5, 50, and 75. The J-4024/U interface box circuits Iimit
the baud rate (45.5, 50 and 75 with MK-2488/G).
or
Teletypewriter TT-95/FG (used in AN/GRC-122/142 Plain models only). Slide mounted on AN/GRC122/142 Plain models, allows for transmitting, monitoring, and receiving tty messages in baudot
code. Messages are printed at 60 to 100 words per minute as page copy A second TT-988/FG,
used for duplex operation in AN/G RC-122 models, is shelf mounted on curbside storage
compartment. For a detailed description, refer to TM 11-5815-200-12
3
Switchbox SA-1555/GRC-142. Provides means of obtaining low-level tty loop current when
operating in secure mode. (with TSEC/KW7 only). Permits switching TT-76A/GGC between owr
and duplex circuits on AN/GRC- 122 models only.
4
Switch assembly SA-1554/GRC-142. Allows operator to switch between local and remote tty
modes of operation and loop current adjustment. Routes telephone and radio set mike/keying
circuits. Interconnects dummy boxes through front panel tty jacks.
1-10
Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-12.
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS. (CONT)
REAR AND ROADSIDE WALL OF AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND C MODELS
EL6VR009
1 Shelter Fuel Heater. Used to heat shelter in dc mode of operation. Operates on gasoline,
kerosene, burner fuel, or jet fuel. For a detailed description, refer to TM 5-4520-211-14.
2 Standing Wave Radio Power Meter ME-165/G. Used for measuring transmitter output power and
standing wave ratio when doublet antenna is used. May be used for terminating amplifier power
output during radio silence operation. For a detailed description, refer to TM 11-6625-333-15.
3 Low-Level Signaling Device TT-523/GGC. Used with TT-76A/GGC to make off-line tapes under
secure conditions. For a detailed description, refer to TM 11-5815-338-15.
4 Teletypewriter-Reperforator/Transmitter TT-76A/GGC. Slide mounted, allows transmission
by either manual keyboard operation or from punched tape. Messages received in baudot code by
TT-76A/GGC are printed on and punched through paper tape. Punched tape with message
received can later be used for transmission. Message tape may be prepared locally without
disturbing connected signal circuits. Operating speeds are 60 or 100 words per minute. For a
detailed description, refer to TM 11-5815-238-10 or -20.
5 Air Conditioner (used on AN/GRC-122 and 142 serial numbers 1 through 697 only). Provides
6,000 Btu of cooling during hot weather and 1250 watts of heating during cold weather. Used
during ac operation only.
1-11
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-12.
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS. (CONT)
AN/GRC-122/142A configurations are contained in S-318(*)/G shelter and AN/GRC-122/142B
configurations are contained in S-250/G shelter.
FRONT AND CURBSIDE WALL OF AN/GRC-122/142A AND B MODELS
EL6VR011
1 Radio Set AN/GRC-106(*). High-frequency, radio receiver-transmitter set consisting of Radio
Transmitter RT-662/GRC or Radio Transmitter RT-834/GRC and Amplifier AM-3349/GRC-106.
Installed with amplifier mounted on top of radio, and operates over a frequency range of 2.0 to
29.999 MHz. For a detailed description, refer to TM 11-5820-520-12.
2 Modem MD-522(*)/GRC. Modulator-demodulator designed primarily for use as part of a radio
tty system. Converts dc pulses from tty equipment to frequency shifted audio tones (850 Hz fsk or
85 Hz nsk). During reception, converts received audio tones to dc pulses, which are applied to
tty equipment. For a detailed description, refer to TM 11-5805-387-15-1 or -2.
3 Duplex Receiver-Transmitter RT-662/GRC (used on AN/GRC-122(*) models only). Receiver
and low-level transmitter primarily used for duplex operation. Allows operator to receive and
transmit simultaneously when used with radio set. For a detailed description, refer to
TM 11-5820-520-10.
4 Power Distribution Panel SB-3358/GRC. Controls all dc and ac power within shelter and is rack
mounted. All controls and indicators are front panel mounted.
1-12
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-12.
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS. (CONT)
5 DC Power Supply PP-4763(*)/GRC. Converts 115 vac, 60 Hz to 28.5 vdc at 50 amp. Provides
major components with dc voltage in ac operation. For a detailed description, refer to
TM 11-5820-765-12.
6 Motor-Generator Inverter PU-724/U (owr inverter). Converts 28.5 vdc input to 110 vac output.
Provides power to TT-76A/GGC, TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74(V)3. A second duplex motor generator, used on AN/G RC-122(*) models only, is located in front of owr inverter and is used for
duplex TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3. Inverters are not used during ac operation.
7 Telephone Set TA-312/PT. Two-wire, battery-operated, field telephone containing handcrank
for generating ring-down signal. Used for telephone communication from shelter. A second
telephone is stored in compartment underneath TT-76A/GGC and is used for communication between local and remote operators. For a detailed description, refer to TM 11-5805-201-12.
8 Storage Compartment. Used to store spare parts and items needed to maintain shelter. A second storage compartment is located on roadside of shelter.
9 Heater. Provides heated air when needed. Operates only in ac operation. For a detailed description, refer to TM 5-4520-236-14.
10 Control Group AN/GRA-6. Allows operator to control radio set from remote site up to 1 mile
away. Makes provisions for local control of radio set through continuous dc circuit and for two.
way telephone communication between remote and local Control operators. Consists of Local
Control C-434/GRC, Cable J-654/G, Remote Control C-433/GRC, and Handset H-33/PT.
Remote control and associated components are stored in shelter. For a detailed description,
refer to TM 11-5038.
Change 2 1.13
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-12.
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS. (CONT)
FRONT AND CURBSIDE WALL OF AN/GRC-122/142A AND B MODELS (CONT)
EL6VR012
1 Tape/Paper Storage Basket, Used for storage of TT-76A/GGC punched or unpunched tapes.
2 Teletypewriter TT-98/FG (used in AN/GRC-122/142A and B models only). Allows for transmitting, monitoring, and receiving tty messages in baudot code. Messages are printed at 60 to 100
words per minute as page copy,.A second TT-98/FG, used for duplex operation in AN/GRC-122
models, is shelf mounted on curbside storage compartment. For a detailed description. refer to
TM 11-5815-200-12.
3 Interconnecting Boxes J-2728/GRC-142. Used as tty junction boxes during normal operation,
Removed, and replaced by security equipment, when shelter is operated in secure mode,
4 Power Terminal Assembly. Provides receptacles for power hookup of equipment. Permanently
mounted on front wall.
5
Switch Assembly SA-1650/GRC Allows switching between local and remote tty modes of
operation and switching of TT-76A/GGC between owr and duplex circuits. When operating in
secure mode, with TSEC/KW7 only, a set low-level loop current is provided for tty equipment.
Interconnects dummy boxes through front panel tty jacks.
6
Shelf for mounting security equipment.
1-4 Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-12.
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS. (CONT)
REAR AND ROADSIDE WALL OF AN/GRC-122/142A AND B MODELS
EL6VR013
1 Shelter Fuel Heater. Used to heat shelter in dc mode of operation. Operates on gasoline,
kerosene, burner fuel, or jet fuel.
2 Standing Wave Ratio Power Meter ME-165/G. Used for measuring transmitter output power and
standing wave ratio when doublet antenna is used. May be used for terminating amplifier power
output during radio silence operation. For a detailed description, refer to TM 11-6625-333-15.
3 Low-Level Signaling Device TT-523/GGC. Used with TT-76A/GGC to make off-line tapes under
secure conditions. For a detailed description, refer to TM 11-5815-338-15.
4 Teletypewriter-Reperforator/Transmitter TT-76A/GGC. Slide mounted, allows transmission by
either manual keyboard operation or from punched tape. Messages received in baudot code by
TT-76A/GGC are printed on and punched through paper tape. Punched tape with message received can later be used for transmission. Message tape may be prepared locally without
disturbing connected signal circuits. Operating speeds are 60 or 100 words per minute. For a
detailed description, refer to TM 11-5815-238-10 or -20.
Change 1
1-15
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-12.
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS. (CONT)
FRONT AND CURBSIDE WALL OF AN/GRC-122/142D AND E MODELS
EL6VR014
1 Radio Set AN/GRC-106(*). High-frequency, radio receiving-transmitting set consisting of
Radio Transmitter RT-662/GRC or Radio Transmitter RT-834/GRC and Amplifier AM-3349/GRC106. Installed with amplifier mounted on top of radio, and operates over a frequency range of 2.0
to 29.999 MHz. For a detailed description, refer to TM 11-5820-520-12.
2 Modem MD-522(*)/GRC. Modulator-demodulator designed primarily for use as part of a radio
tty system. Converts dc pulses from tty equipment to frequency shifted audio tones (850 Hz fsk or
85 Hz nsk). During reception, converts received audio tones to dc pulses, which are applied to
tty equipment. For a detailed description, refer to TM 11-5805-387-15-1.
3 Duplex Receiver-Transmitter RT-662/GRC (used on AN/GRC-122(*) models only). Receiver
and low-level transmitter primarily used for duplex operation. Allows operator to receive and
transmit simultaneously when used with radio set. For a detailed description, refer to
TM 11-5820-520-10.
4 Power Distribution Panel SC-F-960672. Controls all ac and dc power within shelter and is rack
mounted. All controls and indicators are front panel mounted.
1-16
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-12.
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS. (CONT)
5 DC Power Supply PP-4763(*)/GRC. Converts 115 vac, 60 Hz to 28.5 vdc at 50 amp. Provides
major components with dc voltage in ac operation. For a detailed description, refer to
TM 11-5820-765-12.
6 Inverter PU-724A/U (solid state inverter). Converts 28.5 vdc input to 110 vac output. Provides
power to TT-76A/GGC and AN/UGC-74A(V)3. A second duplex inverter, used on AN/GRC122(*) models only, supplies duplex AN/UGC-74A(V)3 with power. Duplex inverter is located
under front roadside end of rack. Inverters are not used during ac operation.
CAUTION
Inverter PU-724A/U to be used with authorized equipment only. Do not exceed 400
watts. Overheating of inverter could cause fracture of solid state components.
7 Telephone Set TA-312/PT. Two-wire, battery-operated, field telephone containing handcrank
for generating ring-down signal. Used for telephone communication from shelter. A second
telephone is stored in compartment underneath TT-76A/GGC and is used for communication
between local and remote operators. For a detailed description, refer to TM 11-5805-201-12.
8 Heater. Provides heated air when needed. Operates only in ac operation.
9 Storage Compartment. Used to store spare parts and items needed to maintain shelter. A second storage compartment is located on roadside of shelter.
10 Control Group AN/GRA-6 Allows operator to control radio set from remote site up to 1 mile
away. Makes provisions for local control of radio set through continuous dc circuit and for two
way telephone communication between remote and local control operators. Consists of Local
Control C-434/GRC, Cable J-654/G, Remote Control C-433/GRC, and Handset H-33/PT.
Remote control and associated components are stored in shelter. For a detailed description,
refer to TM 11-5038.
11 Interconnecting Boxes J-2728/GRC-142. Used as tty junction boxes during normal operation.
Removed, and replaced by security equipment, when shelter is operating in secure mode.
NOTE
Only one MK-2488/G is needed to replace the two TSEC/KW7 equipments. The
TSEC/KG-84 is capable of both Duplex and OWR radio operation. A second MK2488/G is required for remote operation.
Change 2 1-17
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-12.
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS. (CONT)
FRONT AND CURBSIDE WALL OF AN/GRC-122/142D AND E MODELS (CONT)
EL6VR015
1 Tape/Paper Storage Basket. Used for storage of TT-76A/GGC punched or unpunched tapes.
2
Terminal Communications AN/UGC-74A(V)3. Provides a full-duplex, asynchronous (ASCII or
baudot) communications capability with MIL-STD-188C and normal input keying (nik) interfaces.
Used to compose, edit, transmit, receive, store, and print messages at signaling speeds of 45.5,
50, 75, 150, 300, 600, and 1200 baud (bits per second) utilizlng internal clock Other rates may be
used when external clock is provided (with MK-2488/G baud rates limited to 45.5, 50 and 75. ) A
second duplex AN/UGC-74A(V)3 is used in AN/GRC-122(*) models during duplex operation. For a
detailed description, refer to TM 11-5815-602-10.
3 Power Terminal Assembly. Provides receptacles for power hookup of equipment. Permanently
mounted on front wall.
4 Switch Assembly SA-1650/GRC. Allows switching between local and remote tty modes of
operation and switching of TT-76A/GGC between owr and duplex circuits. When operating in
secure mode, a set low-level loop current is provided for tty equipment. Interconnects dummy
boxes through front panel tty jacks.
5
1-18
Shelf or mounting security equipment.
Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-12.
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS. (CONT)
REAR AND ROADSIDE WALL OF AN/GRC-122/142D AND E MODELS
EL6VR016
1 Shelter Fuel Heater. Used to heat shelter in dc mode of operation. Operates on gasoline,
kerosene, burner fuel, or jet fuel
2 Standing Wave Ratio Power Meter ME-165/G. Used for measuring transmitter output power and
standing wave ratio when doublet antenna is used. May be used for terminating amplifier power
output during radio silence operation. For detailed description, refer to TM 11-6625-333-15.
3 Low-Level Signaling Device TT-523/GRC. Used with TT-76A/GGC to make off-line tapes under
secure conditions. For a detailed description, refer to TM 11-5815-338-15.
4 Teletypewriter-Reperforator/Transmitter TT-76A/GGC. Slide mounted, allows transmission by
either manual keyboard operation or from punched tape. Messages are received in baudot code
by TT-76A/GGC and are printed on and punched through paper tape. Punched tape with message received can later be used for transmission. Message tape may be prepared Iocally without
disturbing connected signal circuits. Operating speeds are 60 to 100 words per minute. For a detailed
description, refer to TM 11-5815-238-10 or -20.
Change 2
1-19
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-12.
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS. (CONT)
EXTERIOR ROADSIDE AND REAR WALL OF AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, AND E MODELS
(S-250/G Shelter Shown)
EL6VR017
1 Ground Rods. Used for externally grounding shelter to earth.
2 Fuel Can. Used for storage of fuel supply for fuel heater.
3 Owr-Dx-Send Doublet Antenna Connector. Used for connection of doublet antenna to shelter
during fixed or mobile-at-halt operation. Owr lead-in cable connector is located on roadside and
dx receive on rear wall under antenna base.
4 Shade Tarpaulin Supports. Provides mounting facilities for shade tarpaulin to top of shelter.
1-20
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-12.
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS. (CONT)
EXTERIOR CURBSIDE AND FRONT WALL OF AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, AND E MODELS
EL6VR018
1 Antenna Assembly. Consists of Mast Sections MS-116-A, MS-117-A, MS-118-A, and Antenna
Base AB-652/GR. Used primarily for mobile operation. A second duplex antenna assembly,
used on AN/GRC-122(*) models only, is mounted on upper rear curbside wall.
2 Personnel Exhaust Blower. Draws in fresh air, through filtered inlet in door, to cool shelter.
3 Power Signal Entrance Box. Provides for connection to an external 28.5 vdc power source
through DC INPUT connector or 110 vac power source through AC INPUT connector. Contains
shelter ground stud for grounding and connector terminals for remote operation.
4 Air Conditioner Ports. Provides mounting facilities for external air conditioner when adapter
plates, which are stored in shelter, are installed in ports.
1-21
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-12.
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS. (CONT)
INTERIOR AN/GRC-122/142(*) MODELS
EL6VR019
1 Antenna Group AN/GRA-50. Doublet antenna assembly used for transmission and reception of
radio signals between 2.0 and 29.999 MHz. Provides greater range and reliability, and is stored
in canvas bag in storage compartment.
2 Personnel Chair. Provides seating with safety belt for operator and is fastened to floor for
mobile operation.
NOTE
Mast assemblies and cable reels may be stored on a roof rack if one is provided with
shelter.
3 Mast Assembly AB-155/U. Used to support doublet antenna for long range operations.
4 Cable Reel C-432. Contains power cable for connecting external power source to shelter power
entrance box.
1-22
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-13.
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS.
Radio tty sets differ in shelter models, internal components, and configuration. The following table
indicates differences between all 12 models. Items common to all models are not listed.
AN/GC-122
AN/GRC-142
EQUIPMENT
P*
Shelter Electrical/Equipment S-250/G
Shelter Electrical Equipment S-318/G
RT-662/GRC
Teletypewriter TT-98/FG
Teletypewriter TT-98/FG (duplex)
Communications Terminal AN/UGC-74A(V)3
Communications Terminal AN/UGC-74A(V)3
(duplex)
Motor-Generator PU-724/G
Motor-Generator PU-724/G (duplex)
Inverter PU-724A/G
Inverter PU-724A/G (duplex)
Air Conditioner (serial numbers 1 through 697
only)
Switch Assembly SA-1554/GRC-142
Switch Assembly SA-1650/GRC
Switch Box SA-1555/GRC-142
Power Terminal Assembly
Distribution Box J-2776/GRC-142
Power Distribution Box SB-3018/GRC
Power Distribution Box SB-3358/GRC
Power Distribution Box SC-F-960672
AC Entrance Box (front)
DC Entrance Box (rear)
AC Volt Meter
Power Signal Entrance Box
Headset H-227/U (duplex)
TT-98/FG Slide Mount
TT-76A/GGC Slide Mount
TT-98/FG (duplex) Slide Mount
Fluorescent Lighting
● P stands for plain models
NOTE
When modification for secure operation using MK-2488/G is authorized for any of the above shelter
configurations, Mounting Base MT-6442/G, DLED TSEC/KG-84(*)/G and Interconnecting Box J-4024/U
are the equipment used to provide the secure communication capability. The modification
instructions are contained in TM 11-5815-616-13, Appendix E.
Change 4
1-23
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-14.
EQUIPMENT DATA.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Input Voltage:
100 amp at 28.5 vdc
60 amp at 110 vac, 60 Hz, single-phase
Power Consumption Direct Current:
AN/GRC-122 Plain
AN/GRC-122 A and B
AN/GRC-122 C
AN/GRC-122 D and E
AN/GRC-142 Plain
AN/GRC-142 A and B
AN/GRC-142 C
AN/GRC-142 D and E
90 amp at 28.5 vdc
80 amp at 28.5 vdc
90 amp at 28.5 vdc
80 amp at 28.5 vdc
87 amp at 28.5 vdc
68 amp at 28.5 vdc
87 amp at 28.5 vdc
68 amp at 28.5 vdc
Maximum Alternating Current Power Consumption:
Air conditioner
Power Supply PP-4763(*)/GRC
20 amp at 110 vac, 60 Hz
25 amp at 110 vac, 60 Hz
Shelter, Electrical Equipment S-318(*)/G:
Lights
Exhaust blower
Air conditioner
Shelter heater (fuel)
Shelter heater (electric)
50 w, dc
165 w, dc
2,100 w, ac
315 w, dc
1500 w, ac
Shelter, Electrical Equipment S-250/G:
Lights
Exhaust blower
Shelter heater (fuel)
Shelter heater (electric)
50 w, dc
165 w, dc
315 w, dc
1500 w, ac
Major Components:
Teletypewriter TT-98/FG
(supplied by inverter)
Duplex TT-98/FG (AN/GRC-122 only)
(supplied by duplex inverter)
Teletypewriter-Reperforator
Transmitter TT-76A/GGC
(supplied by inverter)
Teletypewriter AN/UGC-74A(V)3
Radio Set AN/GRC-106
Duplex RT-662/GRC
(AN/GRC-122(*) only)
Radio Teletypewriter Modem
MD-522(*)/GRC
Interconnecting Box J-4024/U
(all models with MK-2488/G)
DLED, TSEC/KG-84(*)
(all models with MK-2488/G)
1-24
Change 2
150 w, ac
150 w, ac
150 w, ac
100 w, ac
1045 w, dc
45 w, dc
40 w, dc
70 w, ac or dc
30 w, ac or dc
1-14 EQUIPMENT DATA. (CONT)
Motor-Generator PU-724/U (60 Hz),
Wincharger Model SS-688 and
Duplex Motor-Generator (60 Hz),
Wincharger Model SS-668
(AN/GRC-122(*) only)
Local Area Communication Facilities
Telephone Set TA-312 P/T
8 amp at 28.5 vdc unloaded
12.5 amp at 28.5 vdc with 1 tty
16.5 amp at 28.5 vdc with 2 tty
Internal battery
COMPLETE SHELTER WEIGHTS
Shelter Electrical Equipment
S-318(*)/G (AN/GRC-122 Plain)
Shelter Electrical Equipment
S-318(*)/G (AN/GRC-122A)
Shelter Electrical Equipment
S-250/G (AN/GRC-122B)
Shelter Electrical Equipment
S-318(*)/G (AN/GRC-122C)
Shelter Electrical Equipment
S318(*)/G (AN/GRC-122D)
Shelter Electrical Equipment
S-250/G (AN/GRC-122E)
Shelter Electrical Equipment
S-318(*)G (AN/GRC-142 Plain)
Shelter Electrical Equipment
S-318(*)/G (AN/GRC-142A)
Shelter Electrical Equipment
S-250/G (AN/GRC-142B)
Shelter Electrical Equipment
S-318(*)/G (AN/GRC-142C)
Shelter Electrical Equipment
S-318(*)/G (AN/GRC-142D)
Shelter Electrical Equipment
S-250/G (AN/GRC-142E)
1,832 lb (831.72 kg)
1,700 lb (771.8 kg)
2,048 lb (928.96 kg)
1,962 lb (889.95 kg)
2,100 LB (952.54 kg)
2,448 lb (1,110.39 kg)
1,694 lb (769.07 kg)
1,552 lb (704.6 kg)
1,900 lb (862.6 kg)
1,774 lb (804.67 kg)
1,952 LB (885.41 kg)
2,300 LB (1 ,043.26 kg)
SHELTER EXTERIOR Dimensions
S-250/G
Length
Height
85 in. (215.8 cm)
70 in. (177.8 cm)
79 in. (200.66 cm)
S-318(*)/G
75.38 in. (191 .46 cm)
70.38 in. (178.76 cm)
72.0 in. (162.88 cm)
Change 4
1-25
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-14. EQUIPMENT DATA. (CONT)
Types of Signals Transmitted/Received:
85 Hz narrow nsk or 850 Hz fsk compatibility am, ssb voice and cw
Voice and teletypewriter simultaneously
(voice plus risk)
Nsk diversity
Transmitted Power Output (Maximum):
400 w, peak envelope power
Transmit Range:
20 mi (32.18 km) planning range
Nominal (groundwave); 100 mi (160.9 km) to
1,500 mi (2413.5 km) (skywave), depending on terrain, frequency antenna,
time, and atmospheric conditions
Frequency Range:
2.0 to 29.999 MHz
Antenna Systems for Transmission and/or
Reception:
Whip or doublet
M880 or equivalent
1 1/4-ton truck M-715 or 1 1/4-ton truck,
6 x 6, M-561 all with 100 amp electrical
system
Mobile Carrier:
TERMINAL, COMMUNICATIONS AN/UGC-74A(V)3
Application:
Used to compose, edit, transmit, receive,
print, and store messages
Operational States:
Operates as an intelligent communications
terminal, a keyboard send/receive terminal,
or a receive only terminal
Types of installation:
Tactical, fixed or mobile, table, or replay
rack mounted
Models Installed:
AN/GRC-122C
AN/GRC-122D
AN/GRC-122E
AN/GRC-142C
AN/GRC-142D
AN/GRC-142E
OR
All of the above with MK-2488/G
1-26
Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-14.
EQUIPMENT DATA. (CONT)
Operating Speeds:
Baud Rate
1200
600
300
150
75
50
45.5
Code
ASCII 10 unit (1 stop bit)
ASCII 11 unit (2 stop bits)
ASCII 10 unit (1 stop bit)
ASCII 11 unit (2 stop bits)
ASCII 10 unit (1 stop bit)
ASCII 11 unit (2 stop bits)
ASCII 10 unit (1 stop bit)
ASCII 11 unit (2 stop bits)
ASCII 10 unit (1 stop bit)
ASCII 11 unit (2 stop bits)
Baudot 7 unit (1 stop bit)
Baudot 8 unit (2 stop bits)
Baudot 7 unit (1 stop bit)
Baudot 8 unit (2 stop bits)
Baudot 7 unit (1 stop bit)
Baudot 8 unit (2 stop bits)
System Interface (models without MK-2488/G)
Operates with MIL-STD-188-114 equipment
(KW-7, TH-22/TG, and MD-522) TT-76(*)/
GGC, and TT-98/FG and the following
comsec equipment; Vinson (TSEC/KY-57),
KG-30 (TSEC/KY-30), DLED (TSEC-FGG-84)
System interface (models with MK-2488)
Operate with MIL-STD-188-114 equipment
(eg KG-84 and KG-84A)
Keyboard:
MIL-STD-1280 TYPE 1
Class 1 plus 4 special keys
Printer:
Type
Print rate
Printed characters
Printed character per line
Paper Type and Capacity:
Drum
60 characters per second, minimum
Gothic 63 character of ASCII subset and a
diamond
Operator selectable from 40 to 80 characters
Single or multi-ply (3 ply maximum) roll
paper, 5 in. diameter, 8 1/2 in. wide.
Single or multi-ply (3 ply maximum) fanfold
Change 2 1-27
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-14.
EQUIPMENT DATA. (CONT)
TERMINAL, COMMUNICATIONS AN/UGC-74A(V)3 (CONT)
Other Printer Features:
Power Requirement:
Single or double line feed
Paper low lamp (for roll paper only)
Automatic shutdown of printing on physical
paper outage (for roll paper only)
Automatic shutdown of print drum motor if
there is no printing for between 2 and 4
min.
100 w, maximum
Operating Voltages:
20 ± 4 vdc 115 vac ± 15 percent, 50,
60, or 400 Hz ± 5 percent. 230 vac
± 15 percent, 50, 60, or 400 Hz ± 5 percent
Voltage and Transient Voltage Protection:
Overvoltage 36 vdc input for 1 hr maximum.
Over voltage transients: 100 vdc input. Under voltage transients: 15 vdc input
Environmental Conditions:
Operating temperature
Nonoperating temperature
Case closed
Case cover removed
Physical Characteristics:
Total weight
Dimensions
1-28
-25°F to + 125°F (-32°C to + 52°C) plus solar
radiation
-65°F to + 155°F (-54°C to + 68°C)
Water and dust proof
Spray proof
100 lb (45.5 kg) with case, cover, and
paper
21.75 in. (64 cm) long, 17.5 in. (55 cm)
wide and 9.5 in. (24 cm) high
TM 11-5815-334-10
Section III TECHNICAL PRINCIPALS OF OPERATION
Subject
Para
Page
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Local OWR Radio Teletypewriter Operation AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and
C Models
1-16
Local OWR Radio Teletypewriter Operation AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D,
and E Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Local OWR Voice Operation AN/GRC-122/142(*) Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Local OWR CW Operation AN/GRC-122/142(*) Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Local OWR Voice Plus Teletypewriter (NSK) Operation AN/GRC-122/142
Plain and C Model s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Local OWR Voice Plus Teletypewriter (NSK) Operation AN/GRC-122/142A,
B, D, and E Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Duplex Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1-23
Duplex Operation AN/GRC-122 Plain and C Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-24
Duplex Operation AN/GRC-122A, B, D, and E Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Field Telephone Operation AN/GRC-122/142(*) Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Remote OWR Voice Operation AN/GRC-122/142(*) Models .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Remote OWR Teletypewriter Operation AN/G RC-122/142(*) Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Remote Cooperation AN/G RC-122/142 Plain and C Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Remote Cooperation AN/G RC-122/142A, B, D, and E Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Teletypewriter Order Wire (Pony Circuit) AN/G RC-122 Plain and
C Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Teletypewriter Order Wire (Pony Circuit ) AN/GRC-122A, B, D,
and E Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
1-15.
1-29
1-30
1-31
1-32
1-33
1-34
1-35
1-36
1-36
1-38
1-39
1-40
1-41
1-42
1-43
1-44
1-45
GENERAL.
This section explains the operation of Radio Teletypewriter Sets AN/GRC-122/142(*). AN/GRC-142(*)
models provide owr communication. This means an operator con transmit and receiver a message, but
not at the same time. AN/GRC-122(*) models provide duplex operation which means on operator can
transmit and receive a message at the same time. AN/GRC-122(*) models also provide a pony circuit
which allows simultaneous tty order-wire transmission and reception over field wires when not operating
in a duplex mode.
AN/GRC-122/142(*) models are capable of transmitting and receiving ssb, compatible am, and cw
signals. Fsk nsk and nsk plus voice operation are possible using the tty equipment.
Systems block diagram of AN/GRC-122/142 models without MK-2488/G are given in FO-5 and FO-6
Models with MK-2488/G are given in FO-5.1 and FO-5.2.
Separate signal block diagrams, accompanied by text showing all modes of operation, are given in
paragraphs 1-16 through 1-31.
All signal block diagrams illustrate nonsecure modes of operation. In order to operate in a secure
mode, the appropriate dummy box must be replaced with security equipment. Any reference to a
dummy box refers to the applicable security equipment. With the exception of this change, block
diagrams are applicable to both secure and nonsecure modes of operation,
Change 2 1-29
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-16.
LOCAL OWR RADIO TELETYPEWRITER OPERATION AN/GRC.-122/142 PLAIN AND C MODELS.
TRANSMIT
Operator originates a signal by operating keyboard on TT-76(*)/GGC, TT-98/FG, or AN/UGC74A(V)3. When a key on the keyboard is pressed, a signal which consists of mark and space pulses
travels from tty through switch box to owr-dx-send dummy box. From owr-dx-send dummy box, the
signal is routed through control panel to modem. Modem converts mark and space pulse signals to
audio tones. Audio tones are now routed to radio set which converts audio tones to radio frequency
signals. Radio frequency signals are then routed to antenna for transmission to a distant radio set.
RECEIVE
Radio frequency signals transmitted from a distant radio set are received by antenna. Radio frequency
signals are then routed to radio set which converts the signals to audio tones. Audio tones are then
routed to modem which converts audio tones to mark and space pulse signals. From modem the
signals are routed through control panel to owr-dx-send dummy box. The signals then travel from
owr-dx-send dummy box, through switch box, to associated tty. TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3
prints a page copy of the received message. TT-76(*)/GGC makes a punched tape copy.
EL6VR022
1-30
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-17.
LOCAL OWR RADIO TELETYPEWRITER OPERATION AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, AND E
MODELS.
TRANSMIT
Operator originates a signal by operating keyboard on TT-76(*)/GGC, TT-98/FG, or AN/UGC74A(V)3. When a key on the keyboard is pressed, a signal which consists of mark and space pulses
travels from tty through switch assembly to owr-dx-send dummy box, then back through switch
assembly to modem. Modem converts mark and space pulses to audio tones. Audio tones are now
routed to radio set which converts audio tones to radio frequency signals, Radio frequency signals are
then routed to antenna for transmission to a distant radio set.
RECEIVE
Radio frequency signals transmitted from a distant radio set are received by antenna. These signals
are routed to radio set which converts radio frequency signals to audio tones. Audio tones are then
routed to modem, which converts audio tones to mark and space pulse signals. From modem the
signals are routed through switch assembly to owr-dx-send dummy box. The signals then travel from
owr-dx-send dummy box, back through switch assembly, to associated tty. TT-98/FG or AN/UGC74A(V)3 prints a page copy of the received message. TT-76(*)/GGC makes a punched tape copy.
EL6VR023
1-31
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-18.
LOCAL OWR VOICE OPERATION AN/GRC-122/142(*) MODELS.
TRANSMIT
Voice frequency signals are generated by operator speaking into handset or headset. These signals
are routed through control panel (AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models) or switch assembly (AN/
GRC-122/142A, B, D, and E models), and then through modem to radio set. Radio set converts
voice frequency signals to radio frequency signals. Radio frequency signals are then routed to
antenna for transmission to a distant radio set.
RECEIVE
Radio frequency signals transmitted from a distant radio set are received by antenna. These signals
are routed to radio set which converts radio frequency signals to voice frequency signals. Voice
frequency signals are then routed through modem to loudspeaker, and through control panel
(AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models) or switch assembly (AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, and E
models) to handset or headset.
EL6VR024
1-32
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-19.
LOCAL OWR CW OPERATION AN/GRC-122/142(*) MODELS.
TRANSMIT
Cw signals produced by key telegraph are routed through control panel (AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and
C models) or switch assembly (AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, and E models) and through modem. As
the signals pass through modem, audio tones (side tones) generated during cw transmission can be
heard on loudspeaker connected to modem. From modem the signals are routed to radio set which
converts audio tones to radio frequency signals. Radio frequency signals are routed to antenna for
transmission to a distant radio set.
RECEIVE
Radio frequency signals transmitted from a distant radio set are received by antenna. Radio frequency
signals are then routed to radio set which converts radio frequency signals to audio tones. Audio tones
are routed to modem where cw signals can be heard on loudspeaker. From modem cw signals are
routed to control panel (AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models) or switch assembly (AN/GRC122/142A, B, D, and E models) to handset or headset.
EL6VR025
1-33
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-20.
LOCAL OWR VOICE PLUS TELETYPEWRITER (NSK) OPERATION AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND
C MODELS.
TRANSMIT
Voice frequency signals generated by speaking into handset are applied to control panel. Simultaneously, tty mark and space pulses (nsk) are generated at TT-76(*)/GGC, TT-98/FG, or AN/UGC74A(V)3 and are routed through switch box and owr-dx-send dummy box, Both tty mark and space
pulses and voice frequency signals are then routed through control panel and applied to modem.
Modem combines mark and space pulses and voice frequency signals and converts them to audio
tones. Audio tones are then routed to radio set. Radio set converts audio tones to radio frequency
signals. Radio frequency signals are then routed to antenna for transmission to a distant radio set.
RECEIVE
Radio frequency signals transmitted from a distant radio set are received by antenna. Radio frequency
signals are then routed to radio set which converts signals to audio tones. Audio tones are then routed
to modem which converts and separates audio tones to tty mark and space pulses and voice frequency
signals. Voice frequency signals can be heard on loudspeaker connected to modem, Both signals are
also routed to control panel where voice frequency signals can be heard on handset or headset. Tty
mark and space pulses continue through control panel, owr-dx-send dummy box, and switch box to
associated tty equipment. TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74(V)3 prints a page copy of the received message.
TT-76(*)/GGC makes a punched tape copy.
EL6VR026
1-34
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-21.
LOCAL OWR VOICE PLUS TELETYPEWRITER (NSK) OPERATION AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D,
AND E MODELS.
TRANSMIT
Voice frequency signals generated by speaking into handset are applied to switch assembly. Simultaneously, tty mark and space pulses (risk) are generated at TT-76(*)/GGC, TT-98/FG, or AN/
UGC-74A(V)3 and are routed through switch assembly and owr-dx-send dummy box. Tty mark and
space pulses are routed back through switch assembly along with voice frequency signals and are
applied to modem. Modem combines tty mark and space pulses and voice frequency signals and converts them to audio tones. Audio tones are then routed to radio set. Radio set converts audio tones to
radio frequency signals. Radio frequency signals are then routed to antenna for transmission to a
distant radio set.
RECEIVE
Radio frequency signals transmitted from a distant radio set are received by antenna. Radio frequency
signals are then routed to radio set which converts signals to audio tones. Audio tones are then routed
to modem which converts and separates audio tones to tty mark and space pulses and voice frequency
signals. Voice frequency signals can be heard on loudspeaker connected to modem. Both signals are
also routed to switch assembly where voice frequency signals can be heard on headset or handset. Tty
mark and space pulses continue through switch assembly to owr-dx-send dummy box, and are then
routed back through switch assembly to associated tty equipment. TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3
prints a page copy of the received message. TT-76(*)/GGC makes a punched tape copy.
1-35
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-22.
DUPLEX OPERATION.
Duplex operation involves simultaneous transmission and reception of information on two different
frequencies. This can be accomplished by two tty’s, one tty and a key telegraph, one tty and a handset
(voice operation) or any combination of these components. Duplex operation is performed in
AN/GRG122(*) models with the addition of RT-662/GRC, associated antenna, duplex TT-98/FG, or
AN/UGC-74A(V)3 loudspeaker. Duplex operation divides shelter into two radio tty systems. Each
system can send or receive independent of the other. Remote duplex operation is also possible with
additional authorized equipment.
1-23.
DUPLEX OPERATION AN/GRC-122 PLAIN AND C MODELS.
TRANSMIT
Tty mark and space pulses generated by TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3 are routed through switch
box, owr-dx-send dummy box, and control panel. Tty mark and space pulses are then routed through
DC LOOP NO. 1 of modem. Voice frequency signals generated by handset are routed through switch
box voice key connector to modem. Modem combines tty mark and space pulses and voice frequency
signals and converts them to audio tones. Audio tones are routed to radio set which changes them to
radio frequency signals and routes signals to antenna for transmission.
RECEIVE
Radio frequency signals transmitted from a distant radio set are received by antenna. Radio frequency
signals are then routed to duplex RT-662/GRC. From duplex RT-662/GRC, signals are routed to
modem and then through DC LOOP NO. 2 where voice signals can be heard on loudspeaker. Signals
are then routed through control panel, dx-rcv-pony dummy box, switch box, and duplex TT-98/FG or
AN/UGC-74A(V)3 where a page copy of the message will be printed.
1-36
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-23.
DUPLEX OPERATION AN/GRC-122 PLAIN AND C MODELS.
EL6VR028
1-37
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-24.
DUPLEX OPERATION AN/GRC-122A, B, D, AND E MODELS.
TRANSMIT
Tty mark and space pulses generated by TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3 are routed through switch
assembly, owr-dx-send dummy box, back through switch assembly into DC LOOP NO. 1 of modem.
Voice frequency signals generated by handset are routed through switch box voice key connector to
modem. Modem combines tty mark and space pulses and voice frequency signals and converts them
to audio tones. Audio tones are then routed to radio set which changes them to radio frequency signals
and routes signals to antenna for transmission.
RECEIVE
Radio frequency signals transmitted from a distant radio set are received by antenna. Radio frequency
signals are then routed to duplex RT-662/GRC. From duplex RT-662/GRC, signals are routed to
modem and then through DC LOOP NO. 2 where voice signals can be heard on loudspeaker. Signals
are then routed through switch assembly, dx-rcv-pony dummy box, and back through switch assembly
to duplex TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3.
EL6VR029
1-38
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-25.
REMOTE FIELD TELEPHONE OPERATION AN/GRC-122/142(*) MODELS.
TRANSMIT
Voice frequency signals generated at remote TA-312/PT are routed through field wires to dc entrance
box (AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models) or power/signal entrance box (AN/GRC-122/142A, B,
D, and E models). Signals are then routed through control panel (AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C
models) or switch assembly (AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, and E models) to local TA-312/PT.
RECEIVE
Voice frequency signals generated at local TA-312/PT are routed through control panel (AN/GRC122/142 Plain and C models) or switch assembly (AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, and E models). Signals
are then routed through dc entrance box (AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models) or power/signal
entrance box (AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, and E models) through field wires to remote TA-312/PT.
EL6VR030
1-39
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-26.
REMOTE OWR VOICE OPERATION AN/GRC-122/142(*) MODELS.
TRANSMIT
Voice frequency signals are generated by speaking into handset. Signals are routed through remote
box, remote control, and field wires to dc entrance box or power/signal entrance box. Signals are
then routed through local control, control panel or switch assembly, and modem to radio set which
converts voice frequency signals to radio frequency signals. Radio frequency signals are then routed
to antenna for transmission to a distant radio set.
RECEIVE
Radio frequency signals transmitted from a distant radio set are received by antenna. Radio frequency
signals are then routed to radio set which converts radio frequency signals to voice frequency signals.
Signals are then routed through modem where distant operator’s voice can be heard on loudspeaker.
Voice frequency signals are then routed through control panel or switch assembly, local control, dc
entrance box or power/signal entrance box, and through field wires to remote control. From remote
control, voice frequency signals pass through remote box where operator can hear distant operator’s
voice on handset or headset.
EL6VR031
1-40
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-27.
REMOTE OWR TELETYPEWRITER OPERATION AN/GRC-122/142(*) MODELS.
TRANSMIT
Operator originates a signal by operating keyboard on TT-76(*)/GGC, TT-98/FG, or AN/UGC74A/(V)3. Tty mark and space pulses are routed through remote box and field wires to dc entrance
box or power signal entrance box. Tty mark and space pulses are then routed through control panel or
switch assembly to modem which converts tty mark and space pulses to fsk or nsk audio tones. Audio
tones are then routed to radio set which converts audio tones to radio frequency signals. Radio
frequency signals are then routed to antenna for transmission to a distant radio set.
RECEIVE
Radio frequency signals transmitted from a distant radio set are received by antenna, Radio frequency signals are routed to radio set which converts radio frequency signals to nsk or fsk audio
tones. Audio tones are routed to modem which converts audio tones to tty mark and space pulses. Tty
mark and space pulses are then routed through control panel or switch assembly, dc entrance box or
power/signal entrance box through field wires to remote box. From remote box, tty mark and space
pulses are routed to tty being used. TT-76(*)/GGC makes a punched tape copy of the received
message. TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3 prints a page copy. Copy of the message will be printed on
the TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3.
* THE REMOTE BOX CAN BE REPLACED BY SECURE EQUIPMENT
EL6VR032
1-41
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-28.
REMOTE CW OPERATION AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND C MODELS.
For cw operation, control panel TEL/REMOTE CW switch must be set to REMOTE CW. This causes
radio set to be keyed when key telegraph is being operated. Remote key telegraph uses the same field
wires as remote TA-312/PT.
TRANSMIT
Cw signals generated at remote key telegraph are routed through field wires to dc entrance box. From
dc entrance box, cw signals are routed through control panel and modem to radio set. Radio set
converts cw signals to radio frequency signals. Radio frequency signals are then routed to antenna for
transmission to a distant radio set.
RECEIVE
Radio frequency signals transmitted from a distant radio set are received by antenna. Radio frequency
signals are then routed to radio set which converts radio frequency signals to cw signals. From radio
set, cw signals are routed through modem where cw signals can be heard on loudspeaker. Cw signals
are then routed through control panel, local control, dc entrance box, and through field wires to
remote control. From remote control, cw signals pass through remote box where operator can hear
cw signals on handset or headset being used.
EL6VR101
1-42
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-29.
REMOTE CW OPERATION AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, AND E MODELS.
For cw operation, cable SM-C-613236 must be plugged into switch assembly. This causes radio set to
be keyed when key telegraph is being operated.
TRANSMIT
Cw signals generated at remote key telegraph are routed through field wires to power/signal entrance
box. From power/signal entrance box, cw signals are routed through switch assembly and modem to
radio set. Radio set converts cw signals to radio frequency signals. Radio frequency signals are then
routed to antenna for transmission to a distant radio set.
RECEIVE
Radio frequency signals transmitted from a distant radio set are received by antenna. Radio frequency
signals are then routed to radio set which converts radio frequency signals to cw signals. From radio
set, cw signals are routed through modem, where cw signals can be heard on loudspeaker. Cw
signals are now routed through switch assembly, local control, power/signal entrance box, and
through field wires to remote control. From remote control, cw signals pass through remote box where
operator can hear cw signals on handset or headset being used.
EL6VR192
1-43
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-30.
TELETYPEWRITER ORDER WIRE (PONY CIRCUIT) AN/GRC-122 PLAIN AND C MODELS.
Tty order wire capability is present only in AN/GRC-122(*) models. This loop allows tty operations
between local and remote operators. It uses duplex TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3 and a remote
additional authorized TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3.
TRANSMIT
Tty signals generated at remote TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3 are routed to remote box. Signals are
then routed through field wires to dc entrance box. From dc entrance box, tty signals are routed
through control panel, dx-rcv-pony dummy box, switch box, and into duplex TT-98/FG or AN/UGC74 which will print a page copy of message.
RECEIVE
Tty signals generated at local TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3 are routed to switch box. Tty signals are
then routed through dx-rcv-pony dummy box, control panel, and into dc entrance box. From dc
entrance box, tty signals are routed through field wires, remote box, and into remote TT-98/FG or
AN/UGC-74A(V)3 which will print a page copy of message.
EL6VR193
1-44
TM 11-5815-334-10
1-31.
TELETYPEWRITER ORDER WIRE (PONY CIRCUIT) AN/GRC-122A, B, D, AND E MODELS.
Tty order wire capability is present only in AN/GRC-122(*) models. This loop allows tty operations
between local and remote operators. It uses duplex TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3 and a remote
additional authorized TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3.
TRANSMIT
Tty signals generated at remote TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3 are routed to remote box. Signals are
then routed through field wires to power/signal entrance box. From power/signal entrance box, tty
signals are routed through switch assembly, dx-rcv-pony dummy box, back through switch assembly
and into duplex TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3 which will print a page copy of the message.
RECEIVE
Tty signals generated at local TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3 are routed to switch assembly. Tty
signals are then routed through dx-rcv-pony dummy box, back through switch assembly into power/
signal entrance box. From power/signal entrance box, tty signals are routed through field wires,
remote box, and into remote TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3 which will print a page copy of the
message.
EL6VR194
1-45/(1-46 blank)
TM 11-5815-334-10
CHAPTER 2
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Subject
Section
Page
Description and Use of Operator’s Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I
Operator Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II
Operation Under Usual Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III
Operation Under Unusual Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IV
2-1
2-26
2-29
2-147
Section I DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR’S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
Para
Subject
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Description of Controls and Indicators for AN/GRC-122/142 Plain
and C Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Description of Controls and Indicators for AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D,
and E Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-1.
Page
2-1
2-2
2-12
GENERAL.
Description of controls and indicators for radio tty sets AN/GRC-122/142(*) is presented in two
paragraphs related to equipment models. These paragraphs cover data that is not covered in other
technical manuals. For description of controls and indicators of equipment not in this manual, see
applicable technical manual listed below.
ITEM
Radio Set AN/GNC-106
Modem MD-522/GRC
Modem MD-522A/GRC
Teletypewriter TT-98/FG
Teletypewriter TT-76A/GGC
Communications Terminal AN/UGC-74A(V)3
Telephone Set TA-312/PT
Control Group AN/GRA-6
Space Heater
Air Conditioner Model CE 6A-60
Power Supply PP-4763(*)/GRC
Teletypewriter TT-722(*)/TG (LEK 122B)
I
TECHNICAL MANUAL
TM 11-5820-520-12
TM 11-5805-387-15-1
TM 11-5805-387-15-2
TM 11-5815-200-12
TM 11-5815-238-10 or 20
TM 11-5815-602-12
TM 11-5805-201-12
TM 11-5038
TM 5-4520-211-14
TM 5-4120-289-15
TM 11-5820-765-12
TM 11-5815-206-12
2-1
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-2.
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS FOR AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND C MODELS.
POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL SB-3018/GRC-142
EL6VR033
1 MAIN PUSH ON-PULL OFF Circuit Breaker. In PUSH ON position, dc voltage is available to all
dc powered equipment. When operating in ac only mode, operate circuit breaker to PULL OFF
position to disconnect vehicle battery or external dc power source from shelter.
2 VDC Meter. Monitors dc input voltage to shelter.
3 5 AMP Fuse (LIGHTS). Provides protection for lighting circuit.
4 10 AMP Fuse (BLOWER). Provides protection for blower unit.
5 1/2 AMP Fuse (LOCK-OUT). Provides protection for lockout circuit.
6 5 AMP Fuse (28V RECP). Provides protection for 28 vdc receptacle circuit.
7 INVERTERS OWR ON-OFF Switch. Energizes the inverter for owr circuit when set to ON.
8 30 AMP Fuse (INSERTERS). Provides protection for owr inverter circuit.
9 INVERTERS DX ON-OFF Switch (used on AN/GRC-122 models only). Energizes duplex inverter
when set to ON.
10 30 AMP Fuse (INVERTERS) (used for AN/GRC-122 models only). Provides protection for
duplex inverter circuit.
11 28V RECP Switch. When set to ON, 28 vdc is available on curbside wall dc receptacle.
12 LOCK-OUT Switch. Used to disable lockout circuit when shelter is set up to handle classified
messages. Set switch to ON along with control panel LOCK-OUT-OVERRIDE switch.
13 BLOWER Switch. Energizes shelter blower when set to ON.
14 LIGHTS Switch. When set to ON, two shelter lamps will light unless blackout switch is open.
15 POWER Lamp. Lights to indicate presence of dc power when MAIN circuit breaker is pushed in.
2-2
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-2.
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS FOR AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND
C MODELS. (CONT)
CONTROL PANEL SA-1554/GRC-142
EL6VR034
1 LOOP ADJ OWR-DX-SEND Control. Used to adjust OWR-DX-SEND TTY loop current to desired
level indicated on modem test meter. (lest METER FUNCTION switch set to DC LOOP NO. 1.)
Clockwise rotation increases loop current.
2 LOOP ADJ DX-RCV-PONY Control (used on AN/GRC-122 models only). Used to adjust DXRECEIVE pony loop current to desired level indicated on modem test meter. (Test METER
FUNCTION switch set to DC LOOP NO. 2.) Clockwise rotation increases loop current.
3 LOCAL-REMOTE Switch. When set to LOCAL, remote tty operation is disabled. When set to
REMOTE, allows operation of remote tty.
4 LOCK-OUT-OVERRIDE Switch. Used with power distribution panel LOCK-OUT switch to disable
lockout circuit when shelter is set up to handle classified messages. Disabling lockout circuit
restores TA-312/PT circuit to normal operation and allows nonsecure voice over secure tty system and allows remote to local voice communications. (Spring loaded to return to LOCK-OUT
position when released.)
SWITCH POSITION
EFFECT
LOCK-OUT
Lockout circuit is enabled.
OVERRIDE
Lockout circuit is disabled. (Power distribution panel
LOCK-OUT switch must be set to ON.)
2-3
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-2.
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS FOR AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND
C MODELS. (CONT)
CONTROL PANEL SA-1554/GRC-142 (CONT)
EL6VR035
1 AUDIO TEL CALL Lamp. In secure mode, lamp will flicker to indicate remote operator is ringing
local operator and desires TA-312/PT circuit be returned to normal operation.
2 AUDIO TEL REMOTE-CW Switch. Enables TA-312/PT lines to be used for telephone or remote
cw operation.
SWITCH POSITION
I
EFFECT
TEL
Establishes connection for telephone operation between
shelter and remote site.
REMOTE CW
Allows remote TA-312/PT operator to transmit CW.
(Remote TA-312/PT is disconnected and KY-116/U is
connected to field wires.)
3 AUDIO VOICE-KEY Connector. Provides connection of handset, headset, or key telegraph to
allow local voice, cw, or nsk plus voice operation.
4 TTY LOOPS OWR-DX-SEND Jack. Dummy box or security equipment is connected into OWR-DXSEND TTY loop at this jack.
5 TTY LOOPS DX-RCV-PONY Jack (used on AN/GRC-122 models only). Dummy box or security
equipment is connected into DX-RECEIVE pony loop at this jack.
6 GRA-6 Connector. Provides termination for local control.
2-4
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-2. DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS FOR AN/G RC-122/142 PLAIN AND
C MODELS. (CONT)
SWITCH BOX SA-1555/GRC-142
EL6VR036
1 TT-98 DX-RECEIVE-PONY BLACK-RED Switch (used on AN/GRC-122 models only). Enables
operator to reduce DX-RECEIVE pony loop current through duplex TT-98/FG for use with
security equipment.
SWITCH POSITION
EFFECT
BLACK
This is normal position and results in normal loop
current (20 or 60 ma).
RED
Reduces DX-RECEIVE pony loop current for use with
security equipment.
2 TT-98 OWR-DX-SEND BLACK-RED Switch. Enables operator to reduce OWR-DX-SEND TTY loop
current through TT-98/FG for use with security equipment.
EFFECT
SWITCH POSITION
BLACK
This is normal position and results in normal loop
current (20 or 60 ma).
RED
Reduces OWR-DX-SEND TTY loop current for use with
security equipment.
3 TT-76 TAPE PUNCH OWR-DX-SEND-DX-RECEIVE Switch. Allows operator to switch
TT-76(*)/GGC tape punch function between OWR-DX-SEND and DX-RECEIVE pony loops.
(Switch must be in OWR-DX-SEND position for AN/GRC-142(*) models.)
SWITCH POSITION
I
EFFECT
OWR-DX-SEND
Tape punch is connected into OWR-DX-SEND tty loop.
OWR-DX-RECEIVE (This switch
position for AN/GRC-122
models only.)
Tape Punch is connected into DX-RECEIVE pony loop.
2-5
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-2. Description OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS FOR AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND
C MODELS. (CONT)
REMOTE BOX C-7279/GRC-142
EL6VR037
1.
Teletypewriter Loop Binding Posts. Provide for termination of dc tty loop field wires originating at
shelter dc entrance box binding posts. One pair is for OWR-DX-SEND TTY loop, the other pair is for
DX-RECEIVE tty loop (used in AN/GRC-122 models only).
2.
Teletypewriter Jacks. Provide connection of remote teletypewriters into dc tty loops. Six jacks are
for OWR-DX-SEND TTY loop, and six jacks are for DX-RECEIVE TTY loop (used in AN/GRC-122
models only).
3. SEND-RECEIVE Switch. Allows remote keying of shelter radio set.
SWITCH POSITION
EFFECT
SEND
Radio set is keyed for tty or 35 Hz + voice (nsk)
transmission.
RECEIVE
Radio set is not keyed and is in receive mode.
4. AUDIO Connector. Provides for connection of handset for remote voice or 85 Hz + voice (nsk)
operation.
5. Pendant Plug. Provides connection between remote box and remote control (P/O AN/GRA-6).
2-6
Change 4
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-2.
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS FOR AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND
C MODELS. (CONT)
LOW-LEVEL SIGNALING DEVICE TT-523/GGC
EL6VR038
TT-523/GGC Switch. Used with TT-76A/GGC SELECTOR switch to provide low- level current for
punching or repunching tapes. This is done to reduce TT-76A/GGC radiation and thereby provide
secure conditions for handling classified messages.
SWITCH POSITION
I
EFFECT
TD SEND TR SEND/RCV
Selected when TT-76(*)/GGC SELECTOR switch is set to
position 1. Operation of TT-76A/GGC is not altered.
TD SEND LOCAL REPUNCH
Selected when TT-76(*)/GGC SELECTOR switch is in
position 2 or 3. Operation of TT-76(*)/GGC circuit is
altered to operate at reduced current.
2-7
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-2.
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS FOR AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND
C MODELS. (CONT)
AC ENTRANCE BOX CIRCUIT BREAKERS
EL6VR039
1 Air Conditioner 30 Amp Circuit Breaker (used on AN/GRC-142, serial numbers 1 through
697 only). Provides protection for air conditioner and 110 vac, 15 amp convenience outlets
which are located on Distribution Box J-2776/GRC-142.
2 30 Amp Out On-Off Circuit Breaker. Provides protection for 110 vac, 25 amp outlet located on
Distribution Box J-2776/GRC-142.
DISTRIBUTION BOX J-2776/GRC-142
EL6VR040
Distribution Box AC POWER-DC POWER Switch. When switched to AC POWER shelter operates from
external ac power source. When switched to DC POWER, shelter operates from vehicle battery or
external dc power source.
2-8
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-2.
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS FOR AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND
C MODELS. (CONT)
STANDING WAVE RATIO METER ME-165/G
EL6VR041
1 Meter. Indicates AM-3349/GRC-106 average output in watts or vswr, depending on setting of
function switch.
2 ADJUST Control. Used with function switch (ADJUST position) to calibrate meter for vswr
measurement.
3 Function Switch. Selects mode of operation for ME-165/G.
4 OUTPUT Connector. Radio frequency output appearing at this connector is routed to doublet
antenna.
SWITCH POSITION
EFFECT
POWER
ME-165/G will measure power output of
AM-3349/GRC-106.
ADJUST
Used with ADJUST control to calibrate meter for vswr
measurement.
SWR
Meter indicates vswr of antenna.
OPERATE
Output of AM-3349/GRC-106 is routed directly to doublet
antenna (AN/GRA-50, if used).
5 INPUT Connector. Output of AM-3349/GRC-106 is applied to this connector.
Change 2
2-9
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-2.
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS FOR AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND
C MODELS. (CONT)
AC ENTRANCE BOX
EL6vR042
AC INPUT J1 Connector. Provides connection to shelter ac circuits from external ac power source.
DC ENTRANCE BOX
EL6VR043
1 TA-312/PT Terminals. Provide connection from field TA-312/PT to shelter mounted TA-312/PT
or from remote key telegraph to radio set.
2 SPARE Terminals (REM CW Terminals). Spare terminals are disconnected in early models and
in later models are labled REM CW terminals, which are used to connect remote key telegraph to
shelter.
3 C-443/GRC Remote Control Terminals. Provide connection from remote site to shelter-mounted
local control for remote keying and remote voice operation.
2-10
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-2.
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS FOR AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND
C MODELS. (CONT)
DC ENTRANCE BOX (CONT)
4 DX-REC/PONY Loop Terminals (used on the AN/GRC-122 models only). Provide connection
from remote site to shelter duplex tty receive or pony (tty order wire) circuits.
5 DC INPUT J1 Connector. Provides connection for dc input power to shelter from vehicle or
external dc power source.
6 GROUND Terminal. Provides connection for grounding shelter to earth.
7 OWR-SEND Loop Terminals. Provide connection from remote site to shelter owr and duplex send
tty circuits.
2-11
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-2. DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS FOR AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND
C MODELS. (CONT)
AC VOLTMETER
EL6VR045
VOLTS AC METER BOX. Provides an ac voltage monitor only during ac/dc modes of operation.
2-3. DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS FOR AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, AND E
MODELS.
POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL SB-3358/GRC-142 (AN/GRC-122/142A AND B MODELS ONLY)
EL6VR046
1.
DC MAIN Circuit Breaker. In PUSH ON position, provides dc circuit protection to all dc powered
shelter components.
2.
DC Indictor Lamp. Lights when DC MAIN circuit breaker is in PUSH ON position to indicate
presence of dc power.
2-12
Change 4
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-3. DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS FOR AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, AND E
MODELS. (CONT)
3.
POWER Selector Switch. In ac position, external ac(115 v, 60 Hz) is transferred through switching
circuits to supply dc power supply with operating voltage. Power supply then supplies shelter with
dc voltage for lights and exhaust blower. In dc position, external dc or 28 vdc from vehicle battery
are transferred through switches to inverters and to dc operated shelter components.
4.
AC Indicator Lamp. Lights when AC MAIN circuit breaker is set to ON position to indicate presence
of ac voltage.
5.
INVERTERS OWR Circuit Breaker (not used when operating in ac only mode). Energizes inverter for
OWR circuit when set to ON. Provides circuit protection for OWR circuit when load exceeds 30
amps.
6.
INVERTERS DX Circuit Breaker (not used when operating in ac only mode). Energizes duplex
inverter (AN/GRC-122 models only) when set to ON. Provides circuit protection for DX circuit when
iced exceeds 30 amps.
7.
AC MAIN Circuit Breaker. in ON position, ac voltage is available to ail ac powered shelter
components except power supply. Provides circuit protection for ac circuits when load exceeds 30
amps.
8.
VOLTS Meter. Monitors ac or dc input voltage to shelter.
9.
PWR SUP Circuit Breaker. Energizes dc power supply when sat to ON. Provides circuit protection
for power supply when load exceeds 25 amps, ac.
10. RECP & HTR Circuit Breaker. Energizes shelter 28-volt and heater receptacle when set to ON.
When operating from a dc power source, provides circuit protection when load exceeds 6 amps.
11. BLO & LIGHTS Circuit Breaker. Energizes blower and lights when set to ON. Provides circuit
protection for blower or light circuits when load exceeds 6 amps.
12. BLO ON-OFF Switch. Energizes shelter exhaust fan when BLO & LIGHTS circuit breaker Is on.
Change 4
2-13
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-3. DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS FOR AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, AND E
MODELS. (CONT)
POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL SC-F-960672 (USED IN AN/GRC-122/142D AND E MODELS ONLY)
EL6VR047
1 AC-OFF-DC Power Selector Switch. In AC position externalac(115 v, 60 Hz) is transferred
through switching circuits to supply AC MAIN circuit breaker with operating voltage. In DC
position, external 28 vdc from vehicle battery is transferred through switching circuits to supply
DC MAIN circuit breaker with operating voltage.
2 AC MAIN Indicator Lamp. Lights when AC MAIN circuit breaker is set to ON indicating presence
of ac voltage.
3 PWR SPLY DC Indicator Lamp. Lights when PWR SPLY ac circuit breaker is set to ON.
4 ELECT HTR Indicator Lamp. Lights when ELECT HTR ac circuit breaker is set to ON.
5 TTY & AUX EQUIP BLWR Indicator Lamp. Lights when TTY & AUX EQUIP BLWR circuit breaker is
set to ON.
6 LTS & CONV SHLTR BLWR Indicator Lamp. Lights when LTS & CONV SHLTR BLWR circuit
breaker is set to ON.
7 AC VOLTS Meter. Monitors amount of ac voltage being used in ac operation.
8 AC VOLTS Indicator Lamp. Lights to indicate presence of ac voltage.
9 DC VOLTS Meter. Monitors amount of dc voltage being used in dc operation.
10 DC VOLTS Indicator Lamp. Lights to indicate presence of dc voltage.
11 DC MAIN Indicator Lamp. Lights when DC MAIN circuit breaker is set to ON indicating presence
of dc voltage.
12 RADIO TTY EQUIP BLWR Indicator Lamp. Lights when RADIO TTY EQUIP BLWR circuit breaker is
set to ON.
2-14
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-3.
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS FOR AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, AND E
MODELS. (CONT)
13 UGC-74 AUX Indicator Lamp. Lights when UGC-74 AUX circuit breaker is set to ON.
14 LTS SHLTR BLWR Indicator Lamp. Lights when LTS SHLTR BLWR circuit breaker is set to ON.
15 GAS HTR Indicator Lamp. Lights when GAS HTR circuit breaker is set to ON.
16 74 Fuseholder. Lights when fuse fails on AN/UGC-74(V)3.
17 DX 74 Fuseholder. Lights when fuse fails on duplex AN/UGC-74A(V)3.
18 GAS HTR Circuit Breaker. Provides circuit protection for gas heater when load exceeds
15 amps.
19 LTS SHLTR BLWR Circuit Breaker. Provides circuit protection for lights, duplex inverter,
and shelter blower when load exceeds 20 amps.
20 UGC-74 AUX Circuit Breaker. Provides circuit protection for AN/UGC-74A(V)3 when load
exceeds 15 amps.
21 RADIO TTY EQUIP BLWR Circuit Breaker. Provides circuit protection for radio set, owr inverter,
and equipment when load exceeds 50 amps.
22 DC MAIN Circuit Breaker. Provides circuit protection for dc circuits when load exceeds
100 amps.
23 DC AMPS Meter. Monitors amount of dc amperes being used during dc operation.
24 AC AMPS Meter. Monitors amount of ac amperes being used during ac operation.
25 LTS & CONV SHLTR BLWR Circuit Breaker. Provides circuit protection for lights and shelter
blower when voltage exceeds 20 amps.
26 TTY & CONV SHLTR BLWR Circuit Breaker. Provides circuit protection for tty, convenience
receptacles, and shelter blower when voltage exceeds 15 amps.
27 ELECT HTR Circuit Breaker. Provides circuit protection for electric heater when voltage
exceeds 20 amps.
28 PWR SPLY DC Circuit Breaker. Provides circuit protection for power supply when voltage
exceeds 30 amps.
29 AC MAIN Circuit Breaker. Provides circuit protection for ac circuits.
Change 1
2-15
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-3. DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS FOR AN/GRC-122/142A, B, C, AND E
MODELS. (CONT)
SWITCH ASSEMBLY SA-1650/GRC
EL6VR048
1 TT-98 DX-RECEIVE-PONY BLACK-RED Switch (used only in AN/GRC-122 models). Enables
operator to reduce DX-RECEIVE pony loop current through TT-98/FG for use with security
equipment.
SWITCH POSITION
EFFECT
BLACK
Normal position that results in normal loop current
(20 or 60 ma).
RED
Reduces DC-RECEIVE pony loop current for use with
security equipment.
2 TT-98 OWR-DX-SEND BLACK-RED Switch. Enables operator to reduce OWR-DX-SEND tty loop
current through TT-98/FG for use with security equipment.
2-16
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-3.
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS FOR AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, AND E
MODELS. (CONT)
EFFECT
SWITCH POSITION
BLACK
Normal position that results in normal loop
current (20 or 60 ma).
RED
Reduces OWR-DX-SEND tty loop current for
use with security equipment.
3 LOCAL-REMOTE Switch. Enables or disables remote tty operation.
EFFECT
SWITCH POSITION
Remote tty operation is disabled.
LOCAL
I
REMOTE
Permits remote tty operation.
4 CALL Lamp. Operational when secure condition exists and lockout circuit is enabled. Under
these conditions, lamp will flicker to indicate remote operator is ringing local operator and
desires TA-312/PT be restored to normal operation.
5 LOCKOUT-OVER RIDE Switch. Used to disable lockout circuit when tty is set up to handle classified messages. Disabling lockout circuit restores TA-312/PT to normal operation which allows
remote voice communication with local operator. (Spring loaded to return to LOCKOUT position
when released.)
EFFECT
SWITCH POSITION
LOCKOUT
OVER RIDE
I
Lockout circuit operates.
Lockout circuit is disabled.
6 GRA-6 Connector. Provides termination for local control.
7 OWR-DX-SEND Jack. Dummy box or security equipment is connected into OWR-DX-SEND tty
loop at this jack.
2-17
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-3.
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS FOR AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, AND E
MODELS. (CONT)
SWITCH ASSEMBLY SA-1650/GRC
EL6VR049
1 OWR-DX-SEND/TAPE PUNCH/TT-76/DX-RECElVE Switch. Allows operator to switch TT76(*)/GGC tape punch function between OWR-DX-SEND loop and DX-RECEIVE or pony (tty
order wire) loop.
SWITCH POSITION
EFFECT
OWR-DX-SEND
Tape punch is connected into OWR-DX-SEND
tty loop.
DX-RECEIVE (Used for AN/GRC-122 models
only. Switch must be in OWR-DX-SEND
position for AN/GRC-142 models only.)
Tape punch is connected into DX-RECEIVE pony
loop.
2 DX-REC-PONY Jack (used on the AN/GRC-122 models only). Dummy box or security equipment
is connected to DX-REC-PONY loop at this jack.
3 VOICE-KEY Connector. Provides connection for handset, headset, or key telegraph permitting
local voice, cw, or nsk plus voice operation.
2-18
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-3.
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS FOR AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, AND E
MODELS. (CONT)
POWER TERMINAL ASSEMBLY (USED ON AN/GRC-122/142A AND B MODELS ONLY)
EL6VR050
1 OWR Connector. Dc voltage (28 vdc) for owr inverter is available at OWR connector when
power distribution panel is energized and INVERTERS OWR circuit breaker is set to ON.
2 TTY 76 Receptacle. Ac voltage (115 v, 60 Hz) for TT-76(*)/GGC is available at this receptacle
when power distribution panel POWER selector switch is set to AC or DC position.
3 TTY 98 Receptacle. Ac voltage (115 v, 60 Hz) for TT-98/FG is available at this receptacle when
power distribution panel POWER selector switch is set to AC or DC position.
4 115 VAC 25A Receptacle. Ac voltage(115 v, 60 Hz) for power supply is available at this receptacle when power distribution panel is energized and PWR SUP circuit breaker is set to ON.
5 TTY Spare Receptacle (duplex side of power terminal assembly). Ac voltage (115 v, 60 Hz) is
available at this receptacle when power distribution panel POWER selector switch is set to AC or
DC position.
6 TTY 98 Receptacle (duplex side of power terminal assembly). Ac voltage(115 v, 60 Hz) for
duplex TT-98/FG is available at this receptacle when power distribution panel POWER selector
switch is set to AC or DC position.
7 DX Connector. Dc voltage (28 vdc) is available for duplex inverter at this receptacle connector when power distribution panel is energized and INVERTERS DX circuit breaker is set to ON.
2-19
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-3.
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS FOR AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, AND E
MODELS. (CONT)
POWER TERMINAL ASSEMBLY (USED ON AN/GRC-122/142D AND E MODELS)
EL6VR051
1 OWR Connector. Dc voltage (28 vdc) for owr inverter is available at OWR connector when RADIO
TTY EQUIP BLWR circuit breaker is set to ON and power distribution panel AC-OFF-DC switch is
set to DC.
2 EQUIP BLOWER Receptacle. Ac voltage(115 v, 60 Hz) for equipment blower is available at this
receptacle when power distribution panel AC-OFF-DC switch is set to AC or DC position.
3 SHELTER BLOWER Receptacle. Ac voltage(115 v, 60 Hz) for shelter blower is available at this
receptacle when power distribution panel AC-OFF-DC switch is set to AC or DC position.
4 115 VAC 25 A Receptacle. Ac voltage(115 v, 60 Hz) for power supply is available at this receptacle when power distribution panel AC-OFF-DC switch is set to AC.
5 Dx Connector. Dc voltage (28 vdc) for duplex inverter is available at DX connector when power
distribution panel AC-OFF-DC switch is set to DC.
2-20
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-3.
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS FOR AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, AND E
MODELS. (CONT)
STANDING WAVE RATlO METER ME-165/G
EL6VR116
1 Meter. Indicates AM/3349/GRC-106 average output in watts or vswr, depending on setting of
function switch.
2 ADJUST Control. Used with function switch (ADJUST position) to calibrate meter for vswr
measurement.
3 Function Switch. Selects mode of operation for ME-165/G.
4 OUTPUT Connector. Radio frequency output appearing at this connector is routed to doublet
antenna.
SWITCH POSITION
EFFECT
POWER
ME-165/G will measure power output of
AM-3349/GRC-106.
ADJUST
Used in conjunction with ADJUST control to
calibrate meter for vswr measurement.
Meter indicates vswr of antenna.
Output of AM-3349/GRC-106 is routed directly
to doublet antenna (AN/GRA-50, if used).
5 INPUT Connector. Output of AM-3349/GRC-106 is applied to this connector.
Change 2 2-21
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-3.
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS FOR AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, AND E
MODELS. (CONT)
LOW-LEVEL SIGNALING DEVICE TT-523/GGC
EL6VR038
TT-523/GGC Switch. Used with TT-76(*)/GGC SELECTOR switch to provide low-level current for
punching or repunching tapes. This is done to reduce TT-76(*)/GGC radiation, and thereby provide
secure conditions for handling classified messages.
SWITCH POSITION
EFFECT
TD SEND TR SEND/RCV
Selected when TT-76(*)/GGC SELECTOR
switch is set to position 1. Operation of
TT-76(*)/GGC is not altered.
TD SEND LOCAL REPUNCH
Selected when TT-76(*)/GGC SELECTOR
switch is in position 2 or 3. Operation of
TT-76(*)/GGC circuit is altered to operate at
reduced current.
2-22
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-3. DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS FOR AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, AND E
MODELS ONLY. (CONT)
REMOTE BOX C-7279/GRC-142
EL6VR037
1.
Teletypewriter Loop Binding Posts. Provide for termination of dc tty Ioop field wires originating at
shelter dc entrance box binding posts. One pair is for OWR-DX-SEND TTY loop, the other pair is for
DX-RECEIVE TW loop (used in AN/GRC-122 models only).
2.
Teletypewriter Jacks. Provide for connection of remote teletypwriters into dc tty loops. Six jacks
are for OWR-DX-SEND TTY loop, and six jacks are for DX-RECEIVE TTY loop (used in AN/GRC-122
models only).
3. SEND-RECEIVE Switch. Allows remote keying of shelter radio set.
SWITCH
EFFECT
Position
SEND
Radio set is keyed for tty or 85 Hz + voice (nsk)
transmission.
RECEIVE
Radio set is not keyed and is in receive mode.
I
4. AUDIO Connector. Provides for connection of handset for remote voice or 85 Hz + voice (nsk)
operation.
5. PENDANT PLUG. Provides connection between remote box and remote control (P/O AN/GRA-6).
Change 4
2-23
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-3. DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS FOR AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D,
AND E MODELS. (CONT)
POWER/SIGNAL ENTRANCE BOX
EL6VR052
1 AC INPUT J2 Connector. Provides connection to shelter ac circuits from external ac power
source.
2 C-433-GRC Terminals. Provide connection from remote control to shelter mounted local control
for remote keying and voice operation.
3 DX-REC-PONY Loop Terminals (used on AN/GRG-122 models only). Provide connection from
remote site to shelter for duplex tty receive or pony loop (tty order wire) circuits.
4 OWR-DX-SEND Loop Terminals. Provide connection from remote site to shelter owr and duplex
send loop tty circuits.
5 TA-312/PT Terminals. Provide connection from field TA-312/PT to shelter-mounted
TA-312/PT.
6 REM CW Terminals. Provide connection from remote key terminal to radio set.
7 DC INPUT J1 Connector. Provides connection for dc input power from vehicle or external
dc power source.
8 GRD Terminal. Provides connection for grounding shelter to earth.
2-24
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-3. DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS FOR AN/GRC-122/142A , B, D, AND E
MODELS. (CONT)
LIGHTING CONTROLS (USED ON AN/GRC-122/142 D AND E MODELS ONLY)
EL6VR053
1.
INCANDESCENT COLD START LIGHTS Switch. Controls power to incandescent Iights.
2.
FLUORESCENT LIGHTS Switch. Controls power to fluorescent Iights.
3.
BYPASS/BLACKOUT Lights Switch. Controls shelter Iighting under blackout conditions. In
BLACKOUT position, all overhead lights in shelter will go out-when door is opened and Iight when
door is closed.
SHELTER EXHAUST BLOWER SWITCH (USED ON AN/GRG-122/142D AND E MODELS ONLY)
EL6VR054
SHELTER BLOWER Switch. Controls shelter exhaust blower.
Change 4
2-25
TM 11-5815-334-10
SECTION
2-4.
II.
PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE
CHECKS
AND
SERVICES
(PMCS) AND SYSTEM READINESS CRITERIA
GENERAL.
a. Maintenance Forms and Records. The forms and records you fill
out have several uses, including: (1) a permanent record of the
services, repairs, and modifications made on your equipment; (2)
reports to the next level of maintenance and to your commander; and
(3) a checklist for you when you want to know the status of the
eqipment after its last use, and whether faults, if any, have been
fixed. For information on forms and records, see DA PAM 738-750 (if
USMC,
see
TM-4700-15/1d).
b. Routine Checks. Routine checks, such as cleaning, dusting,
washing, stowing items not in use, covering unused receptacles, and
checking for damage, are not listed as PMCS checks. They are things
you should do any time you see they must be done. Ensure that all
discrepancies are noted and corrected.
c. PMCS. Operators PMCS are
actions necessary to keep your
the required
equipment in
periodic inspections and
good operating condition.
Readiness
Criteria
are
those
d. System Readiness Criteria. System
standard, specific requirements your system must meet for it to be
mission-capable.
2-5.
PMCS table (paragraph
scheduled
maintenance
tasks
a.
Explanation
of
2-5.1). The PMCS table lists
required
for
your
system.
all
the
Columns.
(1) Item No. This column contains a number for each procedure
When reporting malfunctions or failures on DA Form
be
performed.
2404, Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet, place this
number in the “TM Item No." column.
(2)
Interval. These columns tell you when to do a procedure.
Each column that applies will contain an asterisk (*). Some
procedures will have asterisks in more than one column.
(3) Item to be inspected/procedure. This column contains
name of the item to be inspected and tells how to perform the
required checks and services on it. Carefully follow these
instructions and perform them in the order listed.
2-26
Change 3
the
to
TM
11-5815-334-10
(4) Equipment is not ready/available if:. This column tells you
the conditions which will cause the equipment to be classified as not
ready
(red)
for
readiness
reporting.
NOTE
If the equipment must be kept in
continuous operation, check and
service only those items that can
be checked and serviced without
disturbing operation. Make the
complete checks and services when
the equipment can be shut down.
b.
Instructions.
(1) Do
operate your
your before (B) preventive maintenance just before you
equipment. Pay attention to CAUTIONS and WARNINGS.
(2)
equipment
Do your during (D) preventive
and/or its components systems
(3)
operating
Do your after (A) preventive
the
equipment. Pay attention
(4)
Do
your
weekly
(5)
Do
your
monthly
(W)
(M)
preventive
preventive
maintenance while the
are in operation.
maintenance right after
to the CAUTIONS and WARNINGS.
maintenance
maintenance
once
a
once
(6) If something doesn’t work, troubleshoot it with
instructions in this manual and notify your supervisor.
(7)
Always
do
your
preventive
maintenance
in
the
week.
a
month.
the
same
order.
(8) If anything goes wrong and you can’t fix it, write it
your DA Form 2404, or applicable form. If you find something
seriously wrong, report it to the next level of maintenance
IMMEDIATELY.
Change 3
on
2-27
TM
11-5815-334-10
WARNINGS
Never operate the generator or shelter until it
Electrical
defects
has been properly grounded.
in the load lines or equipment can cause DEATH
by electrocution when contact is made with an
ungrounded
system.
Adequate ventilation should be provided while
Prolonged
using
TRICHLOROTRIFLUOROETHANE.
The
breathing of vapor should be avoided.
solvent should not be used near heat or open
flame, the products of decomposition are toxic
Since
TRICHLOROTRIFLUOROETHANE
and
irritating.
dissolves natural oils, prolonged
contact
with
When necessary use gloves
skin should be avoided.
If the
which the solvent cannot penetrate.
solvent is taken internally, consult a physician.
Compressed air shall not be used for cleaning
purposes except where reduced to less than 29
psi and then only with effective chip guarding
Do not use
and
personnel
protective
equipment.
compressed
air
to
dry
parts
when
TRICHLOROTRIFLUOCompressed air is
ROETHANE has been used.
dangerous and can cause serious bodily harm if
protective means or methods are not observed to
prevent chip or particle (of whatever size) from
being blown into the eyes or unbroken skin of the
operator
or
other
personnel.
2-28
Change
3
TM
2-5.1.
Operator
Preventive
Maintenance
Checks
11-5815-334-10
and
Services
Interval
Item
No.
1
[tern to be
Procedure
Equipment is not
ready/available if:
inspected
Truck (1) 1 1/4 Ton (M-880)
Follow PMCS procedures
TM 9-2320-266-10.
2
in
Generator Set PU-620/M
(2 generators in set)
Follow PMCS procedures in
TM 5-6115-365-15.
3
Unable to
properly.
ground
Shelter
as
Blowers
Check blowers for proper
air flow. Clean as
necessary.
6
are
no
Shelter Door Air Filters
Clean or replace
necessary.
5
Both generators
inoperative
and
substitutes
are
available.
Grounding Rod MX-148/G
Check grounding system to
see that it is properly
installed.
Tighten
loose
ground
connections.
4
Truck is inoperative
and no substitute is
available.
Heater,
Blowers fail
operate.
to
Multi-Fuel
Follow PMCS procedures in
TM 5-4520-211-14.
7
Electric
Heater
Follow PMCS procedures
TM 5-4520-236-14.
in
Change
3
2-28.1
TM
11-5815-334-10
2-5.1
Operator
Preventive
Maintenance
Checks
and
Services
(cont’d)
Interval
Item
No.
Item to be
Procedure
8
inspected
Inverter
Motor
PU-724(*)/G
Generator
Follow PMCS procedures
TM 5-6125-252-15.
9
Telephone
Set
Equipment is not
ready/available
if:
in
TA-312/PT
Batteries-Inspect
for
foreign matter and corrosion.
Clean as necessary.
2-28.2
Change
3
PU-724(*)/G is
inoperative.
TM
11-5815-334-10
2-5.2.
System Readiness Criteria table (paragraph 2-5.3). The System
Readiness Criteria table is your “checklist” for determining the
mission readiness of your system.
a.
Explanation
of
Columns.
(1) Item No.
This column contains a number for each
readiness-reportable
item.
When reporting, on DA Form 2404,
Equipment
Inspection
and
Maintenance
Worksheet,
malfunctions
or
failures that cannot be repaired "on-the-spot," place this number
the "TM Item No." column.
(2)
Subsystems
and
Components. This column lists all
equipments
which
are
required
for
readiness
reporting.
(3) Equip Model ID #. This column contains the
identification
number
(type-classification)
of
each
(4)
furnished
Qty. This column tells you the quantity
as part of, or with, your system.
in
system
equipment model
equipment.
of
equipment/items
(5) Remarks. This
column
contains
other
information/special
instructions and will alert you to any exceptions to the
requirements, designed to give you maximum mission flexibility.
b. Instructions.
readiness:
Perform
the
following
steps
to
determine
system
(1) BEFORE starting your mission, ensure that listed
equipments/items
are
on
hand
and
operational.
If
necessary,
perform
operational checks in applicable TM' S to determine the condition of
your
equipment.
(2) Take note of REMARKS column. This column contains exceptions
and special instructions to help you tailor your requirements to your
mission.
(3) If any required
operational, your entire
in the REMARKS column) .
equipment/item is not on hand and
system is deadlined (unless otherwise
(4) Correct any discrepancies, then re-check all
equipments/items
on
list. When all required equipment/items
system
is
mission-ready.
hand and operational, your
(5) AFTER completing
location, ensure that all
your mission, and before moving
listed equipments/items are on
Change
are
to a
hand.
3
noted
on
new
2-28.3
TM
11-5815-334-10
2-5.3.
System
Item
No.
1R
SYSTEM
ratings:
AN/GRC-122,AN/GRC-142
Subsystems and
Components
READINESS
Fully Mission Capable (FMC)
Not Mission Capable (NMC)
Equip
Model
ID #
Q
Y
1
J-2276
1
2R
AC-DC
Distribution
Box (used in AN/GRC
-122/142,
AN/GRC122C/142C
only)
3R
Adapter
Can
Fuel
1
4R
Antenna
Mounting
Support
Assembly
1
5R
Blower
2
6R
Communications
Security
Equipment
7R
Assembly
Communications
Security
Equipment
TSEC/KG
-7
1
J-2728
2
Dummy
9R
Heater,
Electric
1
10R
Heater,
Multi-Fuel
1
1lR
Inverter,
Motor
Generator
PU-724
(*)/G
2
12R
Low-Level
Device
TT-523
1
Change
Signaling
3
System may be rated FMC
with component(s) rated NMC
if
that/those
component(s)
are not required to support
the mission.
1
8R
2-28.4
Box
TSEC/KW
-7
REMARKS
t
S-250/G
Shelter,
Electrical
Equipment
(wired
with
or
the following comS-318/G
ponents):
Kit,
CRITERIA
One-half
used in
the quantity is
AN/GRC-142 models.
TM
S Y S T E M READINESS
2-5.3.
System
ratings:
AN/GRC-122,AN/GRC-142
I t e m Subsystems
and
Components
No.
CRITERIA
Equip
Model
ID #
MD-522
(*) /GRC
2
Y
1
14R
SB-3018
Panel (used in AN/
GRC-122/142 and AN/
GRC-122C/142C only)
1
15R
Power
Distribution
Panel (used in AN/
GRC-122A,B,D,E/
142A,B,D,E
only)
SB-3358
1
16R
Power
PP-4763
1
17R
Power Terminal
Assembly (used in
AN/GRC-122A, B,D,E/
142A,B,D,E
only)
18R
Radio
19R
Receiver-Transmitter
RT-662
or
RT-834
2
20R
Remote
Control
Box
C-7279
1
2lR
Remote
Control
Group A N / G R A - 6
1
22R
Standing Wave
Power
Meter
Ratio- M E - 1 6 5 / G
1
23R
Switch
24R
Telephone
1
AN/GRC
-106*
Set
Assembly
Box
REMARKS
t
Modem, Radio
typewriter
Supply
(cont’d)
Fully Mission Capable (FMC)
Not Mission Capable (NMC)
13R
Tele-
11-5815-334-10
SA-1554
and
SA-1555
OR
SA-1650
1
One-half
used in
the quantity is
AN/GRC-142 models.
1
1
Change
3
2-28.5
TM
11-5815-334-10
SYSTEM
2-5.3.
System
ratings:
AN/GRC-122,AN/GRC-142
I t e m Subsystems and
Components
No.
CRITERIA
Fully Mission Capable (FMC)
Not Mission Capable (NMC)
Equip
Model
ID #
Q
t
Y
Teletypewriter
(use
in
AN/GRC-122/142
and
AN/GRC-122A,B/
142A,B only)
TT-98
or
TT-722
2
One-half
used in
the quantity is
AN/GRC-142 models.
Terminal,
Communications (used in AN
GRC-122C,D,E/142C,
D, E only)
AN/UGC74A(V) 3
2
One-half
used in
the quantity is
AN/GRC-142 models.
AN/GRA50
1
BG-175
1
CG-687/U
1
26R
27R
Set
Antenna
Group
(consisting
of):
29R
Bag
30R
Cable
3lR
Halyard
MX-2706
/G
2
32R
Insulator
IL-4/GRA
-4
1
33R
Reeling
RC-432/G
2
34R
Tape,
35R
Wire
37R
2-28.6
REMARKS
2
Telephone
36R
(cont’d)
TA-312
25R
28R
READINESS
Assembly,
Machine
1
Measuring
Assembly
Generator Set
(2 generators in
Ground
RF
Rod
Change
3
CX-7303
2
PU-620/M
1
MX-148/G
2
set)
System may be rated FMC if
one generator is rated NMC.
TM 11-5815-334-10
Table 2-5.3.
SYSTEM READINESS CRITERIA (cont’d)
System ratings:
AN/GRC-122,AN/GRC-142
Item Subsystems and
No.
Components
38R
Mast Assembly
Fully Mission Capable (FMC)
Not Mission Capable (NMC)
Equip
Model
ID #
Q
REMARKS
t
Y
AB-155/U
6
One-half the quantity is
used in AN/GRC-142 models.
NOTE
The following components are required
for EACH Mast Assy.
39R
Adapter, RF
UG-29B/U
1
40R
CG-55C/U
1
4lR
Cable Assembly, RF
OR
Cable Assembly, RF
CG-692A
1
42R
Insulator
43R
Masts, Mast Section
MS-44
8
44R
Reel, Cable
RC-435
1
45R
Splice, Split Bolt
Burgundy
KS-90
18
46R
Carrying Device
MX-387/
GRA-4
6
47R
Wire, Copper Stranded #14 AWG (500 FT)
48R
12
1
1
Whip Antenna
(consisting of):
49R
Adapter Connector
UG-204/U
1
50R
Adapter Connector
UG-306B
1
5lR
Antenna Tip Assembly
52R
Bag
53R
Clamp
3
CW-206
1
2
One half the quantity is
used in AN/GRC-142 models.
Change 3
2-28.7
TM 11-5815-334-10
Table 2-5.3.
SYSTEM READINESS CRITERIA (cont’d)
System ratings:
Item
No.
AN\GRC-122, AN\GRC-142
Subsystems and
Components
Fully Mission Capable (FMC)
Not Mission Capable (NMC)
Equip
Model
ID #
Q
REMARKS
t
Y
2
One half the quantity is
used in AN\GRC-142 models.
AB-652
2
One half the quantity is
used in AN\GRC-142 models.
Mast Section
MS-116A
6
One half the quantity is
used in AN\GRC-142 models.
57R
Mast Section
MS-l17A
2
One half the quantity is
used in AN\GRC-142 models.
58R
Mast Section
MS-118A
2
One half the quantity is
used in AN\GRC-142 models.
59R
Rope (40 FT)
1
60R
Antenna Tiedown Kit
4
54R
Cover, Antenna
55R
Mast Base
56R
6lR
AC Cable Assembly,
Power Electrical
(50 FT)
CX-10951
/G
1
62R
DC Power Cable (15 FT)
CX-10463
/GRC-142
1
63R
Truck, 1 l\4 Ton
M-880
1
System may be rated FMC if
appropriate substitute is
available.
*U. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1992 - 311-831/43982
2-28.8
Change 3
PIN:
057349-003
TM 11-5815-334-10
Section III OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS
Para
Page
System Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Site and Shelter Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Vehicle Boarding Ladder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Ground Rod Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
DC and AC Power Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
W h i p A n t e n n a I n s t a l l a t i o n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Antenna Tip Cap Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Antenna Group AN/GRA-50 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Dipole Antenna Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
AB-155(*)/U with Tripod Adapter AB-1089/U Erection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Antenna Wire Length Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Mast AB-155/U Erection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Camouflage Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Shade Tarpaulin Installation (AN/GRC-122/142(*) Models). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Remote Equipment Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Security Equipment Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Loop Current Test.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Shelter Door Combination Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Preoperational Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Preliminary Starting Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Preoperational Equipment Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Preoperational Equipment Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Operation and Self-Test of Communication Terminal AN/UGC-74A(V)3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Tuning Procedure .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Operation During Radio Silence and Output Power Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Local OWR Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Local Duplex Operation (AN/GRC-122(*) Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Remote Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Stopping Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Standby Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Complete Shutdown of Shelter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Emergency Stopping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Preparation for Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
2-29
2-30
2-30
2-31
2-32
2-34
2-37
2-38
2-41
2-44
2-47
2-48
2-54
2-55
2-56
2-69
2-70
2-71
2-74
2-78
2-80
2-95
2-97
2-99
2-108
2-111
2-111
2-120
2-129
2-142
2-143
2-143
2-144
2-146
Subject
NOTE
There are no operating instructions on decals and instruction plates used in this
manual. For specific instructions on decals or plates refer to applicable manual listed in
appendix A.
2-6.
SYSTEM PLANNING.
The tactical situation and requirements determined by the system planner govern the use of Radio Set
AN/GRC-122/142(*). Use AN/GRC-142(*) models for owr communications and AN/G RC-122(*)
models for duplex communications. Communicating distance will determine antenna to be used.
The tactical situation will determine whether shelter will be operated locally or from a remote site.
2-29
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-7.
SITE AND SHELTER REQUIREMENTS.
The best operating site for shelter is determined by terrain in conjunction with system planning and
security considerations.
Location of antennas for long distances of communication is important. Radio signals are absorbed
and sometimes reflected by nearby obstructions such as hills, buildings, bridges, or telephone lines
that extend above height of antennas. Transmitted signals have their greatest range as high above
ground as possible. Avoid placing antennas near sources of electrical interference such as powerIines or radar sets.
Enemy jamming is always possible. Effects of enemy jamming maybe reduced by locating antennas
so a nearby obstruction acts as a screen. Locate antennas so obstruction is between a probable
enemy jamming transmitter and antenna. This screening action also reduces transmitted signal
strength in direction of enemy.
Normally shelter is truck mounted, but if shelter is removed from truck and a site is choosen, ground
should be firm, dry, and have good drainage. After a site is prepared, shelter should be placed on
leveled concrete blocks or wooden beams with access to all outside entrance boxes and exhaust
blower ports. If a generator set is used to provide power, it should be located approximately 50 feet
(15.25 m) away from shelter to reduce fire hazard and generator noise interference.
2-8.
VEHICLE BOARDING LADDER.
Boarding ladder must be used if shelter is truck mounted.
EL6VR055
1.
Unscrew tiedown assemblies (1) from side-mounted retaining plates (2).
2.
Place brackets (3) in mountings for future use and remove ladder (4) from shelter.
3.
Place boarding ladder bracket against tailgate of truck.
4.
Fasten hook on each of two securing ropes to lower towing rings of truck.
5.
Pull each end of two ropes through guy fasteners and tighten.
2-30
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-9. GROUND ROD INSTALLATION.
Grounding must be done before any power is connected to shelter. Two ground rods are provided,
one for shelter and the other for a portable generator. Select a grounding site that will not interfere
with entrance door, field wires, antenna transmission cables, or power cables.
NOTE
Ground terminal is located in dc entrance box in AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models
and power/signal entrance box in AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, and E models.
EL6VE056
1. Select location on ground by power entrance box (l). Scoop out small hole approximately 6
inches deep.
2. Remove any paint or grease from ground rod (2).
3. Using sledge hammer, drive ground rod into hole until top is approximately ground level.
NOTE
If practical, wet ground around ground rod.
4. Using star washer (3), flat washer (4), Iockwasher (5), and wingnut (6), connect one end of
ground strap (7) to ground rod (2).
5. Using star washer (8), flat washer (9), Iockwasher (10), and wingnut (11), connect other
end of ground strap to ground terminal (12).
2-31
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-10.
DC AND AC POWER CONNECTION.
For complete operation, AN/GRC-122/142(*) must be connected to an ac power source. Operation
is possible from either a dc source or an ac source. If only a dc source is selected, air conditioner and
ac outlets will not operate. If only an ac source is selected, dc convenience outlet and shelter electric
heater will not operate.
To conserve battery power, use ac only mode even though shelter is connected to vehicle battery. In
ac operation, pull power distribution panel MAIN circuit breaker (AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C
models) or pull DC MAIN circuit breaker (AN/GRC-122/142A and B models) or switch AC-OFF-DC
switch to AC (AN/GRC-122/142D and E models) to disconnect vehicle battery from shelter power
system.
PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES
WARNING
Place all circuit breakers and equipment power switches in OFF position. Make sure
shelter is grounded to prevent electrical shock. Connect only one ac or dc power source
to shelter at any given time.
CAUTION
If shelter is connected to a dc power source other than vehicle battery during secure
operations, system may be adversely affected, Always switch power panel to AC or DC
position before applying ac or dc power to shelter.
DC POWER CONNECTION FOR AN/GRC-122/142(*) MODELS
Dc power cable (CX-10463/GRC-142) is supplied with shelter and is connected to dc power source by
organizational maintenance.
EL6VR057
Connect dc power cable (1) from dc power source to DC INPUT receptacle (2).
2-32
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-10.
DC AND AC POWER CONNECTION. (CONT)
AC POWER CONNECTION FOR AN/GRC-122/142(*) MODELS
Ac power cable is supplied with shelter and is connected to ac power source as shown below. Ac
power cable is connected to rear curbside wall on AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models and front
curbside wall on AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, and E models.
EL6VR058
Connect ac power cable (1) from ac power source to AC INPUT receptacle (2).
AC POWER CABLE CONNECTION TO GENERATOR
Ac power cable is connected to ac power source as shown below.
El6VR207
2-33
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-11.
WHIP ANTENNA INSTALLATION.
AN/GRC-142(*) models are supplied with one whip and one doublet antenna. An additional whip and
doublet antenna is supplied with AN/GRC-122(*) models.
An owr whip antenna base is mounted on roadside front wall and a duplex antenna base is mounted on
curbside rear wall. An antenna connector is mounted on roadside wall for doublet antenna and an
additional connector is located under rear wall whip antenna mount. Antenna mount located on front
wall is used for radio set and antenna mount located on rear wall is used for duplex RT-662/GRC. As
required, either duplex whip or duplex doublet antenna is used.
ASSEMBLY AND ERECTION OF WHIP ANTENNA
Shelter is shipped with whip antenna mast base in vertical position. Position mast base in horizontal
position and install whip antenna to OWR-DX-SEND antenna base as follows:
EL6VR060
NOTE
For AN/GRC-122(*) models, repeat procedure for dx-receive antenna.
1. While holding antenna mast base (1) with one hand, remove two antenna bracket pins (2) by
pulling them outward.
2. Lower antenna mast base (1) to horizontal position.
2-34
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-11.
WHIP ANTENNA lNSTALLATION. (CONT)
EL6VR061
4.
Screw second antenna section MS-116-A (4) into first antenna mast section (3).
5.
Slip antenna cover (5) and antenna cover clamp (6) onto MS-116-A installed in step 4.
Slide antenna cover (5) down onto antenna mast base as far as it will go. Push antenna cover
clamp (6) down antenna cover and tighten.
6.
Add third antenna section MS-116-A (7), fourth antenna section MS-117-A (8), and fifth
antenna section MS-118-A (9).
7.
Fasten antenna tip (10) to antenna section MS-118-A (9) (para 2-12).
EL6VR062
8.
Fasten one antenna tiedown clamp (11) to middle and one to end of antenna mast for mobile
communications.
2-35
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-11.
WHIP ANTENNA INSTALLATION. (CONT)
ASSEMBLY AND ERECTION OF WHIP ANTENNA. (CONT)
EL6VR063
CAUTION
Always tie antenna down for mobile communications.
9. Raise antenna to vertical position and insert antenna bracket pins into antenna bracket
10. Tie cords of each tiedown clamp (1) to tiedown rings of shelter for mobile communications.
2-36
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-12.
ANTENNA TIP CAP INSTALLATION.
MATERIALS/PARTS: Electrical tape (item 11, appx D)
Reinforced tape (item 12, appx D)
EL6VR064
1. Place reinforced tape (1) on top element (2), 2 inches from tip. Wrap approximately five times.
2. Place antenna tip cap (3) over tip of top element (2). Push down.
EL 6 V R065
3. Wrap reinforced tape (1) around base of tip cap (3) where it meets top element (2).
4. Secure tip cap (3) to top element (2).
5. Wrap tip cap (3) completely with electrical tape (4).
2-37
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-13.
ANTENNA GROUP AN/GRA-50 INSTALLATION.
Doublet antenna is used in place of whip antenna for greater range and reliability. It is used in stationary operations. Doublet antenna can operate suspended between two vertical supports that are 4 feet
or higher. Antenna can also be suspended between two or three antenna masts, depending on frequency and antenna length.
Determine antenna length required by operating frequency being used. Use antenna wire length chart
given on page 2-47 to determine length of wire required on each side of insulator. A frequencycalibrated tape measure can also be used and is supplied with antenna group.
EL6VR107
2-38
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-13.
ANTENNA GROUP AN/GRA-50 INSTALLATION. (CONT)
1. Determine antenna length required by using either frequency-calibrated tape measure or antenna wire length chart on page 2-47.
2. Connect antenna wire terminal (1) to wingnuts (2) on one side of insulator (3).
3. Temporarily fasten tape measure (4) to insulator (3). Unwind tape measure to desired frequency (length).
4. Grasp reel assembly (5). Loosen wingnut (6) at center reel and wingnut (7) on wire clamp.
5. Unwind reel assembly (5) to required distance keeping antenna wire tight at all times. After
unwinding required amount of antenna wire, tighten wingnut (7) on wire clamp and wingnut (6)
on reel assembly.
6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 for second reel assembly.
NOTE
Check overall length of two antenna wires plus insulator and reel assemblies. Overall
length should be twice the length indicated on tape measure for desired frequency or
twice the length obtained from the chart on page 2-47. Adjust antenna for exact overall
length. Be sure to keep insulator centered.
2-39
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-13.
ANTENNA GROUP AN/GRA-50 INSTALLATION. (CONT)
EL6VR108
7. Attach each reel assembly to a halyard.
8. Connect rf cable assembly CG-678/U to insulator and applicable antenna connector on shelter.
NOTE
Always keep in mind direction antenna is going to radiate. Consider connection of
antenna to shelter before positioning antenna along ground for erection.
9. Tie halyards to best available supports (trees, fence posts, antenna masts) at a height of 4 feet
or greater.
CAUTION
To prevent breaking antenna wire, set antenna up to sag 2 feet lower than end supports
0. Shorten or lengthen antenna assembly a few inches at a time if voltage swr is within red scale of
power meter.
NOTE
Rf cable should be at right angles to antenna wires for the first few feet from connection
at insulator. Lay rf cable out as straight as possible; do not allow rf cable to form loops.
2-40
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-14.
DIPOLE ANTENNA ASSEMBLY.
Dipole antenna assembly is a half-wave doublet antenna used for both transmitting and receiving. This
antenna is normally operated at half-wave fundamental of desired frequency. Desired operating frequency determines length of antenna. Antenna can be configured to operate at more than one frequency by assembling different lengths of antenna wire separated by strain insulators. Each adjoining
length of antenna wire is interconnected by a jumper to achieve a desired frequency. Follow the steps
below to assemble dipole antenna.
EL6VR066
EL6VR066
1. List operating frequencies assigned.
2. See page 2-47 to determine required length of antenna wire for each side of antenna.
NOTE
As illustrated above, total antenna length includes distance measured from coaxial
connector to each end of antenna wire, including strain insulators. Allow additional wire
to connect to insulator and approximately 8 inches to serve as a jumper when needed.
2-41
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-14.
DIPOLE ANTENNA ASSEMBLY. (CONT)
EL6VR068
NOTE
Highest frequency being used will require shortest measured total length of antenna
wire.
3.
Cut total required length of antenna wire (1) for highest frequency, plus an additional length for
connections on both ends.
4.
Cut antenna wire in half.
5.
Loop one end of antenna wire (1) through coaxial connector ring (2).
6.
Use splice conductor (3) and coaxial connector wingnut (4) to secure antenna wire (1) to coaxial connector.
7.
Attach strain insulator (5) to free end of antenna wire.
8.
Repeat steps 5 through 8 for other half of antenna.
NOTE
Each additional lower operating frequency will require lengthening existing antenna.
This is done by adding wire at strain insulator on each side of antenna. Subtract existing
antenna length from total length required for the new, lower frequency. Allow additional
wire for jumper connections.
9.
Cut additional length of antenna wire (6).
10.
Cut additional length of antenna wire in half.
11.
Attach antenna wire for next lower frequency to unused end of strain insulator (5).
12.
Attach strain insulator (7) to free end of antenna wire at required length.
2-42
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-14.
13.
DIPOLE ANTENNA ASSEMBLY. (CONT)
Repeat steps 11 and 12 for other half of antenna.
EL6VR069
NOTE
Construct each additional lower frequency antenna by adding more antenna wire to
antenna already constructed. Each antenna length should be measured from center of
coaxial connector to end of antenna including strain insulators. This measurement will
give half the total length required. After antenna is constructed, use splice conductors
to connect required jumpers to alter antenna length to match operating frequency. Each
antenna constructed will operate on fundamental odd harmonics of fundamental
frequency for which it is constructed.
Change 2 2-43
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-15.
AB-155(*)/U WITH TRIPOD ADAPTER AB-1089/U ERECTION.
AB-1089/U (tripod adapter), used with AB-155(*)/U antenna mast assembly, is designed for quick
doublet antenna erection. AB-1089/U is used for temporary antenna erection and when quick
erection and breakdown is required. Without being tied down, it can hold up in winds up to 25 mph.
ANTENNA MAST ASSEMBLY
EL6VR109
2-44
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-15.
AB-155(*)/U WITH TRIPOD ADAPTOR AB-1089/U ERECTION. (CONT)
ANTENNA MAST ASSEMBLY
NOTE
Assemble antenna on ground and then raise.
1.
Join two mast assembly sections (1) together.
2.
Install joined mast sections (1) into tripod adapter (2).
3.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for remaining two legs.
4.
Join two mast sections (3) together inserting guy plate (4) over top section.
5.
Attach pulley and halyard (5) to guy plate.
6.
Attach three 30-foot guy lines (6) to guy plate.
7.
Insert assembled mast sections (3) with guy plates, halyard, and guy ropes, into tripod
adaptor.
8.
With assistant, raise assembled mast assembly.
9.
If overall antenna length is more than 120 feet (36.6 m), use three antenna masts. Do steps 1
through 8 for each antenna mast used.
10.
Position either two or three antenna masts as shown below.
NOTE
Three required stake installations are marked with an X (as shown below and on page
2-46), and are used to support halyards which support antenna wire. Six remaining
stakes can be driven in ground if time permits. Use three assembled mast sections,
which measure 15 feet, for proper spacing of guy stakes.
11.
Install guy stakes in locations shown below.
EL6VR110
2-45
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-15.
AB-155(*)/U WITH TRIPOD ADAPTOR AB-1089/U ERECTION. (CONT)
ANTENNA ERECTION
EL6VR111
12. Connect center halyard to antenna wire fastener assembly.
13. Connect each end of antenna wire to end mast halyards.
NOTE
Allow guy lines to hang freely when hoisting antenna wire.
Do step 14 for antennas that require three antenna masts for support.
14. Hoist center halyard connected to fastener assembly to full elevation and tie to guy stake.
15. With assistant, hoist both ends of antenna wire simultaneously to full elevation and tie to end guy
stakes.
16. If time permits, tie guy lines to guy stakes.
2-46
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-16. ANTENNA WIRE LENGTH CHART.
ANTENNA WIRE LENGTH CHART
FREQUENCY
(MHz)
2.0
2.05
2.1
2.15
2.2
2.25
2.3
3.0
5.8
6.0
6.2
6.4
6.6
6.8
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
9.5
10.0
10.5
11.0
12.0
13.0
LENGTH OF EACH
ANTENNA WIRE*
(FT)
(M)
117.0
114.14
111.42
108.83
106.36
104.0
101.73
78
40.35
39.0
37.74
36.56
35.45
34.41
33.42
31.20
29.25
27.52
26.0
24.63
23.40
22.29
21.27
19.51
18.0
FREQUENCY
(MHz)
4.0
4.4
4.6
4.8
5.0
5.2
5.4
5.6
14.0
15.0
16.0
17.0
18.0
19.0
20.0
21.0
22.0
23.0
24.0
25.0
26.0
27.0
28.0
29.0
30.0
(35.68)
(34.81)
(33.98)
(33.19)
(32.43)
(31.72)
(31.02)
(23.77)
(12.30)
(11.89)
(11.51)
(11.15)
(10.81)
(10.49)
(10.19)
(9.5)
(8.92)
(8.39)
(7.9)
(7.5)
(7.13)
(6.7)
(6.4)
(5.9)
(5.49)
LENGTH OF EACH
ANTENNA WIRE*
(FT)
(M)
(17.83)
(16.21)
(15.51)
(14.86)
(14.27)
(13.72)
(13.21)
(12.74)
(5.09)
(4.7)
(4.4)
(4.19)
(3.9)
(3.7)
(3.5)
(3.43)
(3.24)
(3.1)
(2.96)
(2.8)
(2.7)
(2.66)
(2.59)
(2.44)
(2.37)
58.5
53.18
50.86
48.75
46.80
45.0
43.33
41.78
16.71
15.60
14.62
13.76
13.0
12.31
11.7
11.27
10.63
10.25
9.72
9.35
9.00
8.75
8.35
8.00
7.80
● Each antenna wire length includes reel assembly frame.
NOTE
The above values represent 1/4 wavelength at the given operating frequency in
MHz. The velocity figure for 1/4 wavelength is 234, therefore the formula is:
1/4 wavelength (ft) =
234
Freq (MHz)
To convert the wavelength from feet to meters, multiply the answer to the
above by .3048.
Change 2 2-47
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-17.
MAST AB-155/U ERECTION.
These procedures cover erection of antenna mast AB-155/U. Two antenna masts are used to support
antenna when overall antenna length is less than 120 feet (36.6 m). A center mast is needed for
antennas of 120 feet or longer. Erect end masts several feet beyond each end of antenna. Center
mast must be offset 3 feet to left or right of antenna line to allow room for coaxial connector.
Determine direction antenna is to radiate. Always consider connection of antenna to shelter before
positioning antenna along ground for erection. Arrange two or three antenna masts and guy plates as
illustrated on page 2-53. Erect each antenna according to the following procedures,
ANTENNA ASSEMBLY
EL6VR070
2-48
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-17.
MAST AB-155/U ERECTION. (CONT)
1. Place mast AB-155/U assembly at each mast location.
NOTE
If ground is soft or sandy, place mast base plate AB-154/U on ground and push it down
firmly. Then drive mast base swivel stake AB-154/U through center hole in mast base
plate.
2. Drive mast base AB-154/U swivel ground stake (1) into ground, through mast base plate (2) if
needed, at desired mast location with swivel end pointing 45 degrees from antenna line.
3. Aline female ends of mast sections MS-44 for assembly.
4. Install first mast section (3) to mast base swivel stake (l).
5. Install second and third mast sections (4).
6. Install guy plate MX-378/U (5) over third mast section.
7. Install fourth and fifth mast sections (6).
NOTE
Use five assembled mast sections to measure distance between mast base and guy
stakes. If ground is soft or sandy use wooden stakes instead of aluminum stakes, and
loop guys over stakes.
8. Install second guy plate MX-378/U (7) over fifth mast section.
9. Install sixth, seventh, and eighth mast sections (8).
10. Install third guy plate MX-378/U (9) over eighth mast section. Walk down mast assembly and
turn three guy plates so three halyard holes face same direction.
11. Install four guy fasteners MX-379/U (10) over four guy stakes (11).
12. Install four guy stakes (11) 25 feet (7.6 m) from mast base as illustrated.
2-49
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-17.
MAST AB-155/U ERECTION. (CONT)
ANTENNA ASSEMBLY (CONT)
EL6VR071
2-50
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-17.
MAST AB-155/U ERECTION. (CONT)
NOTE
Fasten guy lines by snapping fastener at end of each guy line into one of four holes
located 90 degrees apart on MX-378/U.
13. Fasten four 52-foot guy lines MX-383/GRA-4 (1) to top guy plate MX-378/U (2).
14. Fasten four 42-foot guy lines MX-381/GRA-4 (3) to center guy plate MX-378/U (4).
15. Fasten four 32-foot guy lines MX-382/GRA-4 (5) to bottom guy plate MX-378/U (6).
16. Connect three different lengths of right side guy lines (7) to right side guy stake (8).
17. Connect three different lengths of left side guy lines (9) to left side guy stake (10).
18. Tighten each side guy line installed in steps 16 and 17. Do not over tighten as antenna mast
could bend.
19. Connect three different lengths of back guy lines (11) to back guy stake (12).
20. Position three front guy lines (13) pointing toward front guy state.
21. Fasten snap fastener (14) on pulley to unused hole in top guy plate MX-378/U (2).
22. Slip rope (15) through pulley and tie ends of rope near mast base to keep rope from running
through pulley.
2-51
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-17.
MAST AB-155/U ERECTION. (CONT)
ANTENNA ERECTION
Personnel Required: Three technicians
1. Technician (1) holds front guy lines and pulls steadily on them, keeping more tension on top
guy line to bow mast slightly (view A).
2. Technician (2) takes a position near mast base and holds mast base in position.
3. Technician (3) takes position near top end of mast and raises it.
4. Technician (3) walks toward mast base raising mast as technician (1) pulls on guy lines.
5. Adjust guy lines until mast is vertical (view B).
2-52
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-17.
MAST AB-155/U ERECTION. (CONT)
NOTE
When a guy line is tightened, opposite guy line may have to be loosened slightly to keep
mast from bowing.
ANTENNA RAISING
When operating within frequency range of 2.0 to 4.0 MHz, length of antenna wire requires use of three
40-foot antenna masts AB-155/U. At frequencies above 4.0 MHz, only two antenna AB-155/U masts
are required. Length of antenna should be positioned at right angles to direction of transmission and
reception.
The dark lines illustrated below show position in which masts are assembled so halyard holes face in
right direction.
EL6VR073
2-53
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-17.
MAST AB-155/U ERECTION. (CONT)
ANTENNA RAISING
NOTE
Do not do step 1 if two antenna masts are required.
1.
Attach fastener on halyard MX-516/GRA-4(1) to coaxial connector (2).
2.
Cut a 15-inch piece of rope or wire (3).
3.
Attach one end of antenna wire (3) to end strain insulator (4).
4.
Attach free end of antenna wire (3) to halyard MX-516/GRA-4 (5).
5.
Repeat steps 2, 3, and 4 for opposite end of antenna wire.
6.
Pull antenna into position with halyards MX-516/GRA-4. Tie ropes to antenna masts.
NOTE
Antenna lead-in cable should be raised off ground on poles if possible. Raising lead-in
cable from ground prevents damage. Antenna lead-in should be taped to both antenna
mast and shelter to relieve tension on coaxial connector.
7.
2-18.
Connect antenna lead-in cable to OWR-DX-SEND DOUBLET ANTENNA connector located on
roadside of shelter.
CAMOUFLAGE PROCEDURES,
General instructions for camouflage procedures are contained in TM 5-200. Specific procedures for
camouflaging AN/GRC-122/142(*) shelters with radar scattering screen, when operating with one
whip antenna, are given below:
CAUTION
During combat or simulated combat conditions, make sure metal poles used to support
camouflage netting material do not touch antenna. Metal poles should be positioned a
minimum of 4 feet (1.22 m) away to avoid contact and prevent damage to equipment.
Do not cut nylon strings of netting.
1. Cut three quarters of a 16-inch (40 cm) diameter hole in garnish material (vinyl) in approximate
location of antenna. Do not cut nylon strings of netting.
2. Open cut flap to expose netting.
3. Secure flap open with plastic tape (NSN 1080-00-108-1114) from repair kit.
4. Pass whip antenna through hole, positioning antenna in center.
5. When erecting poles to support camouflage screen, place poles at least 4 feet (1.22 m) from
whip antenna.
2-54
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-19.
SHADE TARPAULIN INSTALLATION AN/GRC-122/142(*) MODELS.
EL6VR074
1. Position shade tarpaulin (1) over top of shelter.
2. Raise or insert corner curbside shade tarpaulin supports (2).
3. Engage support end (3) through shade tarpaulin eyelet (4) for each support.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for remaining roadside shade tarpaulin supports.
5. Place loop end (5) of tarpaulin rope over support end (3) protruding through eyelets.
NOTE
Some tarpaulin ropes are attached to tarpaulin.
6. Tie tarpaulin ropes to tiedowns (6).
2-55
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-20.
REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION.
This paragraph covers installation procedures of the following components for remote operation.
Remote Control Box C-7279/GRC
Remote Control C-433/GRC
Remote Telephone Set TA-312/PT
Remote Handset H-33/PT
Remote Key Telegraph KY-116/U
Remote TTY TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3
Remote TTY TT-76A/GGC
NOTE
Remote operation may require removal of TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3 and TT76(*)/GGC from shelter. Additional cables are required which are additionally
authorized items.
Instructions for installation of remote units cover all configurations of AN/GRC-122/142(*) models.
Shelter can be operated from a maximum distance of 1 mile away at a remote site. A 110 vac power
source is required at remote site for tty operations. All remote tty’s are additionally authorized
components and are requisitioned through normal supply channels. Typical secure and nonsecure
full-duplex remote equipment setups for all models are illustrated on pages 2-58 through 2-61.
REMOTE BOX C-7279/GRC
Remote box requires two pairs of field wires for connection to shelter, one pair of field wires for owr
operation and an additional pair for duplex or pony operation. Only two tty’s are shown connected to
remote box. Remaining jacks on remote box provide for connection of additional tty’s. All OWR-DXSEND TTY and DX-RECEIVE TTY jacks are in series with each other. This arrangement allows a total of
six tty’s to be connected into each loop. Connect remote box as follows:
EL6VR076
2-56
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-20.
1.
REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. (CONT)
Connect field wire (1) from shelter DC ENTRANCE BOX or POWER/SIGNAL ENTRANCE BOX
OWR SEND terminals (2) to remote box OWR-DX-SEND TTY terminals (3).
NOTE
Do step 2 for AN/GRC-122(*) models using duplex or pony circuit capability.
2.
Connect field wire (4) from DC ENTRANCE BOX or POWER/SIGNAL ENTRANCE BOX DXREC/PONY terminals (5) to remote box DX-RECEIVE TTY terminals (6).
3.
Connect pendant plug P1 (7) to remote control C-433/GRC AUDIO connector (8).
NOTE
During secure operations, remote box is bypassed by security equipment KW-7 and is
used for voice communications only.
REMOTE CONTROL C-433/GRC
Remote control requires one pair of field wires for connection to shelter. Connect remote control as
follows:
EL6VR077
1. Connect field wires (1) from DC ENTRANCE BOX or POWER/SIGNAL ENTRANCE
BOX C-433/GRC terminals (2) to remote control jacks L1 and L2 (3).
2. Mark remote control SELECTOR switch as follows: Left switch position 1 and middle switch
position 2.
NOTE
For battery and accessory details, refer to TM 11-5038.
2-57
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-20.
REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. (CONT)
NONSECURE RADIO TTY SETUP FOR AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND C MODELS
2-58
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-20.
REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. (CONT)
NONSECURE REMOTE SETUP FOR AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, AND E MODELS
EL6VR079
2-59
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-20.
REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. (CONT)
SECURE REMOTE SETUP FOR AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND C MODELS
EL6VR080
SECURE REMOTE SETUP FOR AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND C MODELS
2-60
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-20.
REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. (CONT)
SECURE REMOTE RADIO TTY SETUP FOR AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, AND E MODELS
EL6VR081
SECURE REMOTE SETUP FOR AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D AND E MODELS
EL6VR081
2-61
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-20.
REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. (CONT)
REMOTE TELEPHONE SET TA-312/PT
Remote TA-312/PT requires one pair of field wires for connection to shelter. Connect remote TA312/PT as follows:
EK6VR082
Connect field wires (1) from DC ENTRANCE BOX or POWER SIGNAL ENTRANCE BOX TA-312/PT
terminals (2) to TA-312/PT terminals (3).
NOTE
If communication does not exist, reverse field wires.
REMOTE HANDSET H-33/PT
Connect remote handset as follows:
EL6VR083
Connect handset connector (1) to AUDIO receptacle (2) on remote box.
2-62
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-20.
REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. (CONT)
REMOTE KEY TELEGRAPH KY-116/U
Remote key telegraph requires one pair of field wires for connection to shelter.
In AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models, TA-312/PT is disconnected and key telegraph is connected
to DC ENTRANCE BOX TA-312/PT terminals. In later models SPARE terminals are used for connection
of key telegraph.
In AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, and E models, key telegraph is connected to POWER/SIGNAL
ENTRANCE BOX REM CW terminals. Connect remote key telegraph as follows:
EL6VR084
AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C Models
Remove field wires (1) from TA-312/PT terminals (2) and connect to key telegraph (3).
NOTE
In later models of AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C, key telegraph can be connected to
spare terminals for cw and TA-312/PT operation.
AN/GRC-122/142 A, B, D, and E Models
Connect field wires (4) to POWER SIGNAL ENTRANCE BOX REM CW terminals (5) and key telegraph.
2-63
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-20.
REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. (CONT)
REMOTE TTY TT-98/FG OR COMMUNICATIONS TERMINAL AN/UGC-74A(V)3
TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3 is connected into system at remote box. Either one is plugged into an
OWR-DX-SEND TTY jack of remote box. They can also be connected into duplex receive pony loop by
inserting tty plugs into remote box DX-RECEIVE TTY jacks.
TT-98/FG selector magnet wiring must be checked prior to installation and set to same loop current as
shelter (20 or 60 ma). Refer to paragraph 2-22 for loop current adjustments. Refer to TM 11-5815200-12 for all initial unpacking, switch positions, and adjustments of TT-98/FG.
AN/UGC-74A(V)3 REC MODE switch must be checked prior to installation and set to same loop
current as shelter (20 or 60 ma). See paragraph 2-22 for loop current adjustments. Refer to TM 115815-602-12 for all initial unpacking, switch positions, and adjustments of AN/UGC-74A(V)3.
NOTE
Part number SM-D-015889 is used with AN/UGC-74(V)3.
Connect TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3 as given below:
EL6VR085
For nonsecure operation, plug TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3 cord (1) into OWR-DX-SEND TTY
jack of remote box (2).
2-64
Change 1
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-20.
REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. (CONT)
REMOTE REPERFORATOR-TRANSMITTER TT-76(*)/GGC
Remote reperforator-transmitter TT-76(*)/GGC is connected into system at remote box. For owr and
pony circuit operation, TT-76(*)/GGC plugs are plugged into remote box DX-RECEIVE TTY jacks. For
duplex operation, TD (gray) plug and keyboard (black TR) plug are plugged into remote box OWRDX-SEND TTY jacks, and receive (red) plug into DX-RECEIVE TTY jack.
TT-76(*)/GGC selector magnet wiring must be checked prior to installation and set to same loop
current as shelter (20 or 60 ma). See paragraph 2-22 for loop current adjustments. Refer to TM 11Connect remote TT-76(*)/GGC as follows:
EL6VR086
OWR or Pony Circuit Operation
Connect three (red, gray, and black) plugs (1, 2 and 3) to remote box DX-RECEIVE TTY jacks.
Duplex Operation
1. Connect two (gray and black) plugs (2 and 3) to remote box OWR-DX-SEND TTY jacks.
2. Connect red (receive) plug (1) to remote box DX-RECEIVE TTY jack.
2-65
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-20. REMOTE EQUIPMENT lNSTALIATION. (CONT)
REMOTE SECURE TT-76(*)/GGC, TT-98/FG OR AN/UGC-74A(V)3
For remote secure operation, obtain the following additional components for TT-76(*)/GGC and TT98/FG connection to remote box. Connect secure remote tty’s as fallows:
Cable W6 Loop In (NSN 5995-00-955-1770)
Cable W7 Loop Out (NSN 5995-00-955-1767)
Resistor 27 Kllohm (NSN 5905-00-299-2020)
AC Power Cable (Ctypto) (NSN 5995-00-955-1766)
AC Power Cable [AN/UGC-74A(V) (NSN 5995-00-271-9444)]
Obtain a special cable assembly 5995-01-131-9661, part number SM-D-964513, to connect
AN/UGC-74A(V) to KW-7.
EL6VR087
1.
Connect field wires (1) from POWER SIGNAL ENTRANCE BOX E7 + and E8 - terminals (2) to KW-7
crypto set E1 and E5 terminals (3).
2. Connect a jumper (4) from KW-7 terminals E2 to E4.
3. Check for proper polarity by turning KW-7 BREAK FUNCTION ON and pressing KW-7 SEND switch.
if polarity is correct, KW-7 wilI stay in SEND. If polarity is reversed, BREAK light will light and audible
alarm will sound.
2-66
Change 4
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-20.
REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. (CONT)
REMOTE SECURE TT-76(*)/GGC, TT-98/FG OR AN/UGC-74A(V)3
NOTE
For KW-7 to tty cabling refer to illustration, TM 11-5815-200-12 and TM 11-5815-238-10
or -20.
Loop in circuit must include 27,000 ohm resistor to prevent garbling.
If selector magnets run open, loop out polarity is reversed.
Dummy plugs must be installed in unused loop-in and loop-out jacks of KW-7 if only one tty
is installed.
REMOTE AN/UGC-74A(V)3
Preliminary starting procedures for AN/UGC-74A(V)3 will be done by operator at a remote site.
WARNING
Be sure POWER switch on AN/UGC-74A(V)3 is set to OFF to prevent electrical shock to
personnel.
2-87
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-20.
REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. (CONT)
REMOTE AN/UGC-74A(V)3 (CONT)
EL6VR126
1.
Open rear access door (1) by pulling door handle (2) down into horizontal position and rotating
it one-quarter turn to right.
2.
Secure rear access door (1) in open (raised) position by unsnapping retaining strap (3) from
outer case cover and inserting rear panel door handle (2) into retaining strap slot.
3.
Secure AN/UGC-74A(V)3 to a table or shelf mounting.
4.
Connect an appropriate ground strap to chassis ground (4) and a good earth ground.
NOTE
To connect cables to connectors, press cable plug in and twist clockwise one-half turn.
5.
Connect appropriate signal line to J1 clock and data connector (5).
6.
Connect primary power cable to power source and J2 power connector (6).
7.
Connect an appropriate 12 vdc power source or backup battery to J3 backup connector (7).
8.
Install cardholder (8) (TM 11-581 5-602-12).
2-68
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-20. REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. (CONT)
REMOTE SECURE TT76(*)/GGC, TT-98/FG OR AN/UGC-74A(V)3 OWR OPERATION IN MODELS
WITH MK-2488/G (CONT)
For remote secure obtain, obtain the fallowing components for TT-76(*)/GGC and TT96/FG connection to remote box. For use with the TSEC/KG-84A, the TT-76(*)/GGC and TT098/FG
must be modified to operate at 50 or 75 baud (67 or 100 wpm). Connect secure remote tty's as follows:
Cable W6 LoopIn (NSN 5995-00-955-1770)
Cable W7 Loop Out (NSN 5995-00-955-1767)
Resistor 27 Kllohm (NSN 5905-00-299-2020)
AC Power Cable (Crypto) (NSN 5995-00-955-1766)
AC Power Cable [AN/UGC-74A(V) (NSN 5995-00-271-9444)]
Cable Assembly, Power, Electrical, CX-13315/G (NSN 5995-01-216-1989)
Cable Assembly, Special Purpose, Electrical, CX-13316/G (NSN 5995-01-216-1999)
Cable Assembly, Special Purpose, Electrical, CX-13317/G (NSN 5995-01-216-2000)
EL6VR087
1.
Connect field wires (1) from POWER SIGNAL ENTRANCE BOX E7 + and E8 - terminals (2) to
lnterconnecting Box, J4024/UL4 and L1 jacks (3).
2.
Connect a jumper (4) from J4024/U terminals L3 to L2.
NOTE
Banana plugs must be attached to the field wires for conection to L1
through L4. In addition a lenghth of wire to a banana plug will be
attached to GND. GND panel marking corresponds to schematic
designation L5.
Change 4
2-68.1
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-20. REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION ( C O N T )
REMOTE SECURE TT-76(*)/GGC, TT-98/FG OR AN/UGC-74A(V)3 OWR OPERATION IN
MODELS WITH MK-2488/G (CONT)
3.
Connect Cable W6 (5) from TT-76A/GGC to J5, TTY 1, Red Transmitter, on the J-4024/U.
4.
Connect Cable W7 (6) from TT-76A/GGC to J7, TTY 1, Red Receiver on the J-4024/U. If your are using a
TT-98/FG, do steps 5 and 6. If you are using an AN/UGC-74A(V)3, do steps 7 through 9.
5.
Connect Cable W6 (7) from the TT-98/FG to J6, TTY 2, Red Transmitter on the J-4024/U.
6.
Connect Cable W7 (8) form the TT-98/FG to J8, TTY 2, Red Receiver, on the J-4024/U.
7.
Connect the large, single-connector end of Cable Assembly CX-13253 to the AN/UGC-74A(V)3.
8.
Connect the send side of AN/UGC-74A(V)3 cable assembly to J6, TTY 2, Red Transmitter, on the J4024/U .
9.
Connect the receive side of AN/UGC-74A(V)3 cable assembly to J8, TTY 2, Red Receiver on the J-4024/U.
10.
Select Cable Assembly, Special Purpose, Electrical, CX-13317/G ( 10) and connect the J-4024/U end to J 1
on the J-4024/U rear panel.
11.
Select Cable Assembly, Power, Electrical, CX-13315/G(11) and connect the J-4024/U end to J4 on the J4024/U rear panel.
12.
Select Cable Assembly, Special Purpose, Electrical, CX-13316/G (12) and connect the J-4024/U end
to J2 on the J-4024/U rear panel.
13.
Connect the KG-84 end of the Cable Assembly, Special Purpose, Electrical, CX-13317/G (10) to J2,
BLACK I/O on the DLED.
14.
Connect the KG-84 end of the Cable Assembly, Power, Electrical, CX-13315/G (11 ) to J 1, POWER on the
DLED.
15.
Connect the KG-84 end of the Cable Assembly, Special Purpose, Electrical, CX-13315/G ( 12) to J3, RED
I/O, on the DLED.
16.
Connect the crypto end of the ac power cable to J3, AC POWER IN (1 O) ON THE J-4024/U rear panel.
17.
Connect the other end of the ac power cable to the ac power source.
For remote locations, follow steps 1 through 17 above, and install wiring as shown in the following
illustrations.
When in remote operation, the remote J4024/U interface is used in place of the shelter-mounted J-4024/U.
The remote J-4024/U applies its encrypted signals via field wire to the radio modem MD-522. In remote half
duplex, 2-wire loop is used. For Duplex, 4 wire loop is used.
2-68.2
Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-20. REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION (CONT)
SECURE REMOTE SETUP FOR AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND C MODELS WITH MK-2488/G
OWR OPERATION
EL6VR080
Change 2
2-68.3
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-20. REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION (CONT)
SECURE REMOTE RADIO TTY SETUP FOR AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, AND E MODELS WITH
MK-2488/G OWR OPERATION..
EL6VR081
2-68.4 Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-20. REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. (CONT)
REMOTE SECURE TT-76(*)/GGC, TT-98/FG OR AN/UGC-74A(V)3 DUPLEX OPERATION IN
MODELS WITH MK-2488/G
For remote secure operation, obtain the addditional components for TT-76(*) and TT-98/FG
connection to remote box. Connect secure remote tty's as follows:
Cable W6 Loop In (NSN 5995-00-955-1770)
Cable W7 Loop Out (NSN-5995-00-955-1767)
Resistor 27 Kllohm (NSN 5905-00-299-2020)
AC Power Cable (Crypto) (NSN 5995-00-955-1766)
Cable Assembly, Power, Electrical, CX-13315/G (NSN 5995-01-216-1989)
Cable Assembly, Special Purpose, Electrical, CX-13316/G (NSN 5995-01-216-1999)
Cable Assembly, Special Purpose, Electrical, CX-13317/G (NSN 5995-01-216-2000)
AC Power Cable [AN/UGC-74A(V) (NSN 5995-00-271-9444]
NOTES
EL6VR087
1. Connect to ground rod witth field wire.
2. Field wires to distant radio teletype shelter.
Change 4
2-68.5
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-20.1. REMOTE EQUIPMENT OPERATION (CONT)
REMOTE SECURE TT-76 (*)/GGC, TT-98/FG OR AN/UGC-74(V)3 DUPLEX OPERATION IN
MODELS WITH MK-2488/G
Follow the Steps 3 through 15 at the remote sites as illustrated by the following two pages. Field wires from
distant shelters will connect to J4024/U box as shown.
1.
Connect field wires (1) from POWER SIGNAL ENTRANCE BOX E7 + and E8 - terminals (2) to
Interconnecting Box, J-4024/U L1 and L2 jacks (3). (Note: Banana plugs must be connected to the field
wires for connection to the J-4024/U).
2.
Connect field wires (1) from POWER SIGNAL ENTRANCE BOX E5 + and E6 - terminals (2) to
Interconnecting Box L3 and L4 jacks. (Note: Banana plugs must be connected to the field wires for
connection to the J-4024/U).
3.
Connect Cable W6 (5) from TT-76A/GGC to J5, TTY 1, Red Transmitter, on the J-4024/U.
4.
Connect Cable W7 (6) from TT-76A/GGC to J7, TTY 1, Red Receiver, on the J-4024/U. If you are using a
TT-98/FG, do steps 5 and 6. If you are using an AN/UGC-74A(V)3, steps 7 through 9.
5.
Connect Cable W6 (7) from the TT-98/FG to J6, TTY 2, Red Transmitter, on the J-4024/U.
6.
Connect Cable W7 (8) from the TT-98/FG to J8, TTY 2, Red Receiver, on the J-4024/U.
7.
Connect the large, single-connector end of Cable Assembly, CX-13253 to the AN/UGC-74A(V)3.
8.
Connect the send side of Cable Assembly CX-13253 to J6, TTY 2, Red Transmitter, on the J-4024/U.
9.
Connect the receiver side of Cable Assembly CX- 13253 to J8, TTY 2, Red Receiver on the J-4024/U.
10.
Select Cable Assembly, Special Purpose, Electrical, CX-13317/G (10) and connect the J-4024/U end to J1
on the J-4024/U rear panel.
11.
Select Cable Assembly, Power, Electrical, CX-13315/G (11 ) and connect the J-4024 end to J4 on the J4024/U rear panel.
12.
Select Cable Assembly, Special Purpose, Electrical, CX-13316/G (12) and connect the J-4024/U end to J2
on the J-4024/U rear panel.
13.
Connect the KG-84 end of the Cable Assembly, Special Purpose, Electrical, CX-13317/G (10) to J2, BLACK
I/O, on the DLED.
14.
Connect the KG-84 end of the Cable Assembly, Power, Electrical, CX-13315/G (11) to J1, POWER, on the
DLED.
15.
Connect the KG-84 end of the Cable Assembly, Special Purpose, Electrical, CX-13316/G (12) to J3, RED
I/O, on the DLED.
2-68.6
Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-20.1. REMOTE EQUIPMENT OPERATION (CONT)
SECURE REMOTE SETUP FOR AN/GRC-122 PLAIN AND C MODELS WITH MK-2488/G DUPLEX
OPERATION
EL6VF080
Change 2
2-68.7
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-20.1. REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION (CONT)
SECURE REMOTE TTY SETUP FOR AN/GRC-122A, B, D AND E MODELS WITH MK-2488/G
DUPLEX OPERATION
TM 11-5815-334-10
ELGVR080
2-68.8 CHANGE 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-21.
SECURITY EQUIPMENT TSEC/KW-7 INSTALLATION IN MODELS WITHOUT MK-2488/G.
To install security equipment, one or both dummy boxes J-2728/GRC-142 must be removed. In
AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models, Iower dummy box is in OWR-DX-SEND TTY loop and upper
dummy box is in DX-RECEIVE loop. In AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, and E models, upper curbside dummy
box is in OWR-DX-SEND loop and lower roadside dummy box is in DX-RECEIVE pony loop. One or
both dummy boxes are removed to install security equipment, depending on mode of operation.
Follow procedures given below for installation of security equipment, TSEC/KW-7.
1. Disconnect banana plugs E1, E2, and E3 and connectors J1 and J2 from dummy box.
2. Unclamp 28 vdc connector W28P1 or W30P1 from side clamp of dummy box.
3. Loosen captive screws on both sides of dummy box and remove dummy box.
4. Connect a jumper wire on security equipment between E2 and E4.
5. Connect white banana plug to E1, black banana plug to E3, and blue banana plug to E5.
6. Connect shorting plugs to security equipment LOOP IN 2 (J4) and LOOP OUT 2 (J8)
receptacles.
7. Connect plug removed from LOOP IN receptacle of dummy box to LOOP IN 1 (J3) receptacle.
8. Connect plug removed from LOOP OUT receptacle of dummy box to LOOP OUT 1 (J7)
receptacles.
9. Connect free end of W28 (owr) or W30 (dx) cable to 24 VDC (J2) input.
10. For ac operation, use ac power cable supplied and connect to security equipment receptacle
J1.
NOTE
All models do not have cables prewired to shelter; use cables supplied.
Upper and lower security shelves used when T/SEC-KW7 security equipment is installed. Two T/SEC- KW7’s are needed for Duplex operation.
Change 2 2-69
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-21. SECURITY EQUIPMENT TSEC/KG-84 INSTALLATION (CONT)
MOUNTING BASE MT-6442/G
The mounting base for security equipment, MK-2488. Mounting Base MT-6442/G(1) will hold one
Interconnecting Box J-4024/U (2) and one DLED, TSEC/KG-84A (3). Connections for various modes of
operation are described in the following pages.
Application of modification of Appendix E in TM 11-5815-616-13 installs the mounting base in selected
models to provide updated secure communication with DLED, TSEC/KG-84A and J-4024/U hookup. Do not
attempt to use a DLED, TSEC/KG-84A unless the modification has been implemented.
CAUTION
MAKE SURE THAT THE MD-522(*)/GRC is turned off before disconnecting wires or cables
from a dummy box or associated equipment.
2-70 Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-21. SECURITY EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION (CONT)
INITIAL SET UP J-4024/U
1.
Operate the POWER SOURCE switch (4) on the rear panel to match the primary shelter power to which
the J-4024/U is connected (In AN/GRC-122/142 plain and C (with MK-2488/G) set to 28 VDC. In AN/GRC122/142 A, B, D, & E (with MK-2488/G) set to either 28 VDC or 115 VAC).
2.
Operate the POWER switch (1) on the front panel to OFF.
3.
Operate the HOME COPY switch (3) on the front panel to position 1.
4.
Operate the TRANSMITTER switch (2) on the front panel to position 1.
5.
Remove the protective covers from all the connectors (5) on the rear of the J-4024/U, except from the
connectors which will not be used.
Change
2-70.1
TM 11-5815-334-10
21. SECURITY EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION (CONT)
INSTALLATION OF J-4024AJ IN OWR POSITION
1.
Rest the J-4024/U atop the mounting base (1) so as to provide access to the rear panel.
2.
Disconnect Cable W1 from the switch box, (SA-1555/GRC in Plain and C models; SA-1650/GRC in A, B, D
& E models) and connect it to J5 (3) on the rear of the J-4024/U.
3.
Disconnect Cable W6 from the switch box and connect it to J7 (2) on the J-4024/U.
4.
Disconnect Cable W2 from the switch box and connect it to J6 (4) on the J-4024/U.
5.
Disconnect Cable W5 from the switch box and connect it to J8 (5) on the J-4024/U.
6.
In AN/GRC-142(*)122 (with MK-2488/G) for OWR operation, connect a jumper cable between banana
connectors L2 (7) and L3 (9) on the J-4024/U.
7.
Disconnect the three color-coded banana plugs (W12) from the dummy box J-2728/GRC/142 and
connect them as follows on the J-4024/U:
a. Black banana plug to GND(10).
b. Blue banana plug to L4 (8).
c. White banana plug to L1 (6).
2-70.2 Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
SECURITY EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION (CONT)
INSTALLATION OF J-4024/U IN OWR POSITION
8.
Select Cable Assembly, Special Purpose, Electrical, CX-13317/G (3) and connect J-4024/U end to J1 (4) on
the J-4024/U rear panel.
9.
Select Cable Assembly, Power, Electrical, CX-13315/G (1) and connect the J-4024/U end to J-4 (5) on the
J-4024/U rear panel.
10.
Select Cable Assembly, Special Purpose, Electrical, CX-13316/G (2) and connect the J-4024/U end to J2 (6)
on the J-4024/U rear panel.
11.
Disconnect the W28 power (DC) cable from clip on the J-2728/GRC-142 Dummy Box and connect it to
J11, DC POWER IN (7) on the J-4024/U rear panel. In the AN/GRC-122/142 A, B, D and E models with MK2488/G only, disconnect the W68 power (AC) cable from its clip on the rack and connect it to J3, AC
POWER IN (8) on the J-4024/U rear panel in addition to the J11 connections.
Change 2 2-70.3
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-21. SECURITY EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION (CONT)
INSTALLATION OF J-4024/U IN OWR POSITION
12. Carefully and slowly slide the J-4024/U onto the mounting base (1) to engage the left rear retaining
pins (2) into the rear panel retainer guide holes (3) on the J-4024/U.
CAUTION
While sliding the J-4024/U onto the mounting base, make sure that the cables do not get
caught on parts of the shelves. Make sure the free ends of the cable assemblies from the J4024/U rear panel are visible and accessible to the right side of the J-4024/U.
13. Gently push the J-4024/U back against the retainer pins.
2-70.4 Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-21. SECURITY EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION (CONT)
INSTALLATION OF J-4024/U IN OWR POSITION
14. While holding the J-4024/U back against the retainer pins, place each front retainer assembly lock nuts
(1) over its front hook (2) on the J-4024/U.
15. Tighten the wing nuts on the front retainers until the J-4024/U is secured tightly on the mouting base.
Release the hand pressure on the J-4024/U.
Change 2 2-70.5
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-21. SECURITY EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION (CONT)
INSTALLATION OF J-4024/U IN DUPLEX POSITION
1. Rest the J-4024/U atop the mounting base (1) so as to provide access to the rear panel.
2. Disconnect Cable W3 from the switch box (SA-1555/GRC in Plain and C modes; SA-1650/GRC in A, B, D,
and E models) and connect it to J5 (2) on the J-4024/U.
3. Disconnect Cable W4 from the switch box and connect it to J7 (3) on the J-4024/U.
4. Disconnect the three color-coded banana plugs (W11) from one dummy box and three plugs from other
dummy box (W12) and connect as follows:
a. Black banana plug to GND (6).
d. Blue banana plug to L2(7) from W12
b. Blue banana plug to L4 (5) (From W11)
e. White banana plug to L1(8) From W12)
c. White banana plug to L3 (4). (From W11)
5. Continue installation of J-4024/U following procedure given in OWR installation, steps 8 through 15.
2-70.6 Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-21. SECURE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION (CONT)
INSTALLATION OF DLED, TSEC/KG-84 IN OWR AND DUPLEX POSITIONS
1.
Remove the protective covers from the connectors on the rear paneI.
2.
Place the POWER switch on the front panel to OFF.
NOTE
The TSEC/KG-84A model must be strapped Internally and have its controls set to emulate the
KG-84 (plain model). The information is illustrated on page 2-6.10. Additional Information on
this is found in TM 11-5810-309-23 and TM 11-5815-616-13 These steps must be done by
qualified authorized personnel.
3.
After proper preparation of the DLED, slide the DLED onto the mounting base next to the J-4024/U
until the free ends of the cables from the J-4024/U reach the connectors on the rear of the DLED.
4.
Connect the KG-84 end of the Cable Assembly, Special Purpose, Electrical, CX-13317/G to J2, BLACK I/0,
on the DLED.
5.
Connect the KG-84 end of the Cable Assembly, Power, Electrical, CX-13315/G to J1, POWER, on the
DLED.
6.
Connect the KG-84 end of the Cable Assembly, Special Purpose, Electrical, CX-13316/G to J3, RED I/0, on
the DLED.
7.
Select an 18-inch length of stranded wire to use as a ground wire. Connect one end of the ground wire
to the ground screw terminal on the rear of the DLED Connect the other end to a convenient chassis
grounding screw.
8.
Carefully and slowly slide the DLED onto the mounting base to engage the right rear retainer pins into
their rear panel guide holes on the DLED
CAUTION
While sliding the DLED onto the mounting base, make sure that the cables do not get
caught on parts of the shelves or racks.
9.
Gently push and hold the DLED back against the retalner pins.
10.
While holding the DLED back against the rear retainer pins, place each front retainer nut lock over its
front hooks on the DLED.
11.
Tighten the wing nuts on the front retainers until the DLED is secured tightly on the mounting base.
Release the hand pressure from the DLED.
Change 2 2-70.7
TM 11-5815-334-10
KG-84/G
KG-84A/G
NOTE: REMOVE TYPE 1 MODEM CARD FROM UNIT PRIOR TO USE WITH THE MK-2488/G.
2-70.8
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-22. LOOP CURRENT TEST
MODELS WITHOUT MK-2488/G
Loop current must be checked after installation of all local and remote equipment to ensure proper tty
operation. Loop current should also be checked when additional tty’s are added to loop. The procedure
given is for OWR-DX-SEND tty loop or DX-RECEiVE pony loop. DX-RECEIVE is used only during
duplex or pony circuit operation. Loop current can be set at 20 or 60 ma.
PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES;
Dc power connected to shelter (para 2-10).
All remote equipment (if used) installed (para 2-20).
All duplex equipment (AN/GRC-122(*) only) installed.
Security equipment not installed.
Perform preoperational procedures for AN/GRC-122/142(*) models (para 2-25).
All power switches set to OFF.
TT-76(*)/GGC
1.
2.
Raise TT-76(*)/GGC cover.
Remove modification (resistor) and replace spacing bar, and perform switch settings as given in
TM 11-5815-263-10 or -20.
3. Check that SIGNAL/BIAS switch is set at 20 or 60 ma and SELECTOR MAGNET cable is plugged
into 20 or 60 ma connector.
4.
Lower dust cover.
TT-98/FG
1. Remove TT-98/FG and duplex TT-98/FG dust covers.
2. Set LINE SELECTOR switches to 20 or 60 ma.
3. Rotate LINE CURRENT INCREASE controls to midrange.
4. Close cover.
AN/UGC-74A(V)3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Unclamp cover and slide out AN/UGC-74A(V)3.
Check that RCV MODE and XMIT MODE switches are set.
Perform interface assembly switch settings as given in TM 11-5815-602-10 or -20.
Ensure that J1 DATA and J2 PWR cables are properly installed on rear of AN/UGC-74A(V)3.
Replace dust covers.
MODEM MD-522(*)/GRC
1.
As applicable, set METER FUNCTION switch to DC LOOP NO. 1 (when using OWR-DIX-SEND TTY
loop) or DC LOOP NO. 2 (when using DX-RCV-PONY loop, AN/GRC-122(*) models only).
NOTE
Step 2 applies to AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models only.
2. Set control panel LOOP ADJ OWR-DX-SEND control and LOOP ADJ DX-RCV-PONY control at
midrange.
3. Perform preoperational procedures (para 2-25).
4. Observe current indication on modem test meter for 20 or 60 ma. If 20 or 60 ma does not register,
a loop current adjustment is necessary. Refer to a higher level of maintenance.
Change 4
2-71
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-22. LOOP CURRENT TEST (CONT)
MODELS
WITH
MK-2488/G
Loop current must be checked after installation of all local and remote equipment to en sure proper TTY
operation. The procedure given is for OWR-DX-SEND TTY loop or DX-RECEIVE pony loop. DX-RECEIVE
pony loop is used only during duplex or pony circuit operation. In the AN/GRC-122/142(*) (with MK-2488/G)
the loop current must be 20 ma.
PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES:
Dc power connected to shelter (para 2-10).
All remote equipment (if used) installed (para 2-20).
All duplex equipment (AN/GRC-122(*) only) installed.
Security equipment not installed.
Perform preoperational procedures for AN/GRC-122/142(*) models (para 2-25).
AH power switches set to OFF.
TT-76(*)/GGC
1. Raise TT-76(*)/GGC cover.
2. Remove modification (resistor) and replace spacing bar, and perform switch settings as given in TM 115815-283-10 or -20.
3. Check that SIGNAL/BIAS switch is set at 20 and SELECTOR MAGNET cable is plugged into 20 ma
connector.
4. Lower dust cover.
NOTE
In the AN/GRC-122/142(*) (with MK-2488/G) the TT-76(*)/GGC must conform to the following
setup:
(a)
(b)
(c)
Gearing set for 50 or 75 baud (67 or 100 wpm)
With TT-523 installed set SIGNAL BIAS switch to 60 ma
SELECTOR MAGNETIC cable plugged into 20 ma connector.
TT-98/FG
1. Remove TT-98/FG and duplex TT-98/FG dust covers.
2. Set LINE SELECTOR switches to 20 ma.
3. Rotate LINE CURRENT INCREASE controls to midrange.
4. Close cover.
AN/UGC-74A(V)3
1. Unclamp cover and slide out AN/UGC-74A(V)3.
2. Check that 20/60 ma switch is set to 20 ma.
2-72
Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-22. LOOP CURRENT TEST (CONT)
MODELS WITH MK-2488/G
3. Set switch box DC POWER setting to OFF.
4. Disconnect shorting bar between terminals 2 and 3.
5. Replace dust covers.
MODEM MD-522(*)/GRC
1. As applicable set METER FUNCTION switch to DC LOOP NO. 1 (when using OWR-DX-SEND TTY loop) or
DC LOOP NO.2 (when using DX-RCV-PONY loop, AN/GRC-122(*) models only with MK-2488/G).
NOTE
Step 2 applies to AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models only with MK-2488/G.
2. Set control panel LOOP ADJ OWR-DX-SEND control and LOOP ADJ DX-RCV-PONY control at midrange.
3. Perform preoperational procedures (para 2-25)
4. Observe current indication on modem test meter for 20 ma. If 20 ma does not register, a loop current
adjustment is necessary. Refer to a higher level of maintenance.
2-23. SHELTER DOOR COMBINATION LOCK.
CHANGING SHELTER DOOR COMBINATION LOCK
Select a new combination using three numbers. Do not use numbers between 0 and 20 for last number of
combination. For maximum security, do not use numbers ending in 5 or 0. Do not use numbers in rising or
falling sequence such as 35-50-75 which is not as secure as 54-38-72.
NOTE
Lock leaves factory with all numbers of combination set at 50. If shelter already has an assigned
combination, see page 2-73 for opening combination lock. When setting combination for first
time, rotate dial clockwise four full turns and stops when 50 is alined with changing index mark.
Change 2 2-72.1
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-23.
SHELTER DOOR COMBINATION LOCK. (CONT)
EL6VR088
When shelter has an assigned combination, dial combination and stop at last digit.
1.
Hold dial (1) with last number of combination at changing index mark (2).
2.
Insert changing key (3) into rear of lock (4).
3.
Turn changing key (3) one-quarter turn clockwise and hold while doing steps 4 through 8.
4.
Turn dial (1) clockwise four full turns and stop when first number of new combination is alined
with changing index mark (2).
5.
Turn dial (1) counterclockwise three full turns and stop when second number of new combination is alined with changing index mark (2).
6.
Turn dial (1) clockwise two full turns and stop when third number of new combination is
alined with changing index mark (2).
7.
Hold dial (1) with last number of new combination at changing index mark (2).
8.
Turn changing key (3) counterclockwise one-quarter turn to operation position.
NOTE
Lock is now set for new combination.
If dialing new combination does not open lock, refer to a higher level of maintenance. Try new
combination several times to ensure proper operation before closing shelter door.
2-72.2
Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-23.
SHELTER DOOR COMBINATION LOCK. (CONT)
OPERATING SHELTER DOOR COMBINATION LOCK
Combination lock provides a means of locking shelter.
NOTE
If a selected number is turned beyond opening index mark, entire combination must be
radiated. Turning dial back to regain combination will not work.
COMBINATION LOCK DIAL
EL6VR089
T O Lock
Rotate dial (1) clockwise at least four full turns.
To Unlock Factory Setting
Lock is set at 50 when delivered from factory.
1. To unlock, turn dial (1) clockwise four full turns and stop when 50 is alined with opening index
mark (2).
2. Turn dial (1) slowly counterclockwise until it stops.
To Unlock
1. Turn dial (1) clockwise four full turns and stop when first number is alined with opening
index (2).
2. Turn dial (1) counterclockwise three full turns and stop when second number is alined with
opening index (2).
3. Turn dial (1) clockwise two full turns and stop when third number is alined with opening
index (2).
4. Turn dial (1) slowly counterclockwise until it stops.
2-73
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-24.
PREOPERATIONAL PROCEDURES.
After a complete shutdown or when starting equipment for operation, perform preoperational
procedures that apply to your shelter configuration.
AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS AND GASOLINE CAN
1. Open air inlet cover (1).
2. Check that air inlet filters are clean.
3. Open blower outlet cover (2).
WARNING
Do not smoke or use open flame when checking or filling gasoline can. When pouring
gasoline, always provide a metal to metal contact between fuel container and gasoline
can to prevent injury to personnel.
NOTE
Heater inlet or exhaust covers are located on rear or roadside wall of shelter depending
on model.
4. If heater is being used, open and secure heater inlet and exhaust covers.
5. Check fuel level in gasoline can (3).
WHIP OR DOUBLET ANTENNAS AND GROUND RODS
1.
Check that whip antennas are in operating position, properly connected, and free of obstruction
(para 2-11).
2.
When doublet antenna is used, check that it is properly constructed and positioned correctly
(para 2-13).
3.
Check installation of ground rods and connection of ground strap (para 2-9).
2-74
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-24.
PREOPERATIONAL PROCEDURES. (CONT)
TRUCK EXHAUST PIPE HOSE
Truck exhaust pipe hose is a flexible steel hose. It is used when shelter is truck mounted to redirect
exhaust gases away from shelter. Slide exhaust pipe hose onto truck exhaust pipe about 12 inches and
direct truck exhaust gases away from shelter.
WARNING
After continued truck operation, exhaust pipe hose can become very hot. Allow cooling
prior to handling to avoid getting burned.
HEATER EXHAUST HOSE
Heater exhaust hose is used when shelter is at halt and heat is required. Heater exhaust opening is
located either on roadside or rear wall of shelter.
EL6VR091
NOTE
On some models, exhaust cover is unscrewed.
1. Turn four fasteners (1) one-half turn, and remove cover (2).
2. Place flange end of heater exhaust hose (3) against heater exhaust opening.
3. Turn each of four flange fasteners (1) to secure heater hose to exhaust opening.
4. Direct exhaust gases away from shelter by positioning of exhaust hose.
2-75
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-24.
PREOPERATIONAL PROCEDURES. (CONT)
POWER SOURCES
See paragraph 2-10 to connect power to shelter if power has been removed. Set all circuit breakers
and equipment power switches to OFF as given in preliminary starting procedures below.
DC Operation
When using a vehicle power source, set distribution box AC POWER-DC POWER switch (AN/GRC122/142 Plain and C models only) to DC POWER. Set power distribution panel AC-DC switch to DC
(AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, and E models only). Set DC MAIN circuit breaker to ON. Set vehicle
throttle for 28-volt output from vehicle generator, by observing power distribution panel voltmeter.
When using an external dc power source, power source must have a 100 amp, 28 vdc capability with
less than one percent ripple and better than two percent regulation.
AC Operation
Operation of all ac components requires an external power source of 60 amp, 115 volts, 60 Hz.
Remote tty operation requires a power source of 115 volts, 60 Hz.
FUEL HEATER
WARNING
Do not operate shelter exhaust fan when all-fuel heater is operating. This will prevent
deadly fumes from being drawn into shelter.
In shelters where AM-3349/GRC-106 vents air to outside of shelter, open rear door vent
covers enough to prevent deadly fumes from being drawn into shelter.
If heat is required, maintenance personnel should check shelter all-fuel heater needle
valve adjustment. Refer to TM 5-4520-211-14 Hupp or TM 5-4520-236-14 Hunter
before operating heater.
2-76
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-24.
PREOPERATIONAL PROCEDURES. (CONT)
TELETYPEWRITER SLIDES
Tty’s are slide mounted in AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models only. They can be stored out of the
way when not in use.
EL6VR092
TT-76(*)/GGC
1. Remove two guide pins (1).
2. Slide tty (2) out into position.
3. Reinsert two guide pins (1).
TT-98/FG
1. Loosen two guide clamps (3).
2. Slide tty (4) out into position.
3. Retighten two guide clamps (3).
Duplex TT-98/FG (AN/GRC-122(*) models only).
Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 for duplex TT-98/FG (located on curbside wall) as given for TT-76(*)/GGC.
2-77
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-24.
PREOPERATIONAL PROCEDURES. (CONT)
TT-76(*)/GGC
Check that TT-76(*)/GGC motor speed is correct (refer to TM 11-5815-238-12).
TT-98/FG
Check that TT-98/FG motor speed is correct (refer to TM 11-5815-200-12).
COMMUNICATIONS TERMINAL AN/UGC-74A(U)3
Refer. to TM 5815-602-10 for preoperational procedures.
2-25.
PRELIMINARY STARTING PROCEDURES.
Before operation of AN/GRC-122/142(*) models, equipment must be preset. All preset switch
positions given are set before any mode of operation and radio tuning.
NOTE
To conserve vehicle battery power, use ac only mode even though shelter is connected
to a vehicle. Remove dc power from shelter by switching off power at power distribution
panel and disconnecting power cable. When operating in ac mode, if voltmeter reads
more than 115 vac ± 10 percent, check for proper connections to ac power source.
In dc mode of operation and under certain operating conditions, MAIN circuit breaker
may kick out when all shelter components are energized. Turn off all components if this
happens. To avoid this condition, power should be applied to components in the order
given.
1. DC MAIN circuit breaker set to ON.
2. LIGHTS switch or switches set to ON.
3. OWR INVERTER set to ON.
4. DX INVERTER (duplex operation) set to ON.
There are 24 different configurations used in AN/GRC-122/142(*) models. Use preset instructions
for only those components that apply to shelter configuration being used.
2-78
Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-25. PRELIMINARY STARTING PROCEDURES (CONT)
Perform procedures listed below prior to preoperational equipment settings given in paragraph 2-26.
1.
Ac entrance box circuit breakers set to OFF (AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models).
2.
Air conditioner switch SW2 set to OFF (if applicable).
3.
Seat TA-312/PT handset properly.
4.
Security equipment POWER switch set to OFF.
5.
Power distribution panel: All switches set to OFF.
6.
Modem PRIMARY POWER switch set to OFF.
7.
AN/UGC-74A(V)3 POWER switch set to OFF.
8.
Power supply ON/OFF switch set to OFF.
9.
TT-76(*)/GGC POWER switch to OFF.
10. TT-98/FG POWER switch set to OFF.
11. RT-662/GRC SERVICE SELECTOR switch set to OFF. (Frequency windows show all zeros.)
12. Amplifier PRIM PWR switch set to OFF.
13. Fuel heater ON/OFF switch set to OFF.
14. Electric heater ON/OFF switch set to OFF.
15. Duplex AN/UGC-74A(V)3 POWER switch set to OFF.
16. Duplex TT-098/FG POWER switch set to OFF.
17. Duplex RT-662/GRC SERVICE SELECTOR switch set to OFF.
In AN/GRC-122/142(*) models with MK-2488/G, perform the additional procedures listed below prior to
preoperational equipment settings given in paragraph 2-26.
1. J-4024/U Interconnecting Box.
(a) J-4024/U POWER switch to OFF.
(b) J-4024/U POWER SELECTOR switch to 28 VDC in AN/GRC-122/142 plain and C models with Mk-2488/G.
POWER SELECTOR switch to match shelter primary in AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D and E models with MK2488/G.
(c) J-4024/U TRANSMIT switch to “ 1“.
(d) J-4024/U HOME COPY switch to OFF.
2. DLED, TSEC/KG-84A.
(a) POWER switch to OFF
(b) Baud rate to match TTY.
(c) AN/GRC-142(*) with MK-2488/G will have KG-84A strapped and setup for Half Duplex operation.
AN/GRC-122(*) with MK-2488/G can use either OWR or DUPLEX, KG-84A will be setup accordingly.
Change 2
2-79
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-26. PREOPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT SETTNGS.
The preoperational equipment settings are divided into four groups: AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C; AN/GRC122/142A and B, AN/GRC-122/142D and E; and equipment settings common to all models. Modifications and
additional procedures needed prior to operating models with MK-2488/G are noted in the appropriate
group. One of the first three groups contains equipment settings that must be made on your configuration.
The fourth group is settings that are made for all models. First perform equipment settings for your
particular configuration and then equipment settings common to all models.
AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND C MODELS
EL6VR094
When operating in ac mode only, set both circuit breakers (1) to ON and observe reading on ac voltmeter for
115 volt ± 10 percent.
Distribution Box AC Power-DC Power.
EL6VR093
1. Set distribution box to DC POWER for dc operation and AC POWER for ac operation.
2. Set dc power supply to ON as shown on page 2-86.
2-80 Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-26.
PREOPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT SETTINGS. (CONT)
Power Supply PP-4763(*)/GRC
Power supply is used in ac operation only to supply dc power.
EL6VR100
Set power supply ON-OFF switch (1) to ON.
2-81
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-26.
PREOPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT SETTINGS. (CONT
AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND C MODELS
Power Distribution Panel SB-3018/GRC-142
EL6VR095
1.
2.
Set MAIN circuit breaker (1) to ON.
Set LIGHTS switch (2) to ON.
NOTE
For lights to work with shelter door open, blackout switch must be pulled out.
3.
Observe DC VOLTS meter (3) for a 28-volt indication.
NOTE
Adjustment of vehicle throttle may be required to maintain 28 vdc for all modes of
operation.
On power supply voltmeter, a low 28-volt indication in ac only mode indicates a low ac
input to shelter. Check ac power meter on curbside wall for 115 vac indication.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Set BLOWER switch (4) to ON, as required to cool shelter.
Set LOCK-OUT switch (5) to ON.
Set 28 V RECP switch (6) to ON.
Set INVERTERS OWR switch (7) to OFF.
Set INVERTERS DX switch (8) to OFF.
AC Operation
1. Set MAIN circuit breaker (1) to OFF.
2. Set LIGHTS switch (2) to ON.
NOTE
For lights to work with shelter door open, blackout switch must be pulled out.
3. Set BLOWER switch (4) to ON, as required, to cool shelter.
4. Set LOCK-OUT switch (5) to ON.
2-82
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-26.
PREOPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT SETTINGS. (CONT)
Control Panel SA-1554/GRC-142
EL6VR098
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn LOOP ADJ OWR-DX-SEND control (1) to midrange.
Turn LOOP ADJ DX-RCV-PONY control (2) to midrange.
Set LOCAL-REMOTE switch (3) to LOCAL.
Set LOCK-OUT-OVERRIDE switch (4) to LOCK-OUT.
Set AUDIO TEL REMOTE-CW switch (5) to TEL (used on early models only).
Switch Box SA-1555/GRC-142 (not operational in models used with the MK-2488/G).
EL6VR036
1. Set TT-98 DX-RECEIVE-PONY BLACK-RED switch (1) to BLACK.
2. Set TT-98 OWR-DX-SEND BLACK-RED switch (2) to BLACK.
3. Set TT-76 TAPE PUNCH OWR-DX-SEND/DX-RECEIVE switch (3) to OWR-DX-SEND.
Change 2
2-83
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-26. PREOPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT SETTINGS. (CONT)
AN/GRC-122/142A AND B MODELS
Power Distribution Panel SB-3358/GRC-142
EL6VR096
DC Operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Set DC MAIN circuit breaker (1) to ON.
Set POWER switch (2) to DC position.
Observe VOLTS meter (3) for a 28-volt Indication.
Set INVERTERS OWR and DX (AN/GRC-122(*) models only) circuit breaker (4) to ON,
Set BLO & LIGHTS circuit breaker (5) to ON.
NOTE
For lights to work with shelter door open, blackout switch must be
pulled out.
Adjustment of vehicle throttle may be required to maintain 28 vdc for all
modes of operation.
6. Set BLO ON-OFF switch (6) as required to cod shelter.
7. Set RECP & HTR circuit breaker (7) to ON (energizes 26-volt and heater receptacle).
AC Operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Set DC MAIN circuit breaker (1) to OFF.
Set POWER switch (2) to AC.
Set AC MAIN circuit breaker (8) to ON.
Observe VOLTS meter (3) for 115 vac ± percent.
Set PWR SUP circuit breaker (9) to ON.
NOTE
For lights to work with shelter door open, blackout switch must be pulled out.
6. Set dc power supply PP-4763(*)/GRC to ON (page 2-86).
7. Set BLO & LIGHTS circuit breaker (5) to ON.
8. Set BLO ON-OFF switch (6) as required to cool shelter.
2-84
Change 4
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-26.
PREOPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT SETTINGS. (CONT)
AN/GRC-122/142D AND E MODELS
Power Distribution Panel SC-F-960672
EL6VR097
DC Operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Set AC-OFF-DC switch (1) to DC position.
Set DC MAIN circuit breaker (2) to ON.
Set LTS SHLTR BLWR circuit breaker (3) to ON.
Observe DC VOLTS meter (4) for 28-volt indication.
Set RADIO TTY EQUIP BLWR circuit breaker (5) to ON and observe DC VOLTS meter for 28-volt
indication.
6. Set GAS HTR circuit breaker (6) to ON as required.
NOTE
Adjustment of vehicle throttle may be required to maintain 28 vdc for all modes of
operation.
AC Operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Set AC-OFF-DC switch (1) to AC position.
Set AC MAIN circuit breaker (7) to ON and observe AC VOLTS meter for 115 volt ± 10 percent
indication.
Set LTS & CONV SHLTR BLWR circuit breaker (8) to ON.
Observe AC VOLTS meter (9) for 115 volt ± 10 percent indication.
Set TTY & CONV SHLTR BLWR circuit breaker to ON.
Set ELECT HTR circuit breaker (11) to ON if required.
Set PWR SPLY DC circuit breaker to ON.
NOTE
If the voltage specified in step 4 above drops below normal operating voltage, (115
volts ac) and fails to return to the original voltage level, have your maintenance person
check the condition of the last item which was turned on at the power distribution
panel.
Change 2 2-85
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-26.
PREOPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT SETTINGS. (CONT)
AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, AND E MODELS
Switch Assembly SA-1650/GRC
EL6VR099
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Set LOCKOUT-OVER RIDE switch (1) to LOCKOUT.
Set LOCAL-REMOTE switch (2) to LOCAL.
Set TT-98 DX-RECEIVE PONY BLACK-RED switch (3) to BLACK. (not used in models with MK-2488/G).
Set TT-98 OWR-DX-SEND BLACK-RED switch (4) to BLACK. (not used in models with MK-2488/G).
Set TT-76/TAPE PUNCH/OWR-DX-SEND/DX-RECEIVE switch (5) to OWR-DX-SEND.
(not used in models with MK-2488/G).
Power Supply PP-4763(*)/GRC
Power supply is used only in ac operation to supply dc power.
EL6VR100
Set power supply ON-OFF switch (1) to ON and observe voltmeter for 28 vdc.
2-86 Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-26.
PREOPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT SETTINGS. (CONT)
EQUIPMENT SETTINGS COMMON TO ALL MODELS
Radio Receiver-Transmitter RT-662/GRC and Duplex RT-662/GRC
RT-662/GRC can be replaced with RT-834/GRC. All control settings are the same for RT-662/GRC,
duplex RT-662/GRC (used in AN/GRC-122(*) models) and RT-834/GRC.
EL6VR101
1.
Set SERVICE SELECTOR switch (1) to OVEN ON.
NOTE
Allow 10 minutes for RT-662/GRC to warm up.
2.
3.
Set VOX switch (2) to PUSH TO TALK.
Turn SQUELCH control (3) to OFF.
NOTE
If operating in a mode other than CW or FSK, SQUELCH control can be adjusted to
operator’s preference.
4.
Set NOISE BLANKER switch (4) to OFF.
NOTE
Some models of RT-662/GRC do not contain NOISE BLANKER switch.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Turn BFO control (5) to midrange.
Turn MANUAL RF GAIN control (6) fully clockwise.
Turn AUDIO GAIN control (7) to midrange.
Set FREQUENCY VERNIER switch (8) to OFF.
CAUTION
In duplex or owr operation (AN/GRC-122(*) models only), transmitting frequency of
radio set must differ from receiving duplex RT-662/GRC frequency by 10 percent or 1
MHz. Tune duplex RT-662/GRC to desired frequency before keying radio set. This must
be done even if RT-662/GRC is not turned on.
2-87
TM 11-5815-334-10
PREOPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT SETTINGS. (CONT)
2-26.
EQUIPMENT SETTINGS COMMON TO ALL MODELS (CONT)
Amplifier AM-3349/GRC-106
EL6VR102
1. Set HV RESET switch (1) to OPERATE.
CAUTION
Use minimum turning force when setting ON-OFF PRIM PWR switch to avoid breaking
switch shaft.
2. Set PRIM PWR switch (2) to OFF.
MODEM MD-522(*)/GRC
EL6VR103
2-88
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-26.
PREOPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT SETTINGS. (CONT)
CAUTION
Ensure modem RCV-SEND switch is set to RCV before energizing modem.
1. Set ON-OFF switch (1) to ON.
2. Turn AUDIO GAIN control (2) to midrange.
3. Set ONE WAY-DUPLEX switch (3) to ONE WAY.
4. Turn BFO control (4) to midrange.
5. Set MODE SELECTOR switch (5) to VOICE.
6. Set METER FUNCTION switch (6) to REGULATED DC and check for 20 vdc on meter.
7. Set AUTO MARK/HOLD switch (7) to ON.
8. Set RECEIVE-REV-NORM switch (8) to NORM.
9. Set DC LOOP NO. 1 switch (9) to 20 or 60 ma (20 ma in models with MK-2488/G).
10. Set DC LOOP NO. 2 switch (10) to 20 or 60 ma (20 main models with MK-2488/G).
11. Turn SQUELCH SENS fully counterclockwise.
12. Turn SCOPE INTENSITY control (12) to midrange.
NOTE
If you have security equipment, install and energize secure equipment.
Teletypewriter TT-98/FG and Duplex TT-98/FG
All control settings are the same for TT-98/FG and duplex TT-98/FG. TT-98/FG is used in AN/GRC122/142 Plain, A, and B models. An additional duplex TT-98/FG is used in AN/GRC-122 Plain, A,
and B models.
EL6VR104
1.
2.
3.
4.
Set
Set
Set
Set
MOTOR switch (1) to OFF.
LIGHT switch (2) to OFF.
LINE-BREAK switch (3) to LINE.
SEND-LOCK switch (4) to SEND.
NOTE
On TT-722(*)/TG set keyboard lock in forward position toward operator.
Change 2 2-89
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-26.
PREOPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT SETTINGS. (CONT)
EQUIPMENT SETTINGS COMMON TO ALL MODELS (CONT)
Teletypewriter TT-76(*)/GGC
3
1
EL6VR105
1. Set POWER switch (1) to OFF.
2. Set MOTOR switch (2) to OFF.
3. Set LIGHT switch (3) to OFF.
4. Set KEYBOARD switch (4) to SEND.
5. Set SELECTOR switch (5) to 1.
6. Set START-STOP-FEED RETRACT lever (6) to FEED RETRACT.
Low-Level Signaling Device TT-523/GGC
Low-level signaling device is mounted to rear of TT-76(*)/GGC. It is used when operating in a secure
mode.
EL6VR106
Set TT-523/GGC switch (1) to TD SEND-TR SEND/RCV.
2-90
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-26.
PREOPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT SETTINGS. (CONT)
Communications Terminal AN/UGC-74A(V)3
AN/UGC-74A(V)3 is used in AN/GRC-122/142C, D, and E models.
EL6VR112
CAUTION
When extending AN/UGC-74A(V)3, be careful not to break attaching cables that feed
through rear of case.
1. Unlatch two case latches (1) and slide AN/UGC-74A(V)3 (2) from case (3).
2. Set ON-OFF switch (4) to OFF.
3. While AN/UGC-74A(V)3 is extended, do procedures given in paragraph 2-28.
Telephone Set TA-312/PT
A second TA-312/PT is supplied for remote operation. All controls and indicators are the same.
EL6VR113
1. Set selector switch (1) to LB.
2. Set INT-EXT switch (2) to INT.
3. Turn LOUD control (3) fully clockwise.
2-91
TM 11-5815-334-10
PREOPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT SETTINGS. (CONT)
2-26.
EQUIPMENT SETTINGS COMMON TO ALL MODELS (CONT)
Electric Heater
Electric heater is used in ac only mode of operation.
EL6VR114
Set heater ON-OFF switch (1) to OFF or ON as required.
Standing-Wave-Ratio Power Meter ME-165/G
EL6VR116
1. Set function switch (1) to POWER.
2. Turn ADJUST knob (2) fully counterclockwise.
2-92
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-26.
PREOPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT SETTINGS. (CONT)
Loudspeaker LS-166/U and Duplex LS-166/U
Duplex LS-166/U is used on AN/GRC-122(*) models. Control setting is the same.
EL6VR115
Set VEHICLE-PACKSET switch (1) to VEHICLE.
Remote Control Box C-7279/GRC-142
Perform initial settings on remote box when performing remote operation.
EL6VR117
Set SEND-RECEIVE switch (1) to RECEIVE.
2-93
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-26.
PREOPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT SETTINGS. (CONT)
EQUIPMENT SETTINGS COMMON TO ALL MODELS (CONT)
Remote Control C-433/GRC
Perform initial settings on remote control for remote operation.
EL6VR118
Set SELECTOR switch (1) to TEL.
Local Control C-434/GRC
Perform initial settings on local control for remote operation.
EL6VR119
Set LOCAL switch (1) to TEL ONLY.
2-94
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-27.
PREOPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT CHECKS.
MODEM MD-522(*)/GRC REGULATED DC CHECK
Check that modem is receiving 28 vdc for proper operation as given below:
EL6VR120
1.
2.
Set METER FUNCTION switch (1) to REGULATED DC.
Check that 20 vdc is indicated on voltmeter (2).
NOTE
If 20 vdc is not indicated on voltmeter, go to troubleshooting.
OWR-DX-SEND TTY LOOP CURRENT ADJUSTMENT
Check that owr loop current is 20 or 60 ma as given below. (20 ma only in models with MK-2488/G).
NOTE
If remote tty’s are being used, set control panel LOCAL. REMOTE switch to REMOTE
before performing adjustment.
1.
2.
Set METER FUNCTION switch (1) to DC LOOP NO. 1.
Check that 20 or 60 ma is indicated on meter (2). (20 ma only in models with MK-2488/G).
NOTE
If 20 or 60 ma is not indicated on meter, turn LOOP ADJ OWR-DX-SEND CONTROL,
located on control panel, for a 20 or 60 ma indication, (20 ma only in models with MK-2488/G).
If control has no effect, go to troubleshooting.
Change 2 2-95
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-27.
PREOPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT CHECKS. (CONT)
DX-RECEIVE-PONY LOOP CURRENT ADJUSTMENT (USED ON AN/GRC-122(*) MODELS ONLY)
Check that duplex pony loop current is 20 or 60 ma as given below. (20 ma only in models with MK-2488/G).
NOTE
If remote tty’s are being used, set control panel LOCAL-REMOTE switch to REMOTE
before performing adjustment.
EL6VR120
1. Set modem METER FUNCTION switch (1) to DC LOOP NO. 2.
2. Check that 20 or 60 ma is indicated on meter (2). (20 ma only in models with MK-2488/G).
NOTE
If 20 or 60 ma is not indicated on meter, turn LOOP ADJ DX-RCV-PONY control, located
on control panel (on AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models only), for a 20 or 60 ma
indication. (20 ma only in models with MK-2488/G). If control has no effect, go to troubleshooting.
2-96 Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-28.
OPERATION AND SELF-TEST OF COMMUNICATIONS TERMINAL AN/UGC-74A(V)3.
AN/UGC-74A(V)3 system has three operational states and five nonoperational conditions.
Operational states are operator selectable. These states are the only states in which AN/UGC74A(V)3 is capable of operating as a communications terminal.
The three operational states are:
Receive Only (RO)
Keyboard Send/Receive (KSR)
Intelligent Communication Terminal (lCT).
In each operational state, AN/UGC-74A(V)3 is capable of receiving messages. In KSR and ICT,
AN/UGC-74A(V)3 is also capable of transmitting messages.
The five nonoperational conditions of AN/UGC-74A(V)3 are:
OFF Condition (POWER switch set to OFF)
Cold Start (power applied to terminal)
Operation Validation/State Determination (system initialization)
Battery Backup (prime power removed)
Self-Test (system readiness check).
A detailed description of operation, operational states, and their associated switch positions are given in
TM 11-5815-602-10.
The following procedure is an example of AN/UGC-74A(V)3 installed in a link, with the link having specific
requirements. Refer to TM 11-5815-602-10 and set controls and switches of AN/UGC-74A(V)3 to link
requirements below.
LINK REQUIREMENTS AN/GRC-122/142 Models C, D, and E.
Internal Control Settinqs
With MK-2488
Without MK-2488/G
Parity: Odd
State: ICT
Communications Interface: LO DATA
Data Format: NRC
Transmission Speed: 45.5
Communication Clock Source: Internal
Clock Edge: Positive ( + )
Figure S/J: Not applicable in ASCII
Data Input: Noninverted data
No. of Stop Bits in Data Format: One
Data Character Set: BAUDOT
PARITY:
STATE :
REC MODE:
XMIT MODE:
BAUD RATE:
CLOCK lNT/EXT:
CLOCK:
FIGURE S/J:
SIGNAL HRZ/DIO:
STOP BITS:
MODE:
INHIB
KSR
48V
70 Microamps
50 or75
INT
J
NRZ
1
BAUDOT (50 OR 75) OR ASCII II
(75 only).
Change 2
2-97
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-28.
OPERATION AND SELF-TEST OF COMMUNICATIONS TERMINAL AN/UGC-74A(V)3. (CONT)
OPERATION VALIDATION/STATE DETERMINATION CONDITION MESSAGE
Set POWER switch to ON. AN/UGC-74A(V)3 prints the following operation/state determination
condition message:
SYSTEM INITIALIZED
Models without MK-2488
SWITCH STATE = ICT
OPERATIONAL STATE = ICT
OPERATING CAPACITY = FULL
MODE = BAUDOT
BAUD RATE = 45.5
STOP BITS = 1
END OF LINE OPTION = OD OD OA
SPACE OPTION = ON
LINE LENGTH = 80
LINE FEEDS = 1
RECEIVE ENVELOPE OPTION = :
TRANSMIT ENVELOPE OPTION = :
BELL OPTION = FIGURES S
SYSTEM INITIALIZED
Models with MK-2488
KSR
SWITCH STATE:
KSR
OPERATIONAL STATE:
FULL
OPERATION CAPACITY:
BAUDOT OR ASCII
MODE:
1
STOP BITS :
BAUD RATE:
50 or 75
OD OD OA
END OF LINE OPTION:
ON
SPACE OPTION:
LINE LENGTH:
80
LINE FEEDS:
1
:
RECEIVE ENVELOPE:
:
TRANSMIT ENVELOPE:
BELL OPTION:
FIGURES J
Operator can verify switch positions, determined by link requirements, from printed message.
NOTE
To change to operation of AN/UGC-74A(V)3, set POWER switch to OFF, set applicable
switches, then set POWER switch to ON.
SELF-TEST
In self-test condition, AN/UGC-74A(V)3 performs a series of tests on its circuitry, with operator assistance,
to determine operational readiness of system. If at any time a test fails, system will (if possible) print out a
fail message and cite assembly being tested at time of failure. All testing stops during self-test when a test
fails, and operator must notify organizational maintenance. perform self-test as given in TM 11-5815-602-10.
Perform lamp test and keyboard test as given in TM 11-5815-602-10.
To set parameters, refer to TM 11-5815-602-10.
2-98 Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-29.
TUNING PROCEDURE.
Tuning procedure given applies to any mode of operation (ssb nsk, fsk, am, or cw) for which radio
operates. Transmitter tuning procedures given vary slightly when using whip or doublet antenna.
Perform all preoperational equipment settings (para 2-26) and preoperational equipment checks
(para 2-27) prior to tuning radio set. For tuning radio set to a desired operating frequency with
doublet antenna, see page 2-103 and for whip antenna, proceed as follows:
TUNING PROCEDURE USING WHIP ANTENNA
CAUTION
To prevent damage, do not key radio set until instructed.
Receiving frequency of duplex RT-662/GRC (AN/GRC-122(*) models only) must differ
from radio set transmitting frequency by 10 percent or 1 MHz, whichever is greater. This
applies even though duplex RT-662/GRC may not be turned on. Always tune radios
before they are operated (keyed).
EL6VR121
1. Set RT-662/GRC SERVICE SELECTOR switch (1) to STANDBY.
NOTE
Check that signal level meter goes to right.
2. Set amplifier TEST METER switch (2) to PRIM VOLT.
3. Set amplifier PRIM PWR switch (3) to ON.
2-99
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-29. TUNING PROCEDURE. (CONT)
TUNING PROCEDURE USING WHIP ANTENNA (CONT)
NOTE
Allow radio set 90 seconds to warm up. Observe that amplifier blowers are energized and
signal level meter indicates to extreme right of meter scale. If blower or meter does not
operate, refer to higher level of maintenance.
EL6VR122
4. Set RT-662/GRC SERVICE SELECTOR switch (1) to any mode of operation (SSB NSK, FSK,
AM, or CW).
NOTE
Check that RT signal level meter returns to extreme left of meter scale.
Check that modem test meter indicates within area of two dark green wedges. If meter
does not indicate properly, return SERVICE SELECTOR switch to STANDBY for 90
seconds. If meter still does not indicate properly, refer to higher level of maintenance,
5. Set amplifier TEST METER switch (2) to PRIM VOLT.
6. Turn RT-662/GRC MHz (3) and kHz (4) controls, observing digits directly above, until desired
operating frequency is reached.
2-100
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-29. TUNING PROCEDURE. (CONT)
7. Use antenna tuning and loading chart (5) according to selected operating frequency and type of
antenna being used to obtain settings of ANT LOAD and ANT TUNE counters.
8. Adjust amplifier ANT TUNE control (6) to setting determined in step 6.
9. Adjust amplifier ANT LOAD control (7) to setting determined in step 6.
CAUTION
Be sure antenna is attached for proper loading to prevent damage to equipment.
When using HV RESET switch, it should not stay in TUNE position for more than 2
minutes. When more than 2 minutes are required, move HV RESET switch to OPERATE
position and SERVICE SELECTOR switch to STANDBY, for a 5 minute cooling. After 5
minutes of cooling, reset controls to previous positions and continue with procedure.
NOTE
ANT TUNE and ANT LOAD controls will interact with each other. To center their meter
needles, rotate controls slowly in direction opposite of meter needle deflection.
10. Set amplifier HV RESET switch (8) to TUNE. Wait for a deflection on ANT TUNE (9) and ANT
LOAD (10) meters.
11. Adjust ANT TUNE control (6) and ANT LOAD control (7) for center scale meter readings. Adjust
ANT LOAD control first.
NOTE
Tuning amplifier is complete when simultaneous center scale readings are obtained on
ANT TUNE and ANT LOAD meters. TEST METER needle indicates just below gray portion
of scale. If meter needles will not indicate center scale, refer to TM 11-5820-520-12.
12. Perform steps 13 through 19 before 2 minute period is up.
2-101
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-29.
TUNING PROCEDURE. (CONT)
TUNING PROCEDURE USING WHIP ANTENNA (CONT)
EL6VR123
13. Set amplifier TEST METER switch (1) to LOW VOLT. Check that TEST METER needle indicates
within green portion of top scale. If indication is abnormal, refer to TM 11-5820-520-12.
14. Set amplifier TEST METER switch (1) to HIGH VOLT. Check that TEST METER needle indicates
within green portion of top scale. If indication is abnormal, refer to TM 11-5820-520-12.
15. Set amplifier TEST METER switch (1) to DRIVER CUR. Check that TEST METER needle indicates
within the two dark green wedges of top scale. If indication is abnormal, refer to
TM 11-5820-520-12.
16. Set amplifier TEST METER switch (1) to GRID DRIVE. Check that TEST METER needle indicates
just below (to the left of) gray portion of bottom scale. If indication is abnormal, refer to
TM 11-5820-520-12.
2-102
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-29.
17.
TUNING PROCEDURE. (CONT)
Set amplifier TEST METER switch (1) to PA CUR. Check that TEST METER needle indicates just
below (to the left of) gray portion of bottom scale. If indication is abnormal, refer to
TM 11-5820-520-12.
18. Set amplifier TEST METER switch (1) to POWER OUT. Check that TEST METER needle indicates
just below (to the left of) gray portion of scale. If indication is abnormal, refer to
TM 11-5820-520-12.
19.
Set amplifier HV RESET switch (2) to OPERATE.
NOTE
ANT TUNE and ANT LOAD counter setting should be logged on logging chart with a pencil
when tuning has been completed. Logged settings can be used for future tuning references unless ANT TUNE and ANT LOAD meter needles indicate in red portion of scale
during operation. If settings cannot be used, retune radio set.
Radio set is now properly tuned for any mode of operation using a whip antenna. To
conserve power when receiving only, amplifier switch should be set to OFF. To resume
operation, set amplifier PRIM PWR switch to ON. Set HV RESET switch to TUNE for 60
seconds, then set to OPERATE. Radio set is now ready for operation.
TUNING PROCEDURE USING DOUBLET ANTENNA
CAUTION
Be sure antenna is attached for proper loading to prevent damage to equipment.
When using HV RESET switch, it should not stay in TUNE position for more than 2
minutes. When more than 2 minutes are required, move HV RESET switch to OPERATE
and SERVICE SELECTOR switch to STAND BY for a 5 minute cooling. After 5 minutes of
cooling, reset controls to previous positions and continue with procedure.
NOTE
ANT TUNE and ANT LOAD controls will interact with each other. To center meter
needles, rotate controls slowly in direction opposite meter needle deflection.
2-103
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-29. TUNING PROCEDURE. (CONT)
TUNING PROCEDURE USING DOUBLET ANTENNA (CONT)
Antenna group AN/GRA-50 (doublet antenna) is used in place of whip antenna for greater range and
reliability. When doublet antenna is used, tuning procedure requires use of standing wave ratio
power meter ME-165/G mounted on left wall of shelter.
EL6VR124
1. Check that modem RCV-SEND switch (1) is set to RCV.
2. Connect doublet lead-in (free end of cable assembly RF CG-678/U) to doublet connector on
shelter.
3. Disconnect whip antenna (2) from amplifier.
CAUTION
Keying radio set will cause damage to equipment if whip and doublet antennas are
connected at same time.
2-104
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-29.
TUNING PROCEDURE. (CONT)
4. Connect CG-2568A/U rf cable from input side of ME-165/G to 50 OHM LINE connector (3)
on amplifier.
5. Set ME-165/G FUNCTION switch (4) to POWER.
6. Rotate ME-165/G ADJUST control (5) fully counterclockwise.
7. Set RT-662/GRC SERVICE SELECTOR switch (6) to STAND BY.
8. Set amplifier TEST METER switch (7) to PRIM VOLT.
9. Set amplifier PRIM PWR switch (8) to ON.
NOTE
Allow radio set 90 seconds to warm up. Observe that amplifier blowers are energized and
that signal level meter indicates in extreme right portion of meter scale. If blower or
meter does not operate, refer to higher level of maintenance.
10. Set RT-662/GRC SERVICE SELECTOR switch (6) to SSB NSK.
11. Set modem METER FUNCTION switch (9) to RCV level.
12. Set modem MODE SELECTOR switch (10) to VOICE.
13. Turn RT-662/GRC MHz(11) and kHz (12) controls, observing digits directly above, until
desired operating frequency is reached.
14. Use antenna tuning and loading chart (13) according to selected operating frequency and type
of antenna being used, to obtain settings of ANT LOAD and ANT TUNE counters.
15. Adjust amplifier ANT TUNE control (14) to setting determined in step 14.
16. Adjust amplifier ANT LOAD control (15) to setting determined in step 14.
CAUTION
Be sure antenna is attached for proper loading to prevent damage to equipment.
When using HV RESET switch it should not stay in TUNE position for more than 2
minutes. When more than 2 minutes are required, move HV RESET switch to OPERATE
position and SERVICE SELECTOR switch to STAND BY, for a 5 minute cooling. After 5
minutes of cooling, reset controls to previous positions and continue with procedure.
NOTE
ANT TUNE and ANT LOAD controls will interact with each other. To center meter
needles, rotate controls slowly in direction opposite meter needle deflection.
17. Set amplifier HV RESET switch (16) to TUNE. Wait for a deflection on ANT TUNE and ANT LOAD
meters.
2-105
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-29.
TUNING PROCEDURE. (CONT)
TUNING PROCEDURE USING DOUBLET ANTENNA (CONT)
18.
Adjust ANT TUNE control and ANT LOAD control for center scale meter readings. Adjust ANT
LOAD control first.
NOTE
Tuning amplifier is complete when simultaneous center scale readings are obtained on
ANT TUNE and ANT LOAD meters. TEST METER needle indicates just below gray portion
of scale. If meter needles will not indicate center scale, refer to TM 11-5820-520-12.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
Perform steps 19 through 35 before 2 minute period is up.
Set amplifier TEST METER switch to LOW VOLT. Check that TEST METER needle indicates within
green portion of top scale. If indication is abnormal, refer to TM 11-5820-520-12.
Set amplifier TEST METER switch to HIGH VOLT. Check that TEST METER needle indicates within
green portion of top scale. If indication is abnormal, refer to TM 11-5820-520-12.
Set amplifier TEST METER switch to DRIVER CUR. Check that TEST METER needle indicates
within the two dark green wedges of top scale. If indication is abnormal, refer to
TM 11-5820-520-12.
Set amplifier TEST METER switch to GRID DRIVE. Check that TEST METER needle indicates just
below (to the left of) gray portion of bottom scale. If indication is abnormal, refer to
TM 11-5820-520-12.
Set amplifier TEST METER switch to PA CUR. Check that TEST METER needle indicates just
below (to the left of) gray portion of bottom scale. If indication is abnormal, refer to
TM 11-5820-520-12.
Set amplifier TEST METER switch to POWER OUT. Check that TEST METER needle indicates just
below (to the left of) gray area of scale. If indication is abnormal, refer to TM 11-5820-520-12.
NOTE
Check that power meter has a reading of approximately 75 to 100 watts.
26.
Set amplifier HV RESET switch to OPERATE.
CAUTION
Never turn ME-165/G FUNCTION switch when amplifier HV RESET switch is set to TUNE
position.
NOTE
ANT TUNE and ANT LOAD counter setting should be logged on logging chart with a pencil
when tuning has been completed. Logged settings can be used for future tuning references unless ANT TUNE and ANT LOAD meter needles indicate in red portion of scale
during operation. If settings cannot be used, retune radio set.
Radio set is now properly tuned for any mode of operation using a doublet antenna. To
conserve power when receiving only, amplifier switch should be set to OFF. To resume
operation, set amplifier PRIM PWR switch to ON. Set HV RESET switch to TUNE for 60
seconds, then set to OPERATE. Radio set is now ready for operation.
2-106
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-29. TUNING PROCEDURE. (CONT)
27. Set RT-662/GRC SERVICE SELECTOR switch to CW.
28. Set modem RCV/SEND switch to SEND.
29. Readjust ANT TUNE and ANT LOAD controls so that ANT TUNE and ANT LOAD meter needles
indicate in green (center) portion of scabs.
30. Check that power meter indicates 200 watts ± 10 percent.
31. Set modem RCV/SEND switch to RCV.
32. Set power meter FUNCTION switch to ADJUST.
33. Set modem RCV/SEND switch to SEND.
34. Adjust power meter ADJUST control for full scale defection. Do not exceed 600 mark.
35. Set modem RCV/SEND switch to RCV.
36. Set power meter FUNCTION switch to SWR.
37. Set modem RCV/SEND switch to SEND.
38. Check that indication on lower scale of power meter is in green or white area. (Green or white area
indicates an acceptable VSWR.) This rating should not exceed 2:1.
39. Readjust ANT TUNE and ANT LOAD controls so that ANT TUNE and ANT LOAD meter needles
indicate in green (center) position of scales.
CAUTION
Always unkey radio set before working on antenna system. Do not
leave RCV/SEND switch in SEND longer than it takes to look at scale of
power meter. Before making adjustment on antenna, evacuate shelter
to prevent accidental keying of radio set.
Never apply keying power for more than 10 minutes while power meter
is in POWER position and SERVICE SELECTOR switch on RT-662/GRC
Is in CW position.
NOTE
Incorrect reading usually indicates incorrect antenna length which
requires physical correction of antenna wire.
40. Set modem RCV/SEND switch to RCV.
41. Set power meter FUNCTION switch to OPERATE.
42. Set modem MODE SELECTOR switch to mode of operation desired.
43. Log ANT TUNE and ANT LOAD counter settings on logging chart for future tuning reference.
Change 4
2-107
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-30. OPERATION DURING RADIO SILENCE AND OUTPUT POWER MEASUREMENT.
The procedures in this paragraph are performed to provide an operational shelter during radio silence.
Output power measurement is used when no radio traffic Is permitted and accidental keying of radio set
may occur. Followlng are two procedures: operation with doublet antenna and operation with whip
antenna. Perform these procedures in conjunction with applicable starting procedures (para 2-25) and
radio tuning procedures (para 2-29).
POWER OUTPUT MEASUREMENT WITH DOUBLET ANTENNA
1.
Perform applicable portions of preoperational procedures (para 2-24), and preoperational
equipment settings (para 2-26).
EL6VR116
2.
3.
Set ME-165/G functbn switch (1) to POWER.
Perform tuning procedures (pare 2-29).
NOTES
1. When maintaining radio silence, disregard instructions to change
setting of ME-165/G function switch from POWER position. Vswr
measurements cannot be made during radio silence.
2. The ME-165/G is only calibrated up to 19 MHz. (Readings above 19
MHz are usually higher than actual value).
4.
Perform desired mode of operation (Local OWR Operation, para 2-32 or Remote Operation,
para 2-34).
5. ME-165/G meter indications for various modes of operation should be approximately as given
below:
MODE OF OPERATION
CW
SSB Voice
Compatible AM.
FSK, or Voice Plus NSK
NSK
2-108
Change 4
I
ME-165/G METER READING
200 Watts
200 watts
100 watts
200 watts
200 watts
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-30. OPERATION DURING RADIO SILENCE AND OUTPUT POWER MEASUREMENT. (CONT)
POWER OUTPUT MEASUREMENT WITH WHIP ANTENNA
1.
2.
Perform applicable portions of preoperational procedures (para 2-24) and preoperational
equipment settings (para 2-26).
Set ME-165/G function switch (1) to POWER.
Do not change ME-165/G function switch from POWER position when
performing this procedure. Changing function switch position removes
load from transmitter and can damage equipment.
EL6VR127
WARNING
Dangerous voltages exist at amplifier 50 ohm line and whip antenna
connectors. Care must be taken when working around these
connectors to prevent electrical shock to personnel.
CAUTION
When cable assembly CG-2568/U is connected to amplifier, whip
antenna must be disconnected to prevent equipment damage. This
cable is located on roadside wall next to amplifier and terminates at
power meter.
3. Disconnect whip antenna.
4. Connect cable assembly CG-2568A/U to amplifier 50 ohm Iine connector (2).
5. Perform tuning procedures (para 2-29) for whip antenna.
6. Perform desired mode of operation (Local OWR Operation, pare 2-32 or Remote Operation,
para 2-34.)
Change 4
2-109
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-30. OPERATION DURING RADIO SILENCE AND OUTPUT POWER MEASUREMENT. (CONT)
POWER OUTPUT MEASUREMENT WITH WHIP ANTENNA (CONT)
7. ME-165/G meter indications for various modes of operation should be approximately as given
below:
MODE OF OPERATION
(CW
SSB Voice
Compatible AM.
FSK, or Voice Plus NSK
NSK
ME-165/G METER READING
200 Watts
200 watts (varies with voice input)
100 watts (varies with voice input)
200 watts
200 watts
EL6VR128
8. Set amplified PRIM PWR switch (1) to OFF.
Dangerous voltages exist at amplified 50 ohm line and whip antenna
connectors. Care must be taken when working around these
connectors to prevent electrical shock to personnel.
9. Disconnect cable assembly CG-2568A/U from 50 OHM LINE connector (2).
10. Reconnect whip antenna.
11. Perform tuning procedures (para 2-29) before attempting to transmit.
2-110
Change 4
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-31.
OPERATION.
Radio tty sets AN/GRC-122/142(*) may be operated either locally or remotely. Only owr operation is
possible when operating AN/GRC-142(*) models. AN/GRC-122(*) models provide duplex (simultaneous transmission and reception) operation. Remote duplex voice operation of AN/GRC-122(*)
models is not possible.
When operating AN/GRC-122(*) shelter, there are two RT-662/GRC radios. RT-662/GRC located
on top rack, roadside front wall, is referred to as RT-662/GRC and is used mainly for owr operations.
The second RT-662/GRC, located on top rack, center front wall, is referred to as duplex RT662/GRC and is used mainly for duplex operations.
Always set modem RCV/SEND switch to RCV after message is sent.
Perform applicable operating procedure for mode of operation selected according to paragraphs 2-32
through 2-34.
2-32.
LOCAL OWR OPERATION.
Perform applicable portions of preoperational procedures, equipment settings, equipment checks,
and tuning procedure (para 2-24 through 2-29) before attempting any mode of local owr operation.
For AN/GRC-122/142C, D, and E models, prepare AN/UGC-74 for operation (para 2-28).
The two modes of local owr operation are voice and tty operation. Perform operating procedure
applicable to mode of local owr operation selected (In the AN/GRC-122(*) models with MK-2488/G,
local OWR operation is considered back-up only).
NOTE
RT-662/GRC MANUAL RF GAIN control setting should not be altered unless RT662/GRC is being operated in close proximity (10 miles or less) with another radio set.
MANUAL RF GAIN control can then be rotated to some counterclockwise position that
provides an indication on signal level meter that is roughly one or two divisions below full
level indication of received signal strength. This will reduce background noise and
minimize adjacent channel interference when not receiving a signal. Rotating MANUAL
RF GAIN control counterclockwise makes RT-662/GRC less sensitive to receiving a
signal. If operating frequency or location is changed, MANUAL RF GAIN control should
be returned to its maximum clockwise position to ensure signals are not lost. MANUAL
RF GAIN is not usually used when operating in a tty net.
Modem MD-522A/GRC automatic mark-hold circuit automatically switches tty to standby
(mark-hold condition) when noise on incoming radio signal becomes so great that no
meaningful information can be received. This circuit is energized by setting modem
MARK-HOLD switch to ON.
Modem squelch circuit disables monitor speaker (connected to SPEAKER and REMOTE
connector) when noise on incoming radio signal becomes so great that no meaningful
information can be received. Squelch level is controlled by setting of SQUELCH SENS
control.
Change 2
2-111
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-32.
LOCAL OWR OPERATION. (CONT)
LOCAL OWR CW, SSB VOICE, AND COMPATIBLE AM VOICE
EL6VR129
Setup Procedures
1. Check that modem test meter (1) indicates 20 vdc.
NOTE
Audio output level of RT-662/GRC must be maintained within receive limits indicated on
modem test meter to ensure proper modem operation. This level is indicated on modem
test meter when modem METER FUNCTION switch is set to RCV LEVEL in any reception
mode. If received level is not within receive limits, adjust RT-662/GRC AUDIO GAIN
control for proper meter reading.
2. Set modem METER FUNCTION switch (2) to RCV LEVEL.
NOTE
In cw mode, transmitted rf signal is 2 kHz higher than frequency indicated by RT662/GRC MC and KC controls.
2-112
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-32.
LOCAL OWR OPERATION. (CONT)
3. Set RT-662/GRC SERVICE SELECTOR switch (3) for mode of operation desired.
SWITCH POSITION
OPERATION
cw operation
ssb voice operation
compatible am.
CW
SSB NSK
AM
4. Adjust modem AUDIO GAIN control (4) for a comfortable listening level.
NOTE
If ignition-type (pulse) noise is heard in received signal, set RT-662/GRC NOISE
BLANKER switch to ON. A 1 second automatic gain control (age) delay occurs when
NOISE BLANKER switch is set to ON. If noise blanking does not help reception, set
NOISE BLANKER switch to OFF. Some models of RT-662/GRC do not contain a noise
blanker switch.
5. Set RT-662/GRC NOISE BLANKER switch (5) to ON or OFF as required.
NOTE
If noise level is undesirable in absence of received signals, set RT-662/GRC SQUELCH
switch to ON. In cw and fsk modes of operation, squelch is automatically disabled.
When operating modem in nsk mode of operation, RT-662/GRC SQUELCH switch should
be set to OFF. In am. or ssb mode of operation, with SQUELCH switch set to ON, audio
output is not completely squelched with high noise levels. A low level of audio is always
present to indicate that receiver portion of RT-662/GRC is operating.
6. Set RT-662/GRC SQUELCH switch (6) to ON or OFF as required.
Reception
NOTE
Audio output level of RT-662/GRC must be maintained within receive limits indicated on
modem test meter to ensure proper modem operation. If received level is not within
receive limits, adjust RT-662/GRC audio gain control for proper meter reading.
7. When receiving cw signals, adjust RT-662/GRC BFO control (7) for a clear tone.
8. When receiving ssb, compatible am., or cw signals from radio sets other than AN/GRC-106,
adjust RT-662/GRC FREQ VERNIER control (8) for best possible reception.
Transmission
NOTE
Set LOCK-OUT OVERRIDE switch to OVERRIDE to transmit in steps 9 and 10.
9. To transmit ssb or compatible am., connect to switch assembly and operate microphone.
10. To transmit cw, connect to switch assembly and operate key telegraph.
2-113
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-32.
LOCAL OWR OPERATION. (CONT)
LOCAL OWR TTY OPERATION, FSK (850 Hz), SSB NSK (85 Hz), 85 Hz DIVERSITY, OR 85 Hz + VOICE
EL6VR130
Setup Procedures
1. Check that modem test meter (1) indicates 20 vdc.
NOTE
Audio output level of RT-662/GRC must be maintained within receive limits indicated on
modem test meter to ensure proper modem operation. This level is indicated on modem
test meter when modem METER FUNCTION switch is set to RCV LEVEL in any reception
mode.
2. Set modem METER FUNCTION switch (2) to RCV LEVEL.
2-114
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-32.
LOCAL OWR OPERATION. (CONT)
3. Set RT-662/GRC SERVICE SELECTOR switch (3) for mode of operation desired.
SWITCH POSITION
OPERATION
SSB NSK
SSB NSK
SSB NSK
FSK
SSB NSK
85 Hz
85 Hz diversity
85 Hz + voice
850 Hz
85 Hz
CAUTION
Adjustment of RT-662/GRC AUDIO GAIN control for any indication to right of test meter
RCV area will damage equipment.
4. Adjust RT-662/GRC AUDIO GAIN control (4) for modem test meter (1) needle indication
within RCV level area.
5. Set modem MODE SELECTOR switch (5) for mode of operation desired.
SWITCH POSITION
Voice
850 HZ
85 Hz
85 Hz DIVERSITY
85 Hz + VOICE
OPERATION
I
ssb nsk
fsk operation
nsk operation
nsk diversity
nsk plus voice
6. Set modem METER FUNCTION switch (2) to DC LOOP NO. 1 to monitor dc loop no. 1.
7. Adjust modem SCOPE INTENSITY control (6) for a clear indication on modem crt (7) as illustrated below.
(B)
FSK OUT OF TUNE
(A)
NSK LOW SIGNAL TO
NOISE RATlO
(E)
MARK HOLD
SIGNAL
(c)
NSK TUNED
PROPERLY
(D)
FSK TUNED
PROPERLY
CRT SIGNAL PATTERNS
EL6VR131
2-115
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-32.
LOCAL OWR OPERATION. (CONT)
LOCAL OWR TTY OPERATION, FSK (850 Hz), SSB NSK (85 Hz), 85 Hz DIVERSITY, OR 85 Hz + VOICE
(CONT
EL6VR141
EL6VR125
8. Adjust modem BFO control for crt indication of two ellipses of equal amplitude for 850 Hz
operation only.
9. When communicating with radio sets other than AN/GRC-106, adjust RT-662/GRC FREQ
VERNIER control if necessary.
10. Adjust modem AUDIO GAIN control for a comfortable listening level.
2-116
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-32.
LOCAL OWR OPERATION. (CONT)
Reception
NOTE
Audio output level of RT-662/GRC must be maintained within receive limits indicated on
modem test meter to ensure proper modem operation. If received level is not within
receive limits, adjust RT-662/GRC audio gain control for proper meter reading.
If operation and self-test on AN/UGC-74A(V)3 is completed (para 2-28), AN/UGC74A(V)3 is ready for reception.
11.
Set TT-98/FG MOTOR (1) and LIGHT (2) switches to ON to print page copy of received
messages.
12.
Set modem RECEIVE-REV/NORM switch to REV if garbled copy is received when operating in
850 Hz operation.
13.
Set TT-76(*)/GGC POWER (3), MOTOR (4), and LIGHT (5) switches to ON, to make punched
tape copy of received messages.
14.
In AN/GRC-142(*) models with MK-2488/G, set the HOME COPY switch to REC 1 for home copy
of transmitted message on teletype connected to J7 of the interconnecting box J-4024/U, or
REC 2 for home copy of a transmitted message on teletypewriter connected to J8 or
interconnecting box J-4024. The received message will be sent from the J-4024/U to both
teletypewriters if the HOME COPY switch on front panel of interconnecting box J-4024/U is set
to OFF. Only the teletypewriter not selected for home copy will reproduce incoming messages
from distant station.
Change 2
2-117
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-32.
LOCAL OWR OPERATION. (CONT)
LOCAL OWR TTY OPERATION, FSK (850 Hz), SSB NSK (85 Hz), 85 Hz DIVERSITY, OR 85 Hz + VOICE
(CONT)
Keyboard Transmission
NOTE
To transmit from TT-98/FG keyboard, do steps 14 and 15. To transmit from AN/UGC74A(V)3 keyboard, do steps 14 and 16. To transmit from TT-76(*)/GGC keyboard, do
steps 14 and 17. After a message is sent, always set modem RCV-SEND switch to RCV.
14. Set modem RCV-SEND switch to SEND.
15. Set TT-98/FG MOTOR and LIGHT switches to ON and operate keyboard.
16. Send message from AN/UGC-74A(V)3 as given in TM 11-5815-602-10.
17. Set TT-76(*)/GGC POWER, MOTOR, and LIGHT switches to ON and operate keyboard.
In models with MK-2488/G, a home copy of the transmitted message is available by placing the
interconnecting box J-4024/G HOME COPY front panel switch to either REC 1 or REC 2. The printer or
typing reperforator will respond to either keyboard send or transmitter-distributor send. Home copy
selection depends on whether the operator wants page copy or a tape copy of the outgoing
message. After transmitting, place the HOME COPY switch to OFF if it is desired to receive incoming
messages on the same machine used for home copy.
2-118 Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-32.
LOCAL OWR OPERATION. (CONT)
Punched Tape Transmission
18.
Set TT-76(*)/GGC POWER, MOTOR, and LIGHT switches to ON.
19.
Set TT-76(*)/GGC SELECTOR switch to position 2.
20.
Insert prepared punched tape into TT-76(*)/GGC transmitter-distributor (l).
21.
Repeat step 14.
22.
Set TT-76(*)/GGC START-STOP-FEED RETRACT lever (2) to START.
NOTE
Always set modem RCV-SEND switch to RCV after message is sent.
It is not possible to receive nsk while transmitting voice, or transmit nsk while receiving
voice during owr 85 Hz + voice operation.
85 Hz + Voice Transmission
23. Set modem MODE SELECTOR switch to 85 Hz + VOICE.
24. Set RT-662/GRC SERVICE SELECTOR switch to SSB NSK.
25. Perform procedures for reception, keyboard transmission, or punched tape transmission.
NOTE
Set LOCKOUT-OVERRIDE switch to OVERRIDE to transmit voice.
26. To transmit voice, connect microphone to switch assembly.
2-119
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-33.
LOCAL DUPLEX OPERATION (AN/GRC-122(*) MODELS).
Perform applicable portions of preoperational procedures, equipment settings, and equipment
checks (para 2-24 through 2-27) before attempting any mode of duplex operation. For AN/GRC122C, D, and E models, prepare AN/UGC-74A(V)3 for operation (para 2-28).
The two modes of local duplex operation, are voice and tty operation. Perform operating procedure
applicable to mode of local duplex operation selected.
NOTE
RT-662/GRC MANUAL RF GAIN control setting should not be altered unless RT622/GRC is being operated in close proximity (10 miles or less) with another radio set.
MANUAL RF GAIN control can then be rotated to some counterclockwise position that
provides an indication on signal level meter that is roughly one or two divisions below full
level indication of received signal strength. This will reduce background noise and
minimize adjacent channel interference when not receiving a signal. Rotating MANUAL
RF GAIN control counterclockwise makes RT-662/GRC less sensitive to receiving a
signal. If operating frequency or location is changed, MANUAL RF GAIN control should
be returned to its maximum clockwise position to ensure signals are not lost. MANUAL
RF GAIN is not usually used when operating in a tty net.
Modem MD-522A/GRC automatic mark-hold circuit automatically switches tty to standby
(mark-hold condition) when noise on incoming radio signal becomes so great that no
meaningful information can be received. This circuit is energized by setting modem
MARK-HOLD switch to ON.
Modem squelch circuit disables monitor speaker (connected to SPEAKER and REMOTE
connector) when noise on incoming radio signal becomes so great that no meaningful
information can be received. Squelch level is controlled by setting of SQUELCH SENS
control.
LOCAL DUPLEX CW, SSB VOICE, AND COMPATIBLE AM VOICE OPERATION
EL6VR137
2-120
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-33.
LOCAL DUPLEX OPERATION (AN/GRC-122(*) MODELS). (CONT)
RT-662/GRC
EL6VR138
Setup Procedures
1. Check that modem test meter (1) indicates 20 vdc.
NOTE
Audio output level of RT-662/GRC must be maintained within receive limits indicated on
modem test meter to ensure proper modem operation. This level is indicated on modem
test meter when modem METER FUNCTION switch is set to RCV LEVEL in any reception
mode.
2. Set modem METER FUNCTION switch (2) to RCV LEVEL.
3. Adjust owr RT-662/GRC AUDIO GAIN control (3) completely counterclockwise.
NOTE
In cw mode, transmitted rf signal is 2 kHz higher than frequency indicated by RT-662/
GRC MC and KC controls.
4. Set RT-662/GRC SERVICE SELECTOR switch (4) for mode of operation desired.
SWITCH POSITION
CW
SSB NSK
AM
I
OPERATION
cw transmission
ssb transmission
compatible am. transmission
2-121
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-33.
LOCAL DUPLEX OPERATION (AN/GRC-122(*) MODELS). (CONT)
LOCAL DUPLEX CW, SSB VOICE, AND COMPATIBLE AM. VOICE OPERATION (CONT)
EL6VR139
5. Set duplex RT-662/GRC SERVICE SELECTOR switch (1) to same setting as step 4.
6. Adjust modem AUDIO GAIN control (2) for a comfortable listening level.
NOTE
If ignition-type (pulse) noise is heard in received signal, set duplex RT-662/GRC NOISE
BLANKER switch to ON. A 1 second agc delay occurs when NOISE BLANKER switch is set
to ON. If noise blanking does not help reception, set NOISE BLANKER switch to OFF.
Some models of RT-662/GRC do not contain a noise blanker switch.
7. Set duplex RT-662/GRC NOISE BLANKER switch (3) to ON or OFF as required.
2-122
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-33.
LOCAL DUPLEX OPERATION (AN/GRC-122(*) MODELS). (CONT)
NOTE
If noise level is undesirable in absence of received signals, set duplex RT-662/GRC
SQUELCH switch to ON. In cw and fsk modes of operation, squelch is automatically
disabled, In compatible am. or ssb mode of operation, with SQUELCH switch set to ON,
audio output is not completely squelched during a period of high noise level. A low level
of audio is always present to indicate that receiver portion of duplex RT-662/GRC is
operating.
8. Set duplex RT-662/GRC SQUELCH switch (4) to ON or OFF as required.
Reception
NOTE
Audio output level of RT-662/GRC must be maintained within receive limits indicated on
modem test meter to ensure proper modem operation. If received level is not within
receive limits, adjust RT-662/GRC audio gain control for proper meter reading.
9. When receiving cw signals, adjust duplex RT-662/GRC BFO control (5) for a comfortable tone.
10. When receiving ssb, compatible am. or cw signals from radio sets other than AN/GRC-106,
adjust RT-662/GRC FREQ VERNIER control (6) for best possible reception.
Transmission
NOTE
Set LOCKOUT OVERRIDE switch to OVERRIDE to transmit in steps 9 and 10.
11. To transmit ssb or compatible am. voice, connect and operate microphone.
12. To transmit cw, connect and operate key telegraph.
2-123
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-33.
LOCAL DUPLEX OPERATION (AN/GRC-122(*) MODELS). (CONT)
LOCAL DUPLEX TTY OPERATION, FSK (850 Hz), SSB NSK (85 Hz), 85 Hz DIVERSITY, OR 85 Hz +
VOICE
RT-662/GRC OR DUPLEX RT-662/GRC
EL6VR140
Setup Procedures
1. Check that modem test meter (1) indicates 20 vdc.
NOTE
Audio output level of RT-662/GRC must be maintained within receive limits indicated on
modem test meter to ensure proper modem operation. This level is indicated on modem
test meter when modem METER FUNCTION switch is set to RCV LEVEL in any reception
mode.
2. Set modem METER FUNCTION switch (2) to RCV LEVEL.
3. Adjust owr RT-662/GRC AUDIO GAIN control (3) completely counterclockwise.
2-124
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-33.
LOCAL DUPLEX OPERATION (AN/GRC-122(*) MODELS). (CONT)
4. Set RT-662/GRC SERVICE SELECTOR switch (4) for mode of operation desired.
SWITCH POSITION
SSB
SSB
SSB
FSK
SSB
OPERATION
I
85 Hz
85 Hz diversity
85 Hz + voice
850 Hz
85 Hz
NSK
NSK
NSK
NSK
5. Adjust duplex RT-662/GRC SERVICE SELECTOR switch (4) to same setting as step 4.
6. Set modem ONE WAY-DUPLEX switch (5) to DUPLEX.
NOTE
In the absence of received tty signal, modem MODE SELECTOR switch may be turned to
VOICE to prevent tty’s from running open.
7. Set modem MODE SELECTOR switch (6) for mode of operation desired.
OPERATION
SWITCH POSITION
SSB NSK
fsk operation
nsk operation
nsk diversity
nsk plus voice
VOICE
850 Hz
85 Hz
85 Hz DIVERSITY
85 Hz + VOICE
8. Set modem METER FUNCTION switch (2) to DC LOOP NO. 1 or DC LOOP NO. 2, to monitor dc
loop no. 1 or dc loop no. 2.
9. Adjust modem SCOPE INTENSITY control (7) for a clear indication on modem crt as illustrated
on page 2-115.
NOTE
Steps 10 and 14 apply to 850 Hz operation only. Use crt signal pattern illustration given
on page 2-115 as a guide.
10. Adjust modem BFO control (8) for crt indication of two ellipses of equal amplitude (when
receiving baudot code). If mark-hold signal is being received, only one ellipse will appear
on crt screen.
11. Adjust modem AUDIO GAIN control (9) for a comfortable listening level.
2-125
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-33.
LOCAL DUPLEX OPERATION (AN/GRC-122(*) MODELS). (CONT)
LOCAL DUPLEX TTY OPERATION FSK (850 Hz), SSB NSK (85 Hz), 85 Hz DIVERSITY, OR 85 Hz +
VOICE (CONT)
Reception
NOTE
Audio output level of RT-662/GRC must be maintained within receive limits indicated on
modem test meter to ensure proper modem operation. If received level is not within
receive limits, adjust RT-662/GRC audio gain control for proper meter reading.
If operation and self-test on AN/UGC-74A(V)3 is completed (para 2-28), AN/UGC74A(V)3 is ready for reception.
EL6VR141
12.
Set duplex TT-98/FG MOTOR (1) and LIGHT (2) switches to ON, to print page copy of
received message.
EL6VR142
2-126
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-33.
LOCAL DUPLEX OPERATION (AN/GRC-122(*) MODELS). (CONT)
EL6VR143
13. Set modem RECEIVE-REV/NORM switch (3) to REV if garbled copy is received when operating
in 850 Hz operation.
NOTE
TT-76(*)/GGC is not able to receive for a punched tape copy unless TT-76 OWR-DXSEND/DX-RECEIVE switch is set to DX-RECEIVE. This switch is located on Switch
Assembly SA-1555/GRC-142 in AN/GRC-122 Plain and C models and Switch Assembly
SA-1650/GRC in AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, and E models.
14. Set switch assembly TT-76 OWR-DX-SEND/DX RECEIVE switch to DX RECEIVE.
15. Set TT-76(*)/GGC POWER (4), MOTOR (5), and LIGHT (6) switches to ON to make punched
tape copy of received message.
Keyboard Transmission
NOTE
To transmit from TT-98/FG keyboard, do steps 16 and 17. To transmit from AN/UGC74A(V)3, do steps 16 and 18. To transmit from TT-76(*)/GGC do steps 16, 19, and
20. After a message is sent, always set modem RCV-SEND switch to RCV.
16. Set modem RCV-SEND switch (7) to SEND.
17. Set TT-98/FG MOTOR (1) and LIGHT (2) switches to ON and operate keyboard.
18. Send message from AN/ UGC-74A(V)3 as given in TM 11-5815-602-10.
Change 2
2-127
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-33.
LOCAL DUPLEX OPERATION (AN/GRC-122(*) MODELS). (CONT)
LOCAL DUPLEX TTY OPERATION, FSK (850 Hz), SSB NSK (85 Hz), 85 Hz DIVERSITY, OR 85 Hz +
VOICE (CONT)
NOTE
TT-76(*)/GGC keyboard is not able to transmit when TT-76 OWR-DX-SEND/DXRECEIVE switch is set to DX-RECEIVE. This switch is located on Switch Assembly SA1555/GRC-142 in AN/GRC-122 Plain and C models and Switch Assembly SA-1650/GRC
in AN/GRC-122A, B, D, and E models. In all AN/GRC-122 models with MK-2488/G, the
TT-76(*)/GGC is connected only to the SEND channel. The switch assembly has no control
over the TT-76(*)/GGC receiver.
19. Set switch assembly TT-76 OWR-DX-SEND/DX RECEIVE switch to DX SEND.
In all AN/GRC-122 models with MK-2488/G, the TT-76(*)/GGC is connected only to the SEND channel
The switch assembly has no control over the TT-76(*)/GGC receiver.
20. Set TT-76(*)/GGC POWER, MOTOR, and LIGHT switches to ON and operate keyboard.
NOTE
After message is sent, always set modem RCV-SEND switch to RCV.
With TT-98/FG MOTOR switch set to ON, page copy of transmitted punched tape message is automatically printed In AN/GRC-122 models without MK-2488/G. In AN/GRC-122 models
with MK-2488/G. In AN/GRC-122 models with MK-2488/G, a home copy printed page is available if
the HOME COPY switch is set to REC 2.
Punched Tape Transmission (TD)
21.
22.
23.
24.
2-128
Insert prepared punched tape in TT-76(*)/GGC transmitter-distributor (1).
Set TT-76 OWR-DX-SEND/DX RECEIVE switch to DX RECEIVE.
Set modem RCV-SEND switch to SEND.
Set START-STOP-FEED RETRACT lever (2) to START.
Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-33.
LOCAL DUPLEX OPERATION (AN/GRC-122(*) MODELS). (CONT)
85 Hz + Voice Transmission and Reception
NOTE
If 85 Hz + voice operation is required, do steps 1 through 11 and set equipment switches
for 85 Hz + VOICE operation. Do applicable procedures for reception, keyboard transmission, or punched tape transmission.
25. Press microphone push-to-talk switch and speak into microphone to transmit, and release
push-to-talk switch to receive.
2-34.
REMOTE OPERATION.
Perform applicable remote setup procedures for remote equipment (para 2-20). Owr operation is the
same for all AN/GRC-122/142(*) models. Duplex and pony circuit operation applies to AN/GRC122(*) models only. Before attempting any remote operations, set up shelter equipment for local owr
mode of operation required (para 2-32).
REMOTE TELEPHONE OPERATION
Remote telephone operation requires two TA-312/PT’s. In early models, remote Telephone Set
TA-312/PT operation is not possible in cw operation. Remote box and AN/GRA-6 may also be used for
remote telephone communications.
EL6VR145
1.
2.
3.
4.
Set local and remote TA-312/PT CIRCUIT SELECTOR switch (1) to LB.
Set local and remote TA-312/PT EXT-INT switch (2) to INT.
Set local and remote TA-312/PT buzzer volume control (3) for a comfortable listening level.
Signal local or remote operator for conversation.
NOTE
During secure operation, TA-312/PT buzzer does not operate but shelter switch
assembly call lamp flickers to indicate remote operator is calling.
2-129
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-34.
REMOTE OPERATION. (CONT)
REMOTE BOX AND AN/GRA-6 (CONTROL GROUP) TELEPHONE OPERATION
Remote box and control group are used as telephone link when setting up for any mode of remote radio
operation.
EL6VR146
EL6VR147
1. In shelter, connect handset to local control AUDIO connector (l).
2. Set local control REMOTE switch (2) to TEL ONLY.
3. At remote site, set remote control SELECTOR switch (3) to TEL.
NOTE
Either local or remote operator can signal and talk to operator at opposite end by
cranking local or remote control generator handcrank and speaking in to handset.
4. Rotate local (4) or remote (5) generator handcrank to signal operator at opposite end for
conversation.
2-130
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-34.
REMOTE OPERATION. (CONT)
REMOTE OWR CW, SSB VOICE, OR COMPATIBLE AM. VOICE OPERATION
NOTE
Do step 1 for AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models. Do step 2 for AN/GRC-122/142A,
B, D, and E models.
1. At shelter, set control panel SA-1554/GRC-142 TEL-REMOTE CW switch to REMOTE CW.
2. At shelter, set switch assembly SA-1650/GRC LOCAL-REMOTE switch to REMOTE.
RT-662/GRC
EL6VR148
3. At shelter, set RT-662/GRC SERVICE SELECTOR switch (6) for mode of operation required.
SWITCH POSITION
CW
SSB NSK
AM
OPERATION
cw operation
ssb voice operation
compatible am.
2-131
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-34. REMOTE OPERATION. (CONT)
REMOTE OWR CW, SSB VOICE, OR COMPATIBLE AM VOICE OPERATION (CONT)
EL6VR149
EL6VR150
Transmission and Reception
4. To transmit voice at remote site, set remote control SELECTOR switch (2) completely
counterclockwise and press microphone push-to-talk button.
NOTE
If operator at shelter indicates radio set did not key, release microphone
push-to-talk button and Interchange field wire pair connections of line L1
and line L2 of remote control.
2-132
Change 4
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-34.
REMOTE OPERATION. (CONT)
5. To transmit cw, connect and operate key telegraph. To receive cw, connect headset to remote
control AUDIO connector (3).
NOTE
Make sure modem RCV-SEND switch is set at RCV to prevent continuous keying of
radio set.
REMOTE OWR FSK, SSB NSK, 85 Hz DIVERSITY, OR 85 Hz + VOICE OPERATION (non-secure only)
Perform procedures for remote box and control group telephone operations given previously in this
paragraph. Make sure polarity of dc loop current to remote box is correct (plus side of field wire pair to
+ terminal of remote box).
1. At shelter, set modem and RT-662/GRC controls for same mode of tty operation selected (local
owr operation, para 2-32) for remote owr tty operation.
WARNING
An 80 vdc difference of potential exists between field wires when shelter switch assembly
LOCAL-REMOTE switch is set to REMOTE. Care must be taken when handling field wire
to prevent electrical shock to personnel.
NOTE
LOCAL-REMOTE switch is located on Switch Assembly SA-1554/GRC-142 in AN/GRC122/142 Plain and C models and Switch Assembly SA-1650/GRC in AN/GRC-122/
142A, B, D, and E models.
2. At shelter, set switch assembly LOCAL-REMOTE switch to REMOTE.
3. At shelter, check for proper tty dc loop no. 1 current (para 2-22) and adjust if necessary.
Change 2
2-133
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-34.
REMOTE OPERATION. (CONT)
REMOTE OWR FSK, SSB NSK, 85 Hz DIVERSITY, OR 85 Hz + VOICE OPERATION (CONT)
Monitoring Remote Site Transmission or Reception
NOTE
To monitor remote site transmitted or received message on TT-98/FG, do step 4. To
monitor remote site transmitted or received message on AN/UGC-74A(V)3, do step 5.
For punched tape copy of remote site transmitted or received message on TT-76(*)/
GGC, do step 6.
2-134
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-34.
REMOTE OPERATION. (CONT)
EL6VR153
4. At shelter, set TT-98/FG MOTOR (1) and LIGHTS (2) switches to ON to print page copy of
transmitted or received message.
5. If operation and self-test on AN/UGC-74A(V)3 is completed, AN/UGC-74A(V)3 will print page
copy of transmitted or received message.
6. At shelter, set TT-76(*)/GGC POWER (3), MOTOR (4) and LIGHTS (5) switches to ON for
punched tape copy of transmitted or received message.
Remote Reception
NOTE
To receive page copy at remote site on TT-98/FG, do step 7. To receive page copy at
remote site on AN/UGC-74(V)3, do step 8. To receive punched tape copy at remote
site on TT-76(*)/GGC, do step 9.
7.
8.
9.
Set remote TT-98/FG MOTOR (1) and LIGHT (2) switches to ON, to print page copy of received message.
If operation and self-test on AN/UGC-74A(V)3 is completed, remote AN/UGC-74A(V)3 will
print page copy of received message.
Set remote TT-76(*)/GGC POWER (3), MOTOR (4), and LIGHT (5) switches to ON for
punched tape copy of received message.
Remote Keyboard Transmission
NOTE
To transmit from TT-98/FG keyboard, do steps 10 and 11. To transmit from AN/UGC74A(V)3 keyboard do steps 10 and 12. To transmit from TT-76(*)/GGC keyboard do
steps 10 and 13.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Set remote box SEND-RECEIVE switch (6) to SEND.
Set remote TT-98/FG MOTOR (1) and LIGHT (2) switches to ON and operate keyboard.
Send message from AN/UGC-74A(V)3 as given in TM 11-5815-602-12.
Set remote TT-76(*)/GGC POWER (3), MOTOR (4), and LIGHT (5) switches to ON and
operate keyboard.
NOTE
Punched tape copy of transmitted message is automatically made when transmitting
from TT-76(*)/GGC keyboard.
2-135
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-34.
REMOTE OPERATION. (CONT)
REMOTE OWR FSK, SSB NSK, 85 Hz DIVERSITY, OR 85 Hz + VOICE OPERATION (CONT)
Remote Punched Tape Transmission
TT-76(*)/GGC
EL6VR136
EL6VR155
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Set remote TT-76(*)/GGC POWER, MOTOR, and LIGHT switches to ON.
Set remote TT-76(*)/GGC SELECTOR switch to position 2.
Insert prepared punched tape into remote TT-76(*)/GGC transmitter-distributor (l).
Set remote box SEND-RECEIVE switch (2) to SEND.
Set remote TT-76(*)/GGC START-STOP-FEED RETRACT switch (3) to START, to transmit
message.
After message is sent, set TT-76(*)/GGC START-STOP-FEED RETRACT switch (3) to STOP.
Set remote box SEND-RECV switch to RECV.
85 Hz + Voice Remote Transmission and Reception
21.
22.
2-136
Connect microphone to remote box AUDIO connector (4).
Press microphone push-to-talk button to transmit voice and release push-to-talk button for
voice reception.
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-34.
REMOTE OPERATION. (CONT)
TTY ORDER WIRE (PONY CIRCUIT) OPERATION (AN/GRC-122(*) MODELS)
Tty order wire pony circuit is used in AN/GRC-122(*) models only. Tty order wire circuit provides tty
communications over field wire between duplex TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3, located in shelter,
and a remote TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3. If operation and self-test on AN/UGC-74A(V)3 is
completed, no further switch adjustments are required to print page copy. If owr operation is required
simultaneously with pony circuit operation, also perform local owr procedures (para 2-32) or remote
owr procedures (para 2-34).
NOTE
LOCAL-REMOTE switch is located on Switch Assembly SA-1554/GRC-142 in AN/GRC122/142 Plain and C models and Switch Assembly SA-1650/GRC in AN/GRC-122/142A,
B, D, and E models.
1. At shelter, set switch assembly LOCAL-REMOTE switch to REMOTE.
TT-98/FG KEYBOARD
EL6VR141
Reception From Remote Site
NOTE
To receive page copy on TT-98/FG from remote site, do step 2. To receive page copy
on AN/UGC-74A(V)3 from remote site, do step 3.
2. At shelter, set duplex TT-98/FG MOTOR (1) and LIGHT (2) switches to ON to print page
copy of received message.
3. At shelter, if operation and self-test on AN/UGC-74A(V)3 is completed, AN/UGC-74A(V)3
will print page copy of received message.
2-137
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-34.
REMOTE OPERATION. (CONT)
TTY ORDER WIRE (PONY CIRCUIT) OPERATION (AN/GRC-122(*) MODELS) (CONT)
Reception From Remote Site
TT-76(8)/GGC KEYBOARD
EL6VR156
NOTE
TT-76(*)/GGC is not able to receive for punched tape copy unless TT-76 OWR-DXSEND/DX RECEIVE switch is set to DX-RECEIVE. This switch is located on Switch
Assembly SA-1555/GRC-142 in AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models and Switch
Assembly SA-1650/GRC in AN/GRC-122/142 A, B, D, and E models.
4. At shelter, set TT-76 OWR-DX-SEND/DX RECEIVE switch to DX RECEIVE.
5. At shelter, set TT-76(*)/GGC POWER (1), MOTOR (2), and LIGHT (3) switches to ON for
punched tape copy of message from remote site.
Transmission to Shelter
NOTE
To transmit on (pony) TT-98/FG from remote site, do step 6. To transmit on (pony)
AN/UGC-74A(V)3 from remote site, do step 7.
2-138
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-34.
REMOTE OPERATION. (CONT)
TT-98/FG KEYBOARD
EL6VR157
6. At remote site, if operation and self-test on (pony) AN/UGC-74A(V)3 is complete, transmit
message as given in TM 11-5815-602-12.
7. Set remote (pony) TT-98/FG MOTOR (4) and LIGHT (5) switches to ON and operate keyboard to transmit tty messages to shelter.
REMOTE DUPLEX FSK, SSB NSK, OR 85 Hz DIVERSITY OPERATION
Remote duplex tty operation is similar to local duplex operation except that duplex 85 Hz + voice
operation is not possible from remote site. Perform remote box and control group telephone
operations given in this paragraph. Make sure polarity of dc loop current to remote box is correct
(positive side of field wire pair to + terminal of remote box).
1. At shelter, set RT-662/GRC, duplex RT-662/GRC, and modem controls for same mode of tty
operation selected (local duplex operation para 2-33) for remote duplex tty operation.
WARNING
An 80 vdc difference in potential exists between field wires when shelter switch assembly
LOCAL-REMOTE switch is set to REMOTE. Care must be taken when handling field wire
to prevent electrical shock to personnel.
NOTE
LOCAL-REMOTE switch is located on Switch Assembly SA-1554/GRC-142 in AN/GRC122 Plain and C models and Switch Assembly SA-1650/GRC in AN/GRC-122/142A, B,
D, and E models.
2. At shelter, set switch assembly LOCAL-REMOTE switch to REMOTE.
3. At shelter, check for proper dc loop no. 1 and dc loop no. 2 currents (para 2-22) and adjust if
necessary.
2-139
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-34.
REMOTE OPERATION. (CONT)
REMOTE DUPLEX FSK, SSB NSK OR 85 Hz DIVERSITY OPERATION (CONT)
Monitoring Remote Transmission
NOTE
To monitor remote site transmitted message on TT-98/FG, do step 4. To monitor
remote site transmitted message on AN/UGC-74A(V)3, do step 5. For punched tape
copy of remote site transmitted message, do step 6.
4. At shelter, set TT-98/FG MOTOR and LIGHT switches to ON to print page copy of transmitted
message.
5. If operation and self-test on AN/UGC-74A(V)3 is completed (para 2-28), AN/UGC-74A(V)3
will print page copy of transmitted message.
6. At shelter, set TT-76(*)/GGC POWER, MOTOR, and LIGHT switches to ON for punched tape
copy of transmitted message.
Monitoring Remote Reception
NOTE
To monitor remote site received message on TT-98/FG, do step 7. To monitor remote
site received message on AN/UGC-74A(V)3, do step 8. For punched tape copy of
remote received message on TT-76(*)/GGC, do steps 9 and 10.
7. At shelter, set duplex TT-98/FG MOTOR and LIGHT switches to ON to print page copy of
received message.
8. If operation and self-test on AN/UGC-74A(V)3 is completed (para 2-28), AN/UGC-74A(V)3
will print page copy of received message.
NOTE
TT-76(*)/GGC is not able to receive for punched tape copy unless TT-76 OWR-DXSEND/DX-RECEIVE switch is set to DX-RECEIVE. This switch is located on Switch
Assembly SA-1555/GRC-142 in AN/GRC-122 Plain and C models and Switch Assembly
SA-1650/GRC in AN/GRC-122A, B, D, and E models.
9. At shelter, set TT-76 OWR-DX-SEND/DX-RECEIVE switch to DX-RECEIVE.
10. At shelter, set TT-76(*)/GGC POWER, MOTOR, and LIGHT switches to ON for punched tape
copy of received message.
Remote Reception
NOTE
To receive page copy at remote site on TT-98/FG, do step 11. To receive page copy at
remote site on AN/UGC-74A(V)3, do step 12. To receive punched tape copy of message on TT-76(*)/GGC, do steps 13 and 14.
11. At remote site, set remote duplex TT-98/FG MOTOR and LIGHT switches to ON, to print page
copy of received message.
2-140
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-34.
12.
REMOTE OPERATION. (CONT)
At remote site, if operation and self-test on duplex AN/UGC-74A(V)3 is completed (para
2-28), AN/UGC-74A(V)3 will print page copy of received messages.
NOTE
TT-76(*)/GGC is not able to receive for punched tape copy unless TT-76 OWR-DXSEND/DX-RECEIVE switch is set to DX-RECEIVE. This switch is located on Switch
Assembly SA-1555/GR-142 in AN/GRC-122 Plain and C models and Switch Assembly
SA-1650/GRC in AN/GRC-122A, B, D, and E models.
13.
14.
At shelter, set TT-76 OWR-DX-SEND/DX-RECEIVE switch to DX-RECEIVE.
At shelter, set TT-76(*)/GGC POWER, MOTOR, and LIGHT switches to ON, for punched tape
copy of received message.
Remote Keyboard Transmission
NOTE
To transmit from remote TT-98/FG keyboard, do steps 15 and 16. To transmit from
remote AN/UGC-74A(V)3 keyboard, do steps 15 and 17. To transmit from remote TT76(*)/GGC keyboard, do steps 15, 18, and 19.
15.
16.
17.
Set remote box SEND-RECEIVE switch to SEND.
Set remote TT-98/FG MOTOR and LIGHT switches to ON and operate keyboard.
Send message from AN/UGC-74A(V)3 as given in TM 11-5815-602-10.
NOTE
TT-76(*)/GGC is not able to transmit from keyboard unless TT-76 OWR-DX SEND/DXRECEIVE switch is set to DX-SEND. This switch is located on Switch Assembly SA1555/GRC-142 in AN/GRC-122 Plain and C models and Switch Assembly SA-1650/GRC
in AN/GRC-122A, B, D, and E models.
18.
19.
At shelter, set TT-76 OWR-DX-SEND/DX-RECEIVE switch to DX-SEND.
Set remote TT-76(*)/GGC POWER, MOTOR, and LIGHT to ON, and operate keyboard.
Remote Punched Tape Transmission (TD)
20. At shelter, set TT-76 OWR-DX-SEND/DX-RECEIVE switch to DX-SEND.
21. Set remote TT-76(*)/GGC POWER, MOTOR, and LIGHT switches to ON.
22. Set remote box SEND-RECEIVE switch to SEND.
Change 2
2-141
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-34.
REMOTE OPERATION. (CONT)
REMOTE DUPLEX FSK, SSB NSK, OR 85 Hz DIVERSITY OPERATION (CONT)
TT-76(8)/GGC
EL6VR136
23.
Insert prepared punched tape into remote TT-76(*)/GGC transmitter-distributor (1).
24.
Set remote TT-76(*)/GGC START-STOP-FEED RETRACT lever (2) to START.
25.
After message is sent, set remote box SEND-RECEIVE switch to STOP.
26.
Set TT-76(*)/GGC START-STOP FEED RETRACT lever (2) to STOP.
2-142 Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-34. REMOTE OPERATION (CONT)
REMOTE OWR FSK, SSB NSK 85 HZ DIVERSITY, OR 85 HZ + VOICE OPERATION FOR
MODELS WITH MK-2488/G
Perform applicable remote setup procedures for remote equipment (para 2-20.1). OWR operation is the
same for all AN/GRC-142(*) models. Duplex circuit operation applies to AN/GRC-122(*) models with MK2488/G only. Before attempting any remote operations, set up shelter equipment for local OWR mode of
operation required (para 2-32).
2-34.1 REMOTE OPERATION OF MODELS WITH MK-2488/G (CONT)
REMOTE OWR, FSK, SSB NSK 85 HZ DIVERSITY, OR 85 HZ + VOICE OPERATION FOR
AN/GRC-142 MODELS WITH MK-2488/G ONLY.
Perform remote box and control group telephone operations given in paragraph 2-34.
1.
At shelter, set modem and RT-662/GRC controls for same mode of TTY operation selected (local OWR
operation, para 2-32) remote OWR TTY operation. Be sure that the modem REC/SEND switches in the
REC position.
WARNING
AN 80 vdc difference of potential exists between field wires when shelter switch assembly
LOCAL-REMOTE switch is set to REMOTE. Care must be taken when handling field wire to
prevent electrical sock to personnel.
NOTE
LOCAL-REMOTE switch is located on Switch Assembly SA-1554/GRC-142 in AN/GRC-122/142
Plain and C models with MK-2488/G and Switch Assembly SA- 1650/GRC in AN/GRC-122/142A, B,
D and E models with MK-2488/G.
2.
At shelter, set switch assembly LOCAL-REMOTE switch (1) to REMOTE.
Change 2
2-142.1
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-34. REMOTE OPERATION (CONT)
3.
If monitoring of remote site transmission and reception is not going to be performed, set the OWR J-4024/U
POWER switch (1) to OFF and disconnect the W2 cable phone plug from the OWR-DX-SEND jack (J9 on
Switch Box SA-1554/GRC-142 or J19 on Switch Assembly SA-1650/GRC).
CAUTION
Failure to remove the W12 cable connection from the switch assembly will prevent remote
operation when the OWR J-4024/U is OFF.
4.
When the remote and shelter equipment involved are turned on, check for proper tty dc loop no. 1
current (para 2-22) and adjust if necessary. Do this check at the shelter.
TT-98/FG KEYBOARD
EL6VR141
5. At shelter (AN/GRC-142, Plain, A and B models with MK-2488/G) set TT-98/FG MOTOR (1) and LIGHTS (2)
switches to ON to print page copy of transmitted or received message.
2-142.2 Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-34. REMOTE OPERATION (CONT)
TT76(*)/GGC KEYBOARD
EL6VR152
If operation and self-test on AN/UGC-74A(V)3 is completed, AN/UGC-74A(V)3 (in AN/GRC-142 C, D and E
models with MK-2488/G) will print page copy of transmitted or received message.
At shelter, set TT-76(*)/GGC POWER (3), MOTOR (4) and LIGHTS (5) switches to ON for punched tape
copy of transmitted or received message.
Remote Reception.
8.
Set the remote box SEND-RECEIVE Switch (6) to RECEIVE.
REMOTE BOX
NOTE
To receive page copy at remote site on TT-98/FG, do step 9. To receive page copy at
remote site on AN/UGC-74(V)3, do step 10. To receive punched tape copy at remote site
on TT-76(*)/GGC, do step 11.
9.
Set remote TT-98/FG MOTOR (1) AND LIGHT (2) switches to ON, to print page copy of received message
(Remote J-4024/U HOME COPY switch to OFF or REC 1).
10.
If operation and self-test on AN/UGC-74A(V)3 is completed, remote AN/UGC-74A(V)3 will print page
copy of received message. (Remote J-4024/U HOME COPY switch to OFF or REC 1).
11. Set remote TT-76(*)/GGC POWER (3), MOTOR (4), and LIGHT (5) switches to ON for punched tape copy
of received message. (Remote J-4024/U HOME COPY switch to OFF or REC 2).
Change 2 2-142.3
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-34. REMOTE OPERATION (CONT)
Remote Keyboard Transmission in models with MK-2488/G
NOTE
To transmit from TT-98/FG keyboard, do steps 12, 13, 14 and 18. To transmit from AN/UGC74A(V)3 keyboard, do steps 12, 13, 15 and 18. To transmit from TT-76(*)/GGC keyboard do
steps 12, 16, 17 and 18.
12. Set remote box SEND-RECEIVE switch (6) to SEND.
13. Set remote J-4024/U TRANSMIT switch to position “2”.
14. Set remote TT-98/FG MOTOR (1) and LIGHT (2) switches to ON and operate keyboard.
15. Send message from AN/UGC-74A(V)3 as given in TM 11-5815-602-10.
16. Set remote J-4024/U TRANSMIT switch to position “1“.
17. Set remote TT-76(*)/GGC POWER (3), MOTOR (4), and LIGHT (5) switches to ON and operate keyboard.
18. When transmission is complete, set remote box SEND-RECEIVE switch (6) to RECEIVE.
NOTE
Punched tape copy of transmitted message is made when transmitting from either remote
TTY if the J-4024/U HOME COPY switch (3) is set to REC 1. A printed page copy of the transmitted message is made when transmitting from either remote TTY if the remote J-4024/U
HOME COPY switch is set to REC 2.
2-142.4 Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-34. REMOTE OPERATION (CONT)
REMOTE OWR FSK, SSB NSK, 85 Hz DIVERSITY, OR 85 Hz + VOICE OPERATION (CONT)
AN/GRC-142(*) MODELS WITH MK-2488/G ONLY.
Remote Punched Tape Transmission
19. Set remote J-4024/U TRANSMIT switch (2) to position “ 1“.
20. Set remote TT-76(*)/GGC POWER, MOTOR, and LIGHT switches to ON.
21. Insert prepared punched tape into remote TT-76(*)/GGC transmitter-distributor (2).
22 Set remote box SEND-RECEIVE switch (4) to SEND.
23. Set remote TT-76(*)/GGC START-STOP-FEED RETRACT switch (3) to START, to transmit message
24. After message is sent, set TT-76(*)/GGC START-STOP-FEED RETRACT switch (3) to STOP.
25. Set remote box SEND-RECEIVE switch (4) to RECEIVE.
85 Hz + Voice Remote Transmission and Reception
26. Connect microphone to remote box AUDIO connector (5).
27. Press microphone push-to-talk button to transmit voice and release push-to-talk button for voice
reception.
Change 2
2-142.5
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-34. REMOTE OPERATION (CONT)
REMOTE DUPLEX FSK, SSB NSK, OR 85 Hz DIVERSITY OPERATION AN/GRC-122(*) MODELS
WITH MK-2488/G ONLY
Remote duplex TTY operation is similar to local duplex operation except that duplex 85 Hz voice operation is
not possible from remote side. Perform remote box and control group telephone operations given in
paragraph 2-34.
1.
At shelter, set RT-662/GRC, duplex RT-662/GRC, and modem controls for same mode of TTY operation
selected (local duplex operation para 2-33) for remote duplex TTY operation.
WARNING
An 80 VDC difference in potential exists between field wires when shelter switch assembly
LOCAL-REMOTE switch is set to REMOTE. Care must be taken when handling field wire to
prevent electrical shock to personnel.
NOTE
LOCAL-REMOTE switch is located on Switch Assembly SA-1554/GRC-142 in AN/GRC-122 Plain
and C models and Switch Assembly SA-1650/GRC-122/142A, B, D, and E models.
2
At the shelter, set the OWR and Duplex J-4024/U POWER switches (1) to OFF.
2-142.6 Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-34. REMOTE OPERATION (CONT)
3.
At the shelter, set the switch assembly LOCAL-REMOTE switch (2) to REMOTE.
4.
At the shelter, disconnect the W11 and W12 cable phone plugs from the switch assembly OWR-DX SEND jack (3) and the DX-REC-PONY jack (4) (J8 and J9 on Switch Box SA-1554/GRC-142 in the AN/GRC122 Plain and C models with MK-2488/G or J18 on Switch Assembly SA-1650/GRC in the AN/GRC-122A, B,
D and E models with MK-2488/G).
CAUTION
Failure to remote the W11 and W12 cable connections from the switch assembly will
prevent remote operation when OWR and duplex J-4024/U’s are OFF.
5.
When remote and shelter equipment are turned on at shelter, check for proper dc loop no. 1
loop no. 2 currents (para 2-22) and adjust if necessary.
Change 2
and dc
2-142.7
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-34. REMOTE OPERATION (CONT)
REMOTE DUPLEX FSK, SSB, NSK OR 85 Hz DIVERSITY OPERATION (CONT) AN/GRC-122(*)
MODELS WITH MK-2488/G ONLY
Monitoring Remote Transmission and Reception.
Monitoring of remote site transmission or reception in the AN/GRC-122(*) models with MK-2488/G is not
possible when the J-4024/U’s and DLED’s in the OWR and Duplex positions are Installed for normal Local
duplex operation. If it is essential that remote site transmissions and receptions be monitored in the shelter,
the OWR and Duplex J-4024/U must both be connected to W11 and W12 respectively for OWR OPERATION
(see para 2-21.1 for OWR installation procedures). The DLED’s must also beset up for OWR operation (half
duplex). When the configuration of the J-4024/U’s and DLED’s in the AN/GRC-122(*) models with MK2488/G have been modified for OWR operation, monitoring of the remote site transmissions and receptions
can be performed as follows:
NOTE
To monitor remote site transmitted message on TT-98/FG, do step 6. To monitor remote
site transmitted message on AN/UGC-74(A(V)3, do step 7. For punched tape copy of
remote site transmitted message do step 8.
6.
At shelter (AN/GRC-122 Plain, A and B models with MK-2488/G), set TT-98/FG MOTOR and LIGHT
switches to ON to print page copy of transmitted message.
7.
If operation and self-test on AN/UGC-74A(V)3 is (para 2-28), AN/UGC-74A(V)3 (AN/GRC-122 C, D & E
models with MK-2488/G) will print page copy of transmitted message
8.
At shelter, (AN/GRC-122(*) models with MK-2488/G) set TT-75(*)/GGC POWER, MOTOR, and LIGHT
switches to ON for punched tape copy of transmitted message
Monitoring Remote Reception.
NOTE
To monitor remote site received message on TT-98/FG, do step 9. To monitor site received
message on AN/UGC-74A(V)3, do step 10. For punched tape copy of remote received
message on TT-76(*)/GGC do steps 11, 12, and 13.
9.
10.
At shelter, set duplex TT-98/FG MOTOR and LIGHT switches to ON to print page copy of received
message.
If operation and self-test on AN/UGC-74A(V)3 is completed (para 2-28), AN/UGC-74A(V)3 will print page
copy of received message.
2-142.8 Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-34. REMOTE OPERATION (CONT)
REMOTE DUPLEX FSK, SSB NSK OR 85 Hz DIVERSITY OPERATION FOR AN/GRC-122
MODELS WITH MK-2488/G ONLY (CONT)
NOTE
TT-76(*)/GGC is not able to receive punched tape copy unless it is connected to the Duplex
J-4024/U.
11.
At the shelter disconnect the W5 connector from the OWR J-4024/U J7 (1) and connect it to J8, TTY
RECEIVE (2) on the Duplex J-4024/U.
12.
Make sure that the Duplex J-4024/U HOME COPY switch (3) is set to OFF and the POWER switch (4) is
set to ON.
13.
At shelter, set TT-76(*)/GGC POWER, MOTOR, and LIGHT switches to ON for punched tape copy of
received message.
Remote Reception
NOTE
To receive page copy at remote site on TT-98/FG, do step 14.
To receive page copy at remote site on AN/UGC-74A(V)3, do
step 15. To receive punched taped copy of message on
TT-76(*)/GGC, do steps 13 and 14.
14.
At remote site, set remote duplex TT-98/FG MOTOR and LIGHT switches to ON, to print page copy of
received message. Remote J-4024/U HOME COPY switch to OFF or REC.
Change 2
2-142.9
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-34. REMOTE OPERATION (CONT)
REMOTE DUPLEX FSK, SSB NSK OR 85 HZ DIVERSITY OPERATION FOR AN/GRC-122
MODELS WITH MK-2488/G (CONT)
15. At remote site, if operation and self-test on duplex AN/UGC-74A(V)3 is completed (para 2-28),
AN/UGC-74A(V)3 will print page copy of received messages. (Remote J-4024/U HOME COPY switch to
OFF or REC 2).
16. At shelter, set TT-76(*)/GGC POWER, MOTOR, and LIGHT switches to ON, for punched tape copy of
received message. (Remote J-4024/U HOME COPY switch to OFF or REC 2).
Remote Keyboard Transmission
NOTE
To transmit from remote TT-98/FG keyboard do steps 17, 18, and 19. To transmit from
remote AN/UGC-74A(V) 3 keyboard, do steps 17, 18 and 20. To transmit fro remote TT76(*)/GGC keyboard do steps 21 and 22.
NOTE
A HOME COPY of the transmitted message can be made on punched tape or printer page,
To obtain a punched tape of the transmitted message, set the HOME COPY switch on the
remote J-4024/U to REC 1. To obtain a printed page COpy of the transmitted message, set
the HOME COPY switch on the Remote J-4024/U to REC 2.
17. Set remote box SEND-RECEIVE switch to SEND.
18. Set remote J-4024/U TRANSMIT switch to “2”.
19. Set remote TT-98/FG MOTOR and LIGHT switches to ON and operate keyboard.
20. Send message from AN/UGC-74A(V)3, as given in TM 11-5815-602-12.
21. Set remote J-4024/U TRANSMIT switch to ”1”.
22. Set remote TT-76(*)/GGC POWER, MOTOR, and LIGHT to ON, and operate keyboard.
Remote Punched Tape Transmission (TD)
23. Set the remote J-4024/U TRANSMIT switch to ”1“.
24. Set remote TT-76(*)/GGC POWER, MOTOR, and LIGHT switches to ON.
25. Set remote box SEND-RECEIVE switch to SEND.
2-142.10 Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-34. REMOTE OPERATION (CONT)
REMOTE DUPLEX FSK, SSB NSK, OR 85 Hz DIVERSITY OPERATION AN/GRC-122(*) MODELS
WITH MK-2488/G ONLY (CONT)
TT-76(*)/GGC
EL6VR136
26. Insert prepared punched tape into remote TT-76(*)/GGC transmitter-distributor (1).
27. Set remote TT-76(*)/GGC START-STOP-FEED RETRACT LEVER (2) TO START.
28.
After message is sent, set remote box SEND-RECEIVE switch to STOP.
29. SET TT-76(*)/GGC START-STOP FEED RETRACT lever (2) to STOP.
2-35.
STOPPING PROCEDURES.
AN/GRC-122/142(*) radio sets maybe placed in standby or completely shut down. Perform standby
procedure (para 2-36) when equipment is to be turned off for 1 hour or less. Perform complete
shutdown procedures (para 2-37) when equipment is to be turned off for more than 1 hour. In an
emergency, AN/GRC-122/142(*) shelters may be shut down immediately (para 2-38).
Change 2 2-142.11/(2-142.12 blank)
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-36.
STANDBY PROCEDURES.
Standby operating state enables operator to be prepared for immediate operation. If shelter has been
operating and standby condition is required, follow standby procedures. If operator desires a standby
condition after shutdown, perform preoperational procedures (para 2-24), preoperational
equipment settings (para 2-26), and standby procedures as listed below.
1. Set RT-662/GRC and duplex RT-662/GRC (used in AN/GRC-122(*) models only) SERVICE
SELECTOR switch (2) to STANDBY.
NOTE
Allow amplifier 2 minutes of cooling, then set PRIM PWR switch to OFF.
2. Set modem MODE SELECTOR switch to VOICE.
NOTE
To set TT-98/FG and duplex TT-98/FG in standby, do step 3. AN/UGC-74A(V)3
automatically goes into standby by itself.
3. Set TT-98/FG and duplex TT-98/FG MOTOR switch to OFF.
4. Set TT-76(*)/GGC POWER and MOTOR switches to OFF.
5. Set power distribution panel INVERTERS OWR and INVERTERS DX (used in AN/GRC-122(*)
models only) switches to OFF.
2-37.
COMPLETE SHUTDOWN OF SHELTER.
Perform complete shutdown procedures when equipment is to be turned off for more than 1 hour.
1. Set MHz and kHz on RT-662/GRC or duplex RT-662/GRC to 0.
2. Set RT-662/GRC and duplex RT-662/GRC (used in AN/GRC-122(*) models only)
SERVICE SELECTOR switch to STANDBY.
NOTE
Allow 2 minutes cooling period before performing step 3.
3. Set amplifier PRIM PWR switch to OFF.
4. Set RT-662/GRC SERVICE SELECTOR switch to OFF.
NOTE
Modem ON-OFF switch is only on MD-522A/GRC. To turn off MD-522/GRC, set MODE
SELECTOR switch to PWR OFF.
To shut down TT-98/FG and duplex TT-98/FG, do step 5. To shut down AN/UGC74A(V)3 or duplex AN/UGC-74A(V)3, do step 6.
2-143
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-37.
COMPLETE SHUTDOWN OF SHELTER. (CONT)
5. Set TT-98/FG and duplex TT-98/FG (used in AN/GRC-122(*) models only) MOTOR and LIGHT
switches to OFF.
6. Set AN/UGC-74A(V)3 and duplex AN/UGC-74A(V)3 (used in AN/GRC-122(*) models only)
POWER ON/OFF switch to OFF.
7. Set TT-76(*)/GGC MOTOR, POWER, and LIGHT switches to OFF.
NOTE
When operating in ac operation only, set electric heater ON-OFF switch to OFF. If using
all-fuel heater, set ON-OFF switch to OFF.
8. When using secure equipment, turn secure equipment off.
POWER switch on each J-4024/U and DLED to OFF.
9. Set modem ON-OFF switch to OFF.
In models with MK-2488/G, set the
10. Set all power distribution panel switches to OFF.
NOTE
For AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models, do step 11.
11. Set ac entrance box circuit breakers (1) to OFF.
2-38.
EMERGENCY STOPPING.
To shut down shelter in an emergency, do the following steps:
NOTE
For emergency stopping of AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models, do step 1 or 2. For
emergency stopping of AN/GRC-122/142A and B models, do step 3 or 4. For
emergency stopping of AN/GRC-122/142D and E models, do step 5.
2-144 Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-38.
EMERGENCY STOPPING. (CONT)
AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND C MODELS
EL6VR167
NOTE
When operating in dc mode, do step 1. When operating in ac mode, do step 2.
1. Pull MAIN circuit breaker (1) to OFF.
2. Set ac circuit breakers to OFF (page 2-8).
AN/GRC-122/142A AND B MODELS
EL6VR169
NOTE
When operating in dc mode, do step 3. When operating in ac mode, do step 4.
3. Pull DC MAIN circuit breaker (2) to OFF.
4. Set AC MAIN circuit breaker (3) to OFF.
2-145
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-38.
EMERGENCY STOPPING. (CONT)
AN/GRC-122/142D AND E MODELS
EL6VR170
5. Set AC-OFF-DC switch (1) to OFF.
2-39.
PREPARATION FOR MOVEMENT.
Perform procedures given below when AN/GRC-122/142(*) is being relocated or placed in storage.
REMOTE SETUP
Set all remote equipment power switches to OFF. Shut down generator or ac power source. Disconnect all interconnecting cables and install all connector and receptacle covers. Disconnect
ground strap from AN/UGC-74A(V)3. Remove ground rod from ground. Remove tty’s and/or
AN/UGC-74A(V)3 from mounting and return to depot through normal supply channels. Store control
group AN/GRA-6 components and ground rod in respective places in shelter.
SHELTER
Set all equipment power switches and power distribution panel switches to OFF except light switches.
Loosen all tty slides and slide tty’s into storage position (AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models only).
Remove all secure equipment and return to depot through normal supply channels.
Remove batteries from two TA-312/PT’s and backup batteries from AN/UGC-74A(V)3 for prolonged
storage or long distant shipment.
In hot climate, shade tarpaulin may be used. Remove shade tarpaulin and store in applicable place in
shelter.
Remove signal wires from power/signal entrance box. Replace all receptacle and connector covers.
Wind up signal wires on cable reels and store in shelter.
Remove locking pins and fold down whip antenna masts. Unscrew elements and store in canvas bags
in shelter. Lock whip antenna bases in down position.
2-146
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-39.
PREPARATION FOR MOVEMENT. (CONT)
If a doublet or dipole antenna is being used, disconnect lead-in cable from shelter. Lower antenna
from antenna masts and disconnect lead-in cable. Disassemble antenna. Break down antenna masts
and store antenna, lead-in cable, and masts in shelter.
Exhaust hoses can be very hot. Allow to cool before removing to avoid being burned.
When shelter is truck mounted, remove fuel heater exhaust extension hose and truck exhaust extension hose and store in shelter.
If power is obtained from a generator or a commercial power source, set power source circuit breaker
to OFF. Disconnect power cable from power source and from power/signal entrance box. Install
connector and receptacle covers. Wind power cable onto cable reel and store in appropriate place in
shelter.
Remove ground strap and ground rod and store in shelter.
Replace all receptacle and connector covers. Close and secure all ventilators and covers.
Secure all component items in cases, mountings, holders, or racks. Place miscellaneous items in
storage cabinets.
Remove vehicle boarding ladder and secure in mounting place in shelter.
Section IV OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
Subject
Para
Operation at Low Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Operation in Desert Climate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Operation in Tropical Climate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Recognition and Identification of Jamming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Anti jamming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Page
2-148
2-149
2-149
2-149
2-151
2-147
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-40.
OPERATION AT LOW TEMPERATURES.
During cold weather operation, observe the following:
Do not operate teletypewriters below 32°F. Keep shelter interior at a minimum of 40°F to ensure
proper teletypewriter operation.
Communications terminal AN/UGC-74A(V)3 can operate in extreme cold conditions (-25°F). During
periods of extreme cold, AN/UGC-74A(V)3 can be covered with a blanket or insulating material to
help retain heat generated within AN/UGC-74A(V)3.
WARNING
Operators must open multifuel heater air intake and exhaust covers, before operating
heater, to prevent suffocation of personnel or equipment failure.
During arctic conditions, all-fuel heater will provide enough heat during mobile service to keep shelter
warm as long as shelter exhaust fan is off and hood is blocked with an Insulating material.
CAUTION
If exhaust fan hood on exterior wall of shelter has been blocked by material during cold
conditions, material must be removed before operating exhaust fan to prevent equipment damage.
When operating shelter at halt and ac power is available, electric heater can be used. During extreme
arctic conditions, two additional electric heaters are required to heat shelter. Existing shelter wiring
will only accommodate one electric heater. Additional ac power from an external power source is
required to operate additional heaters.
Extreme cold causes cables and wires to become hard, brittle, and difficult to handle. Be careful
when handling cables and when connecting them to shelter so that kinks and unnecessary loops will
not result in permanent damage. Make sure that receptacles, connectors, and binding posts on
outside of shelter are free of frost, ice, and snow by replacing covers when not in use. Do not drag
connectors across ground.
If AN/GRC-106 is to be shut down for 10 hours or less, set RT-662/GRC SERVICE SELECTOR switch to
OVEN ON. For AN/GRC-122(*) models, also set duplex RT-662/GRC SERVICE SELECTOR switch to
OVEN ON.
Allow a 10 minute warmup period before operating modem.
WARNING
When filling or servicing fuel system, do not smoke or use open flame in vicinity. When
filling fuel can, always provide a metal to metal contact between the fuel container and
fuel can as fuel flows over metallic surfaces.
Fill fuel can daily to prevent condensation.
Service fuel strainer in heater daily to remove water which will freeze in fuel system and render it
inoperative.
2-148
Change 1
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-40.
OPERATION AT LOW TEMPERATURES. (CONT)
WARNING
To avoid radio frequency burns where terrain conditions do not provide a good earth
ground for shelter, stay in shelter or stand clear of vehicle and shelter when transmitting
on whip antenna.
2-41.
OPERATION IN DESERT CLIMATES.
In desert climates, connectors, receptacles, and binding posts are subject to damage from sand,
dirt, and dust. Replace receptacle and connector covers when not in use. Do not drag or place open
connector on ground. Interior of shelter may be kept cooler by installing shade tarpaulin and by
operating air conditioner. To conserve power, keep shelter door closed and do not operate exhaust
blower when operating air conditioner (AN/GRC-142, serial numbers 1 through 697 only). When
equipment is not in use, be sure to close shelter door and all air inlets and outlets. This will keep dust
and sand out of equipment.
2-42.
OPERATION IN TROPICAL CLIMATES.
In tropical climates, equipment is subject to damage from moisture and fungi. Wipe all moisture and
fungi from exterior of equipment with a lint-free cloth. Do not operate any units outside their
weatherproof equipment cases for any extended period of time. Use air conditioner (AN/GRC-142
serial numbers 1 through 697 only) to maintain shelter interior temperature and humidity at normal
level.
2-43.
RECOGNITION AND IDENTIFICATION OF JAMMING.
It is likely that under real or simulated tactical conditions, receiver will be jammed by enemy. Enemy
jamming is easily done by transmitting a strong signal on the same frequency as the desired signal,
thereby making it difficult or impossible to hear the desired signal. Unusual noises or strong
interference heard on RT-662/GRC may be enemy jamming, signals from a friendly station, noise
from a local source, or RT-662/GRC may be defective.
WARNING
Dangerous voltages exist at amplifier 50 ohm line and whip antenna connectors. Be
careful when working around antenna or antenna connectors. Radio frequency voltages
as high as 10,000 volts exist at these points. Jewelry must be removed when working on
equipment.
2-149
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-43.
RECOGNITION AND IDENTIFICATION OF JAMMING. (CONT)
To determine whether or not interference is originating in RT-662/GRC, disconnect antenna at RT662/GRC RECEIVER IN connector and short antenna connector to shelter. If interference continues,
RT-662/GRC is defective. Enemy jamming signals maybe continuous wave or modulated. A jamming
signal may be intended to block a single frequency. This is called spot jamming. The enemy may use
one or several transmitters to jam a block or band of frequencies. This method is called barrage
jamming. Various methods of jamming are given below for operator recognition:
CONTINUOUS WAVE JAMMING
Cw jamming is transmitted as a steady carrier. This signal beats with another signal and produces a
steady tone in the headset. Cw jamming signals may also be keyed by using a random on and off signal
or using actual code characters, keyed at same rate or a little faster than signal being received.
MODULATED JAMMING
Modulated jamming signals may consist of noise, laughter, singing, music, various tones, or any
unusual sound or a combination of these sounds. Various types of modulated signals are explained
below.
Spark
This is one of the simplest, most effective, and easily produced jamming signals. This type of signal
sounds very rough, raspy, and sometimes like an electric motor with sparking brushes running. This
type of signal is very broad; therefore, it will interfere with a large number of communication
channels.
Sweepthrough
This signal is the result of sweeping or moving a carrier back and forth across your frequency at a slow
or rapid rate. Numerous signals of varying amplitude and frequency produce a sound like that of a lowflying airplane passing overhead. This type of jamming is effective over a broad range of frequencies.
When it varies rapidly, it is effective against all types of voice signals.
Stepped Tones or Bagpipes
This signal usually consists of several separate tones. Tones are transmitted in the order of first
increasing and then decreasing pitch, repeated over and over. The audible effect is like the sound of a
Scottish bagpipe.
Noise
Noise is random both in amplitude and frequency. It is considered one of the better types of jamming
similar to that heard when a receiver is not tuned to a station and volume or gain control is turned to
maximum.
Gulls
This signal consists of a quick rise and slow fall of a variable audio frequency. The sound is similar to
the cry of a seagull.
2-150
TM 11-5815-334-10
2-43.
RECOGNITION AND IDENTIFICATION OF JAMMING. (CONT)
Tone
This signal consists of a single audio frequency of unvarying tone. It produces a steady howl in
headset. Another use of tone is to vary it slowly. It produces a howling sound of varying pitch.
244.
ANTIJAMMING.
When it is known that RT-662/GRC is being jammed, operator will notify immediate superior at once,
and continue to operate equipment. To receive clearest jammed signal possible, follow steps listed
below:
2.
Detune RT-662/GRC by rotating FREQ VERNIER control (1) to either side of 0.
NOTE
Rotating FREQ VERNIER control may cause some separation of desired signal and
jamming signal.
3.
Vary RT-662/GRC MANUAL RF GAIN control (2).
NOTE
Rotating MANUAL RF GAIN control may reduce jammed signal enough to permit desired
signal to be heard.
4.
5.
Vary modem AUDIO GAIN control.
Vary RT-662/GRC AUDIO GAIN control (3).
CAUTION
Rotating AUDIO GAIN control may raise level of desired signal enough to be heard.
Increasing AUDIO GAIN control can damage modem.
6.
If steps 2 to 5 do not provide sufficient signal separation for operation, change to an alternate
frequency and alternate call signal as instructed by superior.
2-151/(2.152 blank)
TM 11-5815-334-10
CHAPTER 3
MAINTENANCE
Subject
Section
Lubrication Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I
Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III
Page
3-1
3-1
3-20
Section I LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS
There are no lubrication instructions at the operator level of maintenance.
Section II TROUBLESHOOTING P R O C E D U R E S
Subject
Para
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Symptom Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Signal Cabling Diagrams . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-1.
Page
3-1
3-2
3-4
3-8
GENERAL.
Troubleshooting is based on symptoms that may occur when shelter is in operation. A malfunction in
an operating system may be discovered through built-in test meters, indicator lamps, or a distant
operator.
The troubleshooting table does not list all problems which you may find. If your problem is not listed,
or if troubleshooting steps do not solve your problem, refer to a higher level of maintenance.
When working on a problem, be sure to report your work on the forms shown in DA Pam 738-750.
To use troubleshooting table, first find your problem in the symptom index. The symptom index is
organized in categories. Each category lists symptoms that may be encountered. The index will give
you a page number on which you will find your problem and possible corrective action.
When troubleshooting, all controls should be set for normal owr operation (para 2-32). If equipment
does not perform properly, refer to a higher level of maintenance.
Radio tty set is a communications system which is made up of two subsystems, radio system and tty
system. Radio system consists of amplifier, RT-662/GRC and antenna. Tty system consists of
modem, TT-98/FG or AN/UGC-74A(V)3, and TT-76(*)/GGC. All other components of the system
either provide power or control for components. When a problem is encountered, first check that the
problem is not caused by component power failure. Troubleshooting power failure is the simplest of
troubleshooting procedures. Most power failures can be detected by checking associated equipment
indicators.
For all troubleshooting procedures, it is assumed that the vehicular generating system or external
power source is in good operating condition.
3-1
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-1.
GENERAL. (CONT)
If AN/GRC-122/142(*) radio sets are operating in secure mode of operation and the problem is
believed to be within security equipment, convert shelter to nonsecure mode of operation. If
malfunction disappears when shelter is converted to nonsecure mode of operation, the problem may
exist within security equipment.
When operating AN/GRC-122(*) radio sets in duplex mode of operation, turn off duplex equipment to
determine which shelter component is related to the problem being encountered.
All troubleshooting procedures rely on the fact that equipment has been preset properly and radio set
has been tuned properly. Always recheck switch positions to verify that failure is not caused by
improper switch setting. Refer to foldouts in rear of manual to aid in troubleshooting power circuits.
Use signal cabling diagrams given on pages 3-4 through 3-9 to locate cable connections between
components believed to be malfunctioning and to aid in signal path and equipment interconnections.
3-2. SYMPTOM INDEX.
Page
OPERATION
AUDIO TEL CALL lamp (AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models) or CALL lamp
(AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, and E models) does not light. (Call lamp operates
only during secure operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Local duplex operation unsatisfactory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Low power output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 3-17
No loop current .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
No reception in any mode of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
No reception or no transmission in any mode of operation except duplex
or pony circuit (AN/GRC-122(*) models onIy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Radio tuning procedure cannot be accomplished . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Remote duplex operation unsatisfactory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Remote telephone inoperative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Teletypewriter motor does not operate (TT-98/FG, AN/UGC-74A(V)3 or
TT-76(*)/GGC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................... 3-17
Teletypewriter TT-98/FG, AN/UGC-74A(V)3 or TT-76(*)/GGC operation
abnormal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ............ . 3-18
Vswr too high, ME-165/G meter indicates in red area when doublet
antenna is used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 3-17
OWR OR DX INVERTERS
Owr or dx inverter does not energize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Owr or dx inverter whines when energized (AN/GRC-122/142 Plain
and C models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3-2
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-2. SYMPTOM INDEX. (CONT)
Page
POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL (AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, AND E MODELS)
AC VOLTS indicator lamp does not light and meter indicates ac voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
AC MAIN, INVERTER OWR, INVERTER DX, PWR SUP, or BLO & LIGHTS
circuit breakers kick out.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
.
3-12
DC VOLTS indicator lamp does not light and meter indicates 28 vdc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC MAIN circuit breaker kicks out (dc operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
AC VOLTS meter does not indicate voltage and AC VOLTS indicator lamp does
not light (ac operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 3-12
DC VOLTS meter does not indicate voltage and DC VOLTS indicator lamp does
not light (dc operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 3-12
Power distribution panel meter(s) does not indicate any voltage in ac or dc
mode of operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ 3-13
RECP circuit breaker kicks out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL (AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND C MODELS)
Ac voltmeter does not indicate any voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Fuse holder glows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Main circuit breaker kicks out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
POWER Iamp does not light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Power distribution panel meter does not indicate any voltage and
POWER lamp does not light (dc operation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Power distribution panel dc meter does not indicate any voltage but
POWER Iamp does light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
SHELTER
All-fuel heater inoperative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Air conditioner inoperative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Blower inoperative. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Shelter Iamp does not light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Shelter lights inoperative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
SECURITY EQUIPMENT IN MODELS WITH MK-2488/G
Power lamp on J-4024 does not light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Power Lamp on DLED, TSEC/KG-84A does not light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-16
No loop current in remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Change 2 3-3
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-3. SIGNAL CABLING DIAGRAMS.
EL6VR201
3-4
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-3. SIGNAL CABLING DIAGRAMS. (CONT)
RADIO TTY SETS AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND C
DUPLEX RECEIVE SIGNAL PATH INDICATED BY ARROWS
EL6VR205
3-5
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-3. SIGNAL CABLING DIAGRAMS. (CONT)
EL6VR202
3-6
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-3. SIGNAL CABLING DIAGRAMS. (CONT)
EL6VR203
3-7
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-3. SIGNAL CABLING DIAGRAMS. (CONT)
3-8
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-3. SIGNAL CABLING DIAGRAMS. (CONT)
EL6VR204
3-9
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-3. SIGNAL CABLING DIAGRAMS
RADIO TTY SETS AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND C MODELS OWR AND DUPLEX RECEIVE
SIGNAL PATH INDICATED BY ARROWS.
EL6VR201
3-10 Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-3. SIGNAL CABLING DIAGRAMS ( C O N T )
RADIO TTY SETS AN/GRC-142 PLAIN AND C MODELS WITH MK-2488/G OWR TRANSMIT
SIGNAL PATH INDICATED BY ARROWS
Change 2
3-10.1
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-3. SIGNAL CABLING DIAGRAMS (CONT)
RADIO TTY SETS AN/GRC-142 A, B, D AND E MODELS WITH MK-2488/G OWR RECEIVE
SIGNAL PATH INDICATED BY ARROWS
3-10.2 Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-3/ SIGNAL CABLING DIAGRAMS (CONT)
RADIO TTY SETS AN/GRC-142A, B, D AND C MODELS WITH MK-2488/G OWR TRANSMIT
SIGNAL PATH INDICATED BY ARROWS
Change 2
3-10.3
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-3. SIGNAL CABLING (CONT)
RADIO TTY SETS AN/GRC-122 PLAIN AND C MODELS WITH MK-2488/G DUPLEX RECEIVE
SIGNAL PATH INDICATED BY ARROWS.
3-10.4 Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-3. SIGNAL CABLING (CONT)
RADIO TTY SETS AN/GRC-122 PLAIN AND C MODELS WITH MK-2488/G DUPLEX TRANSMIT
SIGNAL PATH INDICATED BY ARROWS.
Change 2 3-10.5
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-3. SIGNAL CABLING (CONT)
RADIO TTY SETS AN/GRC-122 A, B, D AND E MODELS WITH MK-2488/G DUPLEX RECEIVE
SIGNAL PATH INDICATED BY ARROWS.
3-10.6 Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-3. SIGNAL CABLING DIAGRAMS (CONT)
RADIO TTY SETS AN/GRC-122A, B, D AND E MODELS WITH MK-2488/G DUPLEX TRANSMIT
SIGNAL PATH INDICATED BY ARROWS.
Change 2 3-10.7
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-4. TROUBLESHOOTING.
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL (AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND C MODELS)
1.
Main circuit breaker kicks out.
Perform starting procedures (para 2-25).
If problem persists, refer to a higher level of maintenance.
2.
Power distribution panel meter does not indicate any voltage and POWER lamp does not light (dc
operation)
Step 1. Check for proper connection of power cable to dc entrance box.
If power is improperly connected, reconnect (para 2-10).
Step 2. Check for damaged power cable.
If power cable is damaged, replace (para 2-10).
Step 3. Check for proper connection of power cable to power source.
a. If power cable is improperly connected to power source,
reconnect (para 2-10).
b. If problem persists, refer to a higher level of maintenance.
3.
Ac voltmeter does not indicate any voltage.
Check for 110 vac indication on ac voltmeter.
3-10.8 Change 2
a.
If voltage is not present, check for proper connection of ac
PP-4763(*)/GRC for proper connection to 25 amp outlet.
b.
If voltage is present, check dc power cord of power supply
4763(*)/GRC for proper connect to 25 amp outlet.
c.
If power cord is connected properly, refer to a higher level of
maintenance.
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-4. TROUBLESHOOTING. (CONT)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
4. Power distribution panel dc meter does not indicate any voltage but POWER lamp does light.
Check that components are operational.
a. If components operate, meter is defective. Refer to a higher level of
maintenance.
b. If components do not operate, power distribution wiring is defective.
Refer to a higher level of maintenance.
5. POWER lamp does not light (dc operation).
Check for defective lamp.
a. If lamp is defective, replace (para 3-4).
b. If lamp is not defective, check for proper connection of power cable.
6. Fuse holder glows.
Check for blown fuse.
a. If fuse is defective, replace (para 3-13).
b. If fuse is not defective, refer to a higher level of maintenance.
NOTE
If fuse continues to blow after being replaced, refer to a higher level of maintenance. If
28V RECP fuse blows, remove item plugged into 28-volt convenience outlet.
POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL (AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, AND E MODELS)
1. DC MAIN circuit breaker kicks out (dc operation).
Perform starting procedures (para 2-25).
If problem persists, refer to a higher level of maintenance.
3-11
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-4. TROUBLESHOOTING. (CONT)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL (AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, AND E MODELS) (CONT)
2. DC VOLTS meter does not indicate voltage and DC VOLTS indicator lamp does not light (dc
operation).
Step 1.
Check for proper connection of power cable to power/signal entrance box.
If power cable is improperly connected, reconnect (para 2-10).
Step 2.
Check for damaged power cable.
If power cable is damaged, replace (para 2-10).
Step 3.
Check for proper connection of power cable to power source.
a. If power cable is improperly connected to power source, reconnect
(para 2-10).
b. If power cable is properly connected, refer to a higher level of
maintenance.
3. DC VOLTS indicator lamp does not light and meter indicates 28 vdc.
Check for defective lamp.
a. If lamp is defective, replace (para 3-11 and 3-12).
b. If lamp is not defective, refer to a higher level of maintenance.
4. AC VOLTS meter does not indicate voltage and AC VOLTS indicator lamp does not light (ac
operation).
Step 1.
Check for proper connection of power cable to power/signal entrance box.
If power cable is improperly connected, reconnect (para 2-9).
Step 2.
Check for damaged power cable.
If power cable is damaged, replace (para 2-9).
Step 3.
Check for proper connection of power cable to power source.
a. If power cable is improperly connected to power source, reconnect (para 2-9).
3-12
TM-11-5815-334-10
3-4. TROUBLESHOOTING. (CONT)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
b. If power cable is properly connected, refer to a higher level of
maintenance.
5. AC VOLTS indicator lamp does not light and meter indicates ac voltage.
Check for defective lamp.
a. If lamp is defective, replace (para 3-11 and 3-12).
b. If lamp is not defective, refer to a higher level of maintenance.
6. Power distribution panel meter(s) does not indicate any voltage in ac or dc mode of operation.
Check that components are operational.
a. If components are operational, panel meter (2) is defective. Refer to
a higher level of maintenance.
b. If components are not operational, power distribution wiring is
defective. Refer to a higher level of maintenance.
7. AC MAIN, INVERTER OWR, INVERTER DX, PWR SUP, or BLO & LIGHTS circuit breakers kick out.
Check for overload condition.
Reset, If circuit breaker(s) continues to kick out, refer to a higher level
of maintenance.
8. RECP circuit breaker kicks out.
Check for overload condition.
Reset. If circuit breaker continues to kick out remove equipment plugged
into associated outlet and refer to a higher level of maintenance.
OWR OR DX INVERTERS
1. Owr or dx inverter does not energize
Check for loose cable connection.
If cable connections are tight, refer to a higher level of maintenance.
3-13
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-4. TROUBLESHOOTING. (CONT)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
OWR OR DX INVERTERS (CONT)
2. Owr or dx inverter whines when energized (AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models).
Check for loose cable connection.
If cable connections are tight, refer to a higher level of maintenance.
SHELTER
1. Shelter lamp does not light.
Check for defective lamp.
If lamp is defective, replace (para 3-4).
2. Shelter lights inoperative.
Step 1.
Check that blackout bypass switch is in correct position.
Set blackout bypass switch to correct position.
Step 2.
Check that lights circuit breaker is set to ON.
Set lights circuit breaker to ON.
3. Blower inoperative.
Step 1.
Check that blower circuit breaker is set to ON.
If blower circuit breaker is set to OFF, set to ON.
Step 2.
Check that blower power cord is plugged into receptacle.
a. If blower plug is not plugged into receptacle, plug in.
b. If blower plug is plugged into receptacle, refer to a higher level of
maintenance.
4. All-fuel heater inoperative.
Step 1.
Check thermostat for proper setting.
Set thermostat to proper setting.
3-14
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-4. TROUBLESHOOTING. (CONT)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Step 2.
Check fuel level.
If fuel level is low, refill heater.
Step 3.
Check for damaged or leaking fuel lines.
a. If fuel lines are damaged or leaking, refer to a higher level of
maintenance.
b. If fuel lines are in good condition, heater is defective. Refer to a
higher level of maintenance.
5. Air conditioner inoperative.
Step 1.
Check air conditioner thermostat for proper setting.
If thermostat is set improperly, set to desired temperature.
Step 2.
Check that AC circuit breaker is set to ON.
If circuit breaker is set to OFF, set to ON.
Step 3.
Check for loose power cable.
a. If power cable is improperly connected, reconnect (para 2-9).
b. If power cord is properly connected, refer to a higher level of
maintenance.
OPERATION
1. Radio tuning procedure cannot be accomplished.
Step 1.
Check that modem ON-OFF switch is set to ON.
If switch is set to OFF, set to ON.
Change 2
3-15
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-4. TROUBLESHOOTING ( C O N T ) .
.
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
—
1.
Radio tuning procedure cannot be accomplished. (Cont)
Step. 2. Check for 20 VDC (para 2-27)
If 20 VDC is not present, check dc power indication on power
distribution panel.
Step 3. For local operation, check that all cable connections are tight and properly
connected,
a. If any cables are loose or improperly connected, reconnect.
b. If cables are connected properly, refer to a higher level of
maintenance.
Step 4.
In all models with MK-2488/G:
a. Check that the J-4024/U and DLED power is ON in the channel.
b. If power is ON, refer to higher level of maintenance.
C. If power is not ON, refer to MALFUNCTION 1 on page
3-10.8.
3-16 Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-4. TROUBLESHOOTING ( C O N T ) .
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
OPERATION (CONTD)
2
Voltage Standing Wave Ratio VSWR on ME-165G indicates in red area when doublet is used.
Step. 1. Check for loose or improper cable connections.
If cable connections are loose or improperly connected, reconnect
Step 2. Check for blown fuse in RT-662/GRC.
If fuse is blown, replace, refer to TM 11-5820-520-10.
Step 3. Check for improper antenna installation (para 2-11).
If antenna is improperly set up, reconstruct.
Step 4. Check for a defective amplifier, refer to TM 11-5820-520-10.
If problem persists, refer to a higher level of maintenance.
Change 2
3-16.1
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-4. TROUBLESHOOTING ( C O N T ) .
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
OPERATION (CONTD)
Step 5.
For remote operation, set LOCAL REMOTE switch to LOCAL
a. If loop current is restored, trouble is in remote installation. Check
for broken field wires or loose cable connections.
b. If problem persists, refer to a higher level of maintenance.
Step 6. In all models with MK-2488/G:
a. When monitoring remote site transmissions and receptions, check
that the Shelter J-4024/U and DLED power is ON in the channel.
b. If not monitoring remote site transmissions and receptions to
check that W11 and/or W12 are disconnected from the switch
assembly.
c. If problem persists, refer to higher level maintenance.
d. If power on J-4024/U or DLED does not come on when POWER
switches are set to ON, refer to MALFUNCTION 1 on page 3-10.8.
3-16.2 Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-4. TROUBLESHOOTING ( C O N T ) .
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
3. Low power output.
Check that doublet antenna is installed properly (para 2-13) and antenna feed line is
undamaged.
a. If doublet antenna is improperly set up, reconstruct.
b. If problem persists, refer to higher level of maintenance.
4.
No reception in any mode of operation.
Check for defective amplifier, refer to TM 11-5820-520-12.
If problem persists, refer to a higher level of maintenance.
5.
No loop current.
Step 1. Check that all cables are properly connected.
If any cables are loose or improperly connected, reconnect.
Step 2. Check for defective RT-662/GRC, refer to TM 11-5820-520-10.
If RT-662/GRC is defective, refer to a higher level of maintenance.
Step 3. Check for defective modem MD-522A/GRC, refer to TM 11-5805-387-15-1 or -2.
If problem persists, refer to a higher level of maintenance.
6.
Teletypewriter motor does not operate (TT-98/FG, AN/UGC-74A(V)3 or TT-76(*)/GGC).
Step 1. Check for proper connection of power cable
If power cable is loose or improperly connected, reconnect (para 210).
Step 2. Check for defective tty, refer to TM 11-5815-200-12 (TT-98/FG), TM 11-5815-602-12
(AN/UGC-74A(V)3), or TM 11-5815-238-10 and -24 (TT-76(*)/GGC).
If problem persists, refer to a higher level of maintenance
Change 2
3-17
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-4. TROUBLESHOOTING ( C O N T ) .
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
7. Teletypewriter TT-98/FG, AN/UGC-74A(V)3 or TT-76(*)/GGC operation abnormal.
Step 1. Check that all cable connections are tight and properly connected
If cables are loose or improperly connected, reconnect (para 2-10).
Step 2. Check for defective tty, refer to TM 11-5815-200-12 (TT-98/FG), TM 11-5815-602-12
(AN/UGC-74A(V)3), or TM 11-5815-238-10 and -24 (TT-76(*)/GGC).
If tty is defective, refer to a higher level of maintenance.
Step 3. Check for defective modem, refer to TM 11-5805 -387-15-1 or -2.
If problem persists, refer to a higher level of maintenance
Step 4. Check cable W-12. Observe meter on MODEM for ZERO reading.
If meter indicates 20 ma, refer to a higher level of maintenance
Step 5. Check for defective COMSEC equipment by disconnecting cables from COMSEC
equipment and connecting to dummy box. (Only in models without MK-2488/G).
If teletypes work properly, COMSEC equipment is defective. Refer
problem to COMSEC technician.
8. No reception or no transmission in any mode of operation except duplex or pony circuit (AN/G RC-122(*)
models only).
Step 1. Check that shelter equipment is operational (para 2-27).
a. If local operation is satisfactory, see troubleshooting procedures
for remote operation.
b. If local operation is not satisfactory, follow troubleshooting
procedures applicable to local operation except for duplex or
pony circuit.
Step 2. Check that remote equipment is properly installed (para 2-20).
If equipment is not properly installed, install properly (para 2-20).
Step 3. Check H-33 or KY-116/U by replacing with a known good unit.
If H-33/PT or KY-116/U is defective, replace.
Step 4. Check local and remote controls, refer to TM 11-5038.
If problem persists, refer to a higher level of maintenance.
3-18
Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-4. TROUBLESHOOTING ( C O N T ) .
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
9. Remote telephone inoperative
Step 1. Check for loose, broken, or improperly connected field wires.
If field wires are loose, improperly connected, or broken,
reconnect or repair.
Step 2. Check for defective TA-312/PT, refer to TM 11-5805-201-12.
If problem persists, refer to a higher Ievel of maintenance.
10. AUDIO TEL CALL lamp (AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models) or CALL lamp (AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, and E
models) does not light. (Call lamp operates only during secure operation. )
Step 1. Check for proper polarity of field wires.
Reverse field wires
Step 2. Check for defective lamp
If lamp is bad, replace (para 3-8).
11. Local duplex operation unsatisfactory.
Step 1. Check for defect in send circuit by performing procedures given in Operation,
symptoms 1 through 9 for radio set, modem, or associated tty.
If equipment defect persists, refer to a higher level of
maintenance.
Step 2. Check for a defect in receive circuit by checking all interconnecting cables to
associated duplex equipment.
If cables are loose or not properly connected, reconnect.
Step 3. Check for defective duplex RT-662/GRC, refer to TM 11-5820-520-10.
If duplex defective, refer to a higher level of maintenance.
Step 4. Check for defective duplex TT-98/FG, refer to TM 11-5815-200-12.
If duplex is defective, refer to a higher level of maintenance.
Step 5. Check for defective modem, refer to TM 11-5805-387-15-1 or 2.
If problem persists, refer to a higher level of maintenance.
Step 6. In all AN/GRC-122 models with MK-2488/G:
a. Check that J-4024/U and DLED power is ON. If power
is ON, refer to higher level maintenance.
b. If power does not come on when J-4024/U and DLED power
switches are set to ON, refer to MALFUNCTION 13.
Change 2 3-19
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-4. TROUBLESHOOTING. (CONT)
MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
OPERATION (CONT)
12. Remote duplex operation unsatisfactory.
Step 1.
Check local duplex operation.
a. If local duplex operation is defective, check procedures given in
Operation, symptom 11.
b. If local duplex operation is satisfactory, go to steps 2 and 3.
Step 2.
Check that all field wires are properly connected.
If field wires are improperly connected or polarity is incorrect,
reconnect (para 2-34).
Step 3.
Check for defective remote box or remote tty.
If remote box or remote tty is defective, refer to a higher level of
maintenance.
Section III MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Subject
Para
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Incandescent Lamp Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Fluorescent Lamp and Starter Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Cold-Start Lamp Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Cleaning of Shelter Door Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Switch Assembly Indicator Lamp Replacement
(AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, and E Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Control Panel Indicator Lamp Replacement
(AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Power Distribution Panel SB-3018/GRC-142 Power Indicator Lamp
Replacement (AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C Models). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Power Distribution Panel SB-3358/GRC Indicator Lamp
Replacement (AN/GRC-122/142A and B Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Power Distribution Panel SB-F-960672 Indicator Lamp
Replacement (AN/GRC-122/142D and E Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Power Distribution Panel SB-3018/GRC-142 Fuse Replacement
(AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3-20
Page
3-21
3-21
3-22
3-22
3-24
3-24
3-25
3-26
3-27
3-28
3-29
3-30
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-5. GENERAL.
All operator maintenance of shelter, will be given in this section.
For component equipment operation and shutdown procedures, see chapter 2, section Ill.
Resources required are not listed unless they apply to the procedure.
Personnel required are listed only if the task requires more than one technician. If personnel are not
listed, one technician can do the task.
Normal standard equipment condition to start a maintenance task is power off. Equipment condition is
not listed unless some other condition is required.
Operator maintenance of individual components contained in AN/GRC-122/142(*) models can be
found in their appropriate technical manuals listed below:
Component
TM
Modem Radio Teletypewriter MD-522(*)/GRC
Radio Set AN/GRC-106
Control Group AN/GRA-6
Teletypewriter Reperforator-Transmitter TT-76(*)/GGC
Duplex Teletypewriter TT-98/FG
Terminal, Communications AN/UGC-74A(V)3
Heater, Space, Fuel Oil and Gasoline: 15,000 BTU/HR
Output, DC 24V (Hupp Model MH15133C-1)
Air Conditioner, Wall or Base Mounted, Air Cooled; Self
Contained, Electric Motor Driven; 6,000 BTU/HR, 115V,
1 Phase, 2 Wire, 50/60 Cycle (Redmonson Model CE-6A-60A)
Telephone Set TA-312/PT
Power Supplies PP-4763/GRC and PP-4763A/GRC
TM 11-5805-387-15-1
TM 11-5820-520-12
TM 11-5038
TM 11-5815-238-10 or -20
TM 11-5815-200-12
TM 11-5815-602-12
TM 5-4520-211-14
TM 5-4120-289-15
TM 11-5820-201-12
TM 11-5820-765-12
3-6. CLEANING.
Inspect exteriors of all components contained in shelter. All surfaces should be free of dust, dirt,
grease, and fungi. A mild soap or detergent and water maybe used for most general cleaning
including walls, floors, and door air filters. Use a dry, clean, lint-free cloth to remove dust or dirt.
WARNING
Fumes of TRICHLOROTRIFLUOROETHANE are poisonous. Provide adequate ventilation
whenever you use TRICHLOROTRIFLUOROETHANE. Do not use solvent near heat or open
flame. TRICHLOROTRIFLUOROETHANE will not burn, but heat changes the gas into poisonous, irritating fumes. DO NOT breathe fumes or vapors. TRICHLOROTRIFLUOROETHANE dissolves natural skin oils. DO NOT get solvent on your skin. Use gloves,
sleeves, and an apron which solvent cannot penetrate. If solvent is taken internally,
consult a physician immediately.
To remove grease, dirt, and fungi, moisten (do not soak) a cloth with TRICHLOROTRIFLUOROETHANE. To remove ground-in dirt, dampen a brush with TRICHLOROTRIFLUOROETHANE. After
cleaning, wipe dry with a clean cloth.
3-21
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-7. INCANDESCENT LAMP REPLACEMENT.
Incandescent lamps are installed on upper roadside and curbside walls in AN/GRC-122/142 Plain, A,
B, and C models. Replacement is the same for all models.
MATERIALS/PARTS: Incandescent lamp NSN 6240-00-155-8651
EL6VR172
REMOVAL
Remove incandescent lamp (1).
INSTALLATION
Install new 28-volt incandescent lamp.
3-8. FLUORESCENT LAMP AND STARTER REPLACEMENT.
Fluorescent lamps are installed in AN/GRC-122/142D and E models only. Replacement is the same
for all models.
MATERIALS/PARTS: Fluorescent lamp, NSN 6240-00-152-2996
Fluorescent starter, NSN 6250-00-194-4794
3-22
TM 11-5818-334-10
3-8. FLUORESCENT LAMP AND STARTER REPLACEMENT. (CONT)
WARNING
Handle fluorescent lamp tubes carefully to avoid breakage. Cuts from broken fluorescent
lamps heal slowly and have a great risk of infection.
LAMP REMOVAL
1. Using screwdriver, remove screws (1) and cover (2).
2. Unsnap fluorescent locks (3) on ends of Iampholder by pulling downward.
3. Grasp each end of fluorescent lamp (4) firmly and turn one-half turn to aline pins on ends
of lamp with slots in Iampholder. Pull down and out.
LAMP INSTALLATION
1.
Grasp each end of new fluorescent lamp (4) firmly. Aline pins on ends of lamp with slots in
Iampholder. Lift lamp into Iampholder and turn lamp one-half turn until it locks into place.
2.
Position fluorescent locks (3) on each end of lampholder and push up to snap into place.
3.
Position cover (2) on lamp fixture and secure with screws (1).
STARTER REMOVAL
1. Using screwdriver, remove screws (1) and cover (2).
2. Unsnap fluorescent locks (3) on ends of Iampholder by pulling downward.
3. Grasp each end of fluorescent lamp (4) firmly and turn one-half turn to aline pins on ends
of lamp with slots in lampholder. Pull down and out.
4. Push starter (5) in, turn to right, and pull out.
STARTER INSTALLATION
1. Push starter (5) in and turn to left.
2. Grasp each end of fluorescent lamp (4) firmly. Aline pins on ends of lamp with slots in lampholder. Lift lamp into Iampholder and turn lamp one-half turn until it locks into place.
3. Position fluorescent locks (3) on each end of Iampholder and push up to snap into place.
4. Position cover (2) on lamp fixture and secure with screws (1).
3-23
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-9.
COLD-START LAMP REPLACEMENT.
Incandescent cold-start lamps are installed in AN/GRC-122/142D and E models only. Replacement is
the same for all models.
MATERIALS/PARTS: Incandescent lamp, NSN 6240-00-155-8653
EL6VR175
REMOVAL
1. Using screwdriver, remove screws (1) and cover (2).
2. Press lamp (3) in, turn counterclockwise and remove.
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3-10.
Insert new lamp (3) in socket. Press in and turn clockwise until lamp locks into place.
Position cover (2) on light fixture and secure with screws (1).
CLEANING OF SHELTER DOOR AIR FILTER.
AN/GRC-122/142 models are contained in two different shelters, S-250/G and S-318(*)/G.
Removal of shelter door air filter is the same for all models.
3-24
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-10.
CLEANING OF SHELTER DOOR AIR FILTER. (CONT)
REMOVAL
1. Using screwdriver, remove four screws (1).
2. Remove louvered section (2) of door.
3. Remove filter from louvered section (2) of door.
4. Wash filter in soapy water and air dry.
INSTALLATION
1. Place filter onto louvered section (2) of door.
2. Place louvered section (2) with filter on door.
3. Using screwdriver, install four screws.
3-11.
SWITCH ASSEMBLY INDICATOR LAMP REPLACEMENT (AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, AND E
MODELS).
MATERIALS/PARTS: Lamp, type 327
EL6VR195
REMOVAL
1. Remove lens (1) by turning counterclockwise.
2. Remove lamp (2) by pushing it in and turning counterclockwise.
INSTALLATION
1. Install new lamp (2) by pushing it in and turning clockwise.
2. Install lens (1).
3-25
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-12. CONTROL PANEL lNDICATOR LAMP REPLACEMENT (AN/GRC-122/142 PLAlN AND C
MODELS).
MATERIALS/PARTS: Lamp, NE-51
EL6VR196
REMOVAL
1. Remove lens (1) by turning counterclockwise.
2. Remove lamp (2) by pushing it in and turning counterclockwise.
INSTALLATION
1. Install new lamp (2) by pushing it in and turning clockwise.
2. Install Iens (1).
3-26
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-13.
POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL SB-3018/GRC-142 POWER INDICATOR LAMP REPLACEMENT
(AN/GRC-122/142 PLAIN AND C MODELS).
MATERIALS/PARTS: Lamp, type 327
EL6VR197
REMOVAL
1. Remove lens (1) with lamp (2) by turning counterclockwise.
2. Remove lamp (2) from lens (1).
INSTALLATION
1. Insert new lamp (2) into lens (1).
2. Install lens (1).
3-27
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-14.
POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL SB-3358/GRC INDICATOR LAMP REPLACEMENT (AN/GRC122/142A and B MODELS).
Indicator lamp replacement is typical for ac or dc indicator lamps. Only ac lamp replacement is
shown.
MATERIALS/PARTS: Lamp, MS25237-327
EL6VR198
REMOVAL
1. Remove lens (1) with lamp (2) by turning counterclockwise.
2. Remove lamp (2) from lens (1).
INSTALLATION
1. Insert lamp (2) into lens (1).
2. Install lens (1).
3-28
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-15.
POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL SB-F-960672 INDICATOR LAMP REPLACEMENT (AN/GRC122/1420 AND E MODELS).
Indicator lamp replacement is typical for all indicator lamps. Only one is shown.
MATERIALS/PARTS: Lamp
EL6vR199
REMOVAL
1. Remove lens (1) by turning counterclockwise.
2. Remove lamp (2) by pushing it in and turning counterclockwise.
INSTALLATION
1. Install lamp (2) by pushing it in and turning clockwise.
2. Install lens (1).
3-29
TM 11-5815-334-10
3-16.
POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL SB-3018/GRC-142 FUSE REPLACEMENT (AN/GRC-122/142
PLAIN AND C MODELS).
Power distribution panel fuse replacement is typical for all power distribution panel fuses. Only one is
shown.
MATERIALS/PARTS: Fuse
EL6VR200
WARNING
Set MAIN PUSH ON-PULL OFF circuit breaker to OFF to prevent electrical shock to
personnel.
REMOVAL
1. Set LIGHTS switch (1) to OFF.
2. Remove fuse holder (2) with fuse (3) by turning counterclockwise.
3. Remove fuse (3) from fuse holder (2).
INSTALLATION
1. Insert new fuse (3) in fuse holder (2).
2. Install fuse holder (2) with fuse (3) into front panel.
3-30
TM 11-5815-334-10
APPENDIX A
REFERENCES
A-1 SCOPE.
This appendix lists all forms, service bulletins, technical manuals, technical bulletins, regulations,
and field manuals.
A-2. FORMS.
Recommended Changes to Equipment Technical Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . DA FORM 2028-2
Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet (Ed Jan 64 WILL
BE USED) (S& I USAAGPC. BaH. Md. 21220 ONLY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DA FORM 2404
Discrepancy in Shipment Report (DISREP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SF FORM 361
Report of Discrepancy (ROD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SF FORM 364
Quality Deficiency Report (Category 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SF FORM 368
A-3. PAMPHLETS.
The Standard Army Publications System (STARPUBS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DA PAM 310-10-2
The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DA PAM 738-750
A-4. REGULATIONS.
Discrepancy in Shipment Report (DISREP)(SF 361) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identification and Distribution of DA Publications and Issue of Agency
and Command Administration Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AR 310-2
Report of Packaging and Handling Deficiencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AR 735-11-2
AR 55-38
A-5. PAMPHLETS.
DA Porn 25-30
Consolidated Index of Army Publications and Blank Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Standard Army Publications System (STARPUBS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DA PAM 310-10-2
The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. DA PAM 738.750
A-6. TECHNICAL BULLETINS.
Safety Measures to be Observed When Installing and Using Whip
Antennas, Field-Type Masts, Towers and Antennas, and Metal Poles
That Are Used With Communications, Radar, and Direction Finder
Equipment (TO 31P5-1-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB SIG 291
Identification of Radioactive Items in the Army Supply
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. TB 43-0116
Field Instructions for Painting and Preserving Communications Electronics Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TB 43-0118
Change 1
A- 1
TM 11-5615-334-10
A-6. TECHNICAL BULLETINS. (CONT)
Instructions for Safe Handling and Identification of US Army
Communications, Electronics Command Managed Radioactive Items
in the Army Supply System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB 43-0122
Maintenance and Repair Procedures for Shelters, Electrical Equipment S-141/G and SO141 B/G (NSN 5410-00-752-9698), S-144/G,
S-144A/G, S-144B/G, S-144C/G and S-144D/G (5410-00-5422532), S-250/G (5410-00-999-4935), S-250/G (Shielded)
(5410-00-489-6076), S-280/G (5410-00-999-5269), S-280A/G
(5410-00-999-6022), S-280 B/G (5410-00-117-2868), S-280 B/G
(Shielded) (5410-00-001-4093), S-280C/G and S-318/G (541000-763-2339) and S-318A/G (5410-00-116-7086) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB 43-0124
Installation of Communications Electronic Equipment Hookup
of Electrical Cables to Mobile Generator Sets on Fielded Equipment to Meet Electrical Safety Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB 43-0125
A-7. TECHNICAL MANUALS.
Camouflage Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 5-200
Operator’s, Organizational, Direct Support, General Support, and
Depot Maintenance Manual: Air Conditioner, Wall or Base Mounted,
Air Cooled; Self-Contained, Electric Motor Driven; 6,000 BTU/HR,
115V, 1 Phase, 2 Wire, 50/60 Cycle (Red-manson Model CE-6A60A) (NSN 4210-00-926-1 161) and 208V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire, 400
Cycle (Redmanson Model CE-6A-400A) (4120-00-926-1 162) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 5-4120-289-15
Organizational Direct Support Maintenance Manual (Including Repair
Parts and Special Tools List): Can, Gasoline, Military, Steel, 5-Gal
(FSN 7240-222-3088); Can, Water, Military, Steel, 5-Gal (7240242-6153); Can, Water, Military, Aluminum, 5-Gal (7240-2423767); Can, Water, Military, Plastic, 5-Gal (7240-089-3827);
and, Case, Military Water Can (7240-125-9061) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 10-7200-200-13
Control Group AN/GRA-6 (TO 16-30GRA6-5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T M 1 1 - 5 0 3 8
Organizational, Direct Support, General Support, and Depot
Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tool Lists: Shelter Electrical
Equipment S-318/G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM
. . 11-5410-212-15P
Operator’s and Organizational Maintenance Repair Parts and Special
Tools List for Shelter, Electrical Equipment S-250/G (NSN 541000-999-4935) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 11-5410-214-12P
Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual: Telephone Set,
TA-312/PT(NSN 5805-00-543-0012) (TO 31W1-2DT-291) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 11-5805-201-12
Operator’s, Organizational, Direct Support, General Support, and
Depot Maintenance Manual; Modem, Radio Teletypewriter MD522/GRC (NSN 5815-00-999-5277) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 11-5805-387-15-1
Operator’s, Organizational, Direct Support, General Support, and
Depot Maintenance Manual: Radio Teletypewriter Modem, MD-522/
GRC (NSN 5815-00-919-4800) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 11-5805-387-15-2
Organizational Repair Parts List: Modem, Radio Teletypewriter
MD-522A/GRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 11-5805-387-20 P-2
A-2
Change 1
TM 11-5815-334-10
A-7.
TECHNICAL MANUALS (CONT)
Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for
(FOUO) TM 11-5810-277-23
Dedicated Loop Encryption Device TSEC/KG-84A (NSN 5810-01-1 46-3260) .
Operators’s and Organizational Maintenance Manual: Teletypewriter
Sets, AN/FGC-20 (NSN 5815-00-503-2652), AN/FGC-20X (5815-00392-7743), AN/FGC-21 (5815-00-503-2653), AN/FGC-66 (5815-00817-9277), AN/FGC-159 and AN/FGC-159X (5815-00-561-7964),
AN/FGC-160 (5815-00-025-9036), AN/FGC-177 (5815-01-0173780), AN/UGC-4 (5815-00-032-4200) and Teleprinter, TT-259/
FG (5815-00-68808761)(TO31W4-2FGC20-31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TM 11-5815-200-12
Operator’s and Organizational Maintenance Manual for Teletypewriter
Sets GC-1 (NSN 5815-00-198-5963) and AN/PGC-3 (5815-01-012-8773);
Teletypewriters TT-4A/TG, TT-4B/TG, TT-4C/TG (5815-00- 98-4438),
TT-335/TG (5815-00-878-8449), TT-537/TG (5815-00-926-7378),
TT-698/TG, TT-698A/TG, TT-698B/TG (5815-01-008-9628), TT-722/TG,
and TT-722-G (5815-01-017-9172) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TM 11-11-5815-206-12
Operator’s Manual for Teletypewriter Sets, AN/GGC-3 (NSN 5815-00-5033309), AN/GGC-3A (5815-00-581-9751), AN/GGC-53 (5815-01-012-8772),
AN/GGC-53A (5815-00-017-0956) and Teletypewriter ReperforatorTransmitters, TT-76/GGC (5815-00-503-2760) TT-76A/GGC, TT-76B/GGC
and TT-76C/GGC (5815-00-503-6061), TT-699/GGC (5815-01-012-8446),
TT-699A/GGC, TT-699B/GGC and TT-699C/GGC (5815-01-017-9166)
TM 11-5815-238-10
Organizational Maintenance for Teletypewriters Sets, AN/GGC-3 (NSN
5815-00-503-3309, AN/GGC-3A (5815-00-581-9751), AN/GGC-53
(5815-01-012-8772), AN/GGC-53A (5815-00-017-0956) and Teletypewriter Reperforator-Transmitters, 77-76/GGC (5815-00-5032760) TT-76A/GGC, TT-76B/GGC and TT-76C/GGC (5815-00-5036061), TT-699/GGC (5815-01-012-8446), TT-699A/GGC, TT-699B/
GGC and TT-699C/GGC (5815-01-017-9166) . . . . . . . .
TM 11-5815-238-20
Hand Receipt Manual Covering and Item/Components of End Item (COE1)
Basic Issue Items (B11) and Additional Authorization List for Radio Teletypewriter Sets, AN/GRC-122 (NSN 5815-00-401-9719) AN/G RC-122A
(NSN 5815-00-167-7998) AN/GRC-122B(NSN 5815-00-937-5295)
AN/GRC-122C (NSN 5815-01-095-1211) AN/GRC-122D (NSN 5815-01-0960428) AN/GRC-122E (NSN 5815-01-095-1212) AN/GRC-142 (NSN 5815-00401-9720) AN/G RC-142A (NSN 5815 -00-168-1 556) AN/GRC-142B (NSN 581500-443-551 1) AN/G RC-142C (NSN 5815-01-100-6815) AN/GRC-142D
(NSN5815-01-104-7264)
AN/GRC-142E
(NSN5815-01-095-6258)
TM
11-5815-334-10-HR
Organizational Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools List for
Radio Teletypewriter Sets AN/GRC-122 and AN/GRC-122A (5815-00401-9719), AN/GRC-122B (NSN 5815-00-937-5295), AN/GRC-142
and AN/GRC-142A (5815-00-401-9720), AN/GRC-142B (NSN 581500-443-5511)
and
AN/GRC-142C
(5815-01-100-6815)
.
.
TM
11-5815-334-20P
Operator’s Organizational, Direct Support, General Support, and
Depot Maintenance Manual: Device, Low-Level Signaling TT-523/GGC
(NSN 5815-00-937-6146) and TT-523A/GGC (NSN 5815-00-99-3048) TM 11-5815-338-15
Operator’s and Organizational Maintenance Manual for Terminal,
TM 11-5815-602-10
Communications AN/UGC-74A(V)3 (NSN 5815-01-062-8194)
Change 2 A-3
TM 11-5815-334-10
A-7.
TECHNICAL MANUALS (CONT)
Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual: Terminal,
TM 11-5815-602-24
Communications AN/UGC-74A(V)3 (NSN 5815-01-062-8194) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator’s, Organizational and Direct Support Maintenance Manual:
Installation Kit, Electronics Equipment MK-2488/G
(NSN 5815-01-215-6183) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 11-5815-616-13
Operator’s Manual Radio Set AN/GRR-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 11-5820-201-10
Operator’s, Organizational, Direct Support and General Support
Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools Lists (Including Depot
Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools) for Masts AB-155/U
(FSN- 5820-251-2366), AN-155A/U (5985-507-6261), and AB-155BJU
(5985-732-5146) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 11-5820-251-14P
Operator’s, Organizational, Direct Support, General Support, and
Depot Maintenance Manual: Antenna Group AN/GRA-50 (NSN 598500-892-0758) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 11-5820-467-15
Organizational, Direct Support, and General Support Maintenance
Repair Parts and Special Tools Lists (Including Depot Maintenance
Repair Parts and Special Tools) for Antenna Group AN/GRA-50
(NSN 5985-00-892-0758) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 11-5820-467-24P
Organizational Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools List for
Control Group AN/GRA-6 (NSN 5820-00-644-4554) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 11-5820-489-20P
Operator’s and Organizational Maintenance Manual: Radio Sets
AN/GRC-106 (NSN 5820-00-402-2263) and AN/GRC-106A
(NSN 5820-00-223-7548) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 11-5820-520-10
Operator’s and Organizational Maintenance Manual: Power Supplies
PP-4763/GRC (NSN 5820-00-937-7690) and PP-4763A (5820-0013-9768) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 11-5820-765-12
Operator’s, Organizational, Direct Support, and General Support
Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools Lists Dynamic Loudspeaker
LS-166/U (FSN 5965-243-640) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 11-5965-222-14P
Operatar’s, Organizational, Field and Depot Maintenance Repair Parts and
Special Tool Lists: Handset H-111/U (NSN 5965-00-644-0333) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 11-5965-244-15P
Operator’s, Organizational, Direct Support, General Support, and Depot
Maintenance Manual: Motor-Generator PU-724/G(NSN 612500-617-1435 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 11-6125-252-15
Operator’s and Organizational Maintenance Manual: Multimeters
AM/URM-105 and AN/URM-105C (Including Multimeters ME-77/U
and ME-77 C/U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 11-6625 -203-12
Operator’s, Organizational, Direct Support, General Support and
Depot Maintenance Manual: Standing-Wave-Ratio Power
Meter ME-165/G (NSN 6625-00-682-4464 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 11-6625-333-15
Procedures for Destruction of Electronic Materiel to Prevent
Enemy Use (Electronics Command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 750-244-2
A-8. FIELD MANUALS.
First Aid for Soldiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FM 21-11
A-4 Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
APPENDIX B
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST
Section I INTRODUCTION
B-1. SCOPE.
This appendix lists components of end item and basic issue items for the radio sets AN/GRC122/142(*), to help you inventory items required for safe and efficient operation.
B-2. GENERAL.
The components of End Item and Basic Issue Items lists are divided into the following sections:
a. Section II. Components of End Item. This listing is for informational purposes only, and is not
authority to requisition replacements. These items are part of the end item, but are removed and
separately packaged for transportation or shipment. As part of the end item, these items must be with
the end item whenever it is issued or transferred between property accounts.
b. Section III. Basic Issue Items. These are the minimum essential items required to place the
terminal set in operation and to perform emergency repairs. Although packed and shipped separately. Basic Issue Items must be with the terminal set during operation and whenever it is transferred
between property accounts. This manual is your authority to request/requisition replacement Basic
Issue Items, based on TOE/MTOE authorization of the end item.
B-3. EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS.
The following provides an explanation of columns found in the tabular listings:
a. Column 1, Illus No. (Illustration Number). This column indicates the number of the illustration
in which the item is shown.
b. Column 2, National Stock Number. Indicates the National stock number assigned to the item
and will be used for requisitioning purposes.
B-1
TM 11-5815-334-10
B-3. EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS. (CONT)
c. Column 3, Description. Indicates the Federal item name and if required, a minimum description to identify and locate the item. The last line for each item indicates the FSCM (in parentheses)
followed by the part number. If item needed differs on different models of equipment, the model is
shown under the “Usable On” heading in this column. The codes are identified as:
CODE
PAA
PAB
PAC
PAD
PAE
PAF
PAG
PAH
PAI
PAJ
PAK
PAL
PAM
PAN
PAO
PAP
USED ON
All AN/GRC-122(*) Models
Model AN/GRC-122
Model AN/GRC-122A
Model AN/GRC-122B
Model AN/GRC-122C
Model AN/GRC-122D
Model AN/GRC-122E
All AN/GRC-142(*) Models
Model AN/GRC-142
Model AN/GRC-142A
Model AN/GRC-142B
Model AN/GRC-142C
Model AN/GRC-142D
Model AN/GRC-142E
All models
All models with MK-2488/G only.
d. Column 4, U/M (Unit of Measure). Indicates the measure used in performing the actual
operational/maintenance function. This measure is expressed by a two-character alphabetical
abbreviation (es, in., pr).
e. Column 5, Qty Req’d (Quantity Required). Indicates the quantity of the item authorized to be
used with/on the equipment.
B-2 Change 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
This page left blank intentionally
B-3
TM 11-5815-334-10
Section II COMPONENTS OF END ITEM
(B-3 blank)/B-4
Change 4
TM 11-5815-334-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (CONT)
(1)
ILLUS
NO.
(3)
NATIONAL
STOCK NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
FSCM AND PART NUMBER
5985-00-892-0758
ANTENNA GROUP AN/GRA-50
(80058) PPL-1898
CONSISTING OF:
1
★
(4)
USUABLE
ON CODE
U/M
PAO
EA
1
ITEM DELETED
2
5995-00-823-2176
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-687/U
(80058) SM-D-198099
EA
1
3
5985-00-893-1438
HALYARD MX-2706/G (80058)
SM-C-198100
EA
2
4
5970-00-405-8223
INSULATOR lL-4/GRA-4 (80058)
SC-DL-135499
EA
1
5
5895-00-896-3179
REELING MACHINE RC-432/G
(80058) SM-D-198096
EA
2
6
5210-00-897-6077
TAPE MEASURING (81349)
MIL-6-55371
EA
1
7
5985-00-757-2130
WIRE ASSEMBLY CX-7303/G
(80058) SC-DL-198104
EA
2
8
6125-00-617-1435
INVERTER, MOTOR GENERATOR
PU-724/G (80058)
SM-D-114304
PAB,PAC
PAD,PAE
PAI,PAJ
PAK,PAL
EA
2*
9
6130-01-092-5998
INVERTER PU-724A/G (80058)
SM-D-937454
PAF,PAG
PAM, PAN
EA
2
10
5965-00-243-6420
LOUDSPEAKER, DYNAMIC
LS-166/U (80058) MIL-L-12632
PAO
EA
2*
11
5815-00-999-3048
LOW-LEVEL SIGNALING DEVICE
TT-5230/GGC (80058)
SC-DL-603719
PAO
EA
1
12
5905-00-407-2388
RESISTOR 5600 OHMS
PAO
EA
1
One half the quantity is used in AN/GRC-142 models.
Change 4
B-5
TM 11-5815-334-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (CONT)
B-6
Change 4
TM 11-5815-334-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (CONT)
(1)
ILLUS
NO.
(4)
(2)
NATIONAL
STOCK NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
FSCM AND PART NUMBER
USUABLE
ON CODE
U/M
PAO
EA
6*
5985-00-507-6261
MAST ASSEMBLY AB-155/U
(80058) PPL-1270
CONSISTING OF:
13
5935-00-643-9875
ADAPTER, RF UG-29B/U (80058)
MS 90576-29B
EA
2*
14
5995-00-521-0309
CABLE ASSEMBLY CG-55C/U
EA
2*
14
5995-00-752-1362
CABLE ASSEMBLY CG-692A/U
(80063) SD-D-7881
EA
2*
15
5970-00-405-8971
INSULATOR (81349)
MIL-I-23264/20
EA
24*
16
5820-00-227-7168
MASTS, MAST SECTION, MS-44
SCD-1155
EA
8
17
8130-00-656-1090
REEL, CABLE RC-435 (80058)
SC-M-69296
EA
1
18
5940-01-006-4487
SPLICE, SPLIT BOLT BURGANDY
KS-90 OR EQUIVALENT (09922)
S-10-S
EA
36*
19
5820-00-497-8634
CARRING DEVICE MX-387/GRA-4
SCD-28057
EA
6
21
5815-00-919-4800
PAB,PAE
EA
1
21
5815-00-999-5277
MODEM, RADIO TELETYPEWRITER
MD-522A/GRC (80058)
SM-D-583326
OR
MODEM, RADIO TELETYPEWRITER
MD-5221GRC (80058)
PAI,PAL
EA
1
22
5820-00-937-7690
POWER SUPPLY PP-47630/GRC
(80058) BS030-50PPX2
PAO
EA
1
22
5620-00-113-9768
POWER SUPPLY-PP-4763A/GRC
(80058)
PAO
EA
1
23
5820-00-402-2263
PAO
EA
1
23
5820-00-223-7548
RADIO SET AN/GRC-106 (80058)
MIL-R-55002 CONSISTING OF:
OR
RADIO SET A/GRC-106A (80058)
PPL4467 CONSISTING OF:
PAO
EA
1
✷ One
half
the
quantity
is
used
in
AN/GRC-142
models.
Change 4
B-7
TM 11-5815-334-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (CONT)
B-8
Change 4
TM 11-5815-334-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (CONT)
(1)
ILLUS
NO.
(2)
NATIONAL
STOCK NUMBER
24
5820-00-078-4771
AMPLIFIER, RF AM-3349/GRC-106
(80058) SM-D-502000
EA
1
25
5995-00-177-4501
CABLE, SPECIAL PURPOSE
CX-1852/U (80058) SC-C-72385
EA
1
26
5995-00-578-6353
CABLE ASSEMBLY RF CG-4090/U
(80058) SC-C-72385
EA
2
27
5995-00-985-8005
CABLE ASSEMBLY SPECIAL
PURPOSE, ELECTRICAL CX-10099
(80058) SC-DL-502753
EA
1
28
5340-00-286-2491
CLAMP, ROPE (80063)
EA
2
29
5965-00-163-9947
HANDSET H-330P/T (81349)
MlL-H-11134
EA
1
30
5965-00-226-2915
HEADSET, ELECTRICAL H-227/U
(81349) MIL-E-55119
EA
2*
31
5870-00-498-3745
INSULATOR (80063) SC-D-4779
EA
4
32
5805-00-503-3395
KEY, TELEGRAPH KY-116/U
(80058) SC-DL-45824
EA
1
33
6150-00-170-5573
LEAD (80063) SC-B-27840)
EA
1
34
5995-00-985-8014
LEAD, ELECTRICAL CX-10171/U
(80058) SM-C-502182
EA
1
35
5940-00-838-2984
LUG, TERMINAL (80063)
SM-B-500422
EA
4
36
5965-00-892-0722
MICROPHONE M-29B/U (80058)
MlL-M-11193
EA
1
37
5820-00-078-5614
MOUNTING MT-3140/GRC-106
(80058) SM-D-500797
EA
2
✹ One
half
the
quantity
is
used
in
(4)
(3)
DESCRIPTION
FSCM AND PART NUMBER
AN/GRC-142
USUABLE
ON CODE
U/M
models
Change 4
B-9
TM 11-5815-334-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (CONT)
B-10
Change 4
TM 11-5815-334-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (CONT)
(1)
ILLUS
NO.
STOCK NUMBER
38
5820-00-078-4766
(2)
DESCRIPTION
FSCM AND PART NUMBER
RECEIVER-TRANSMlTTER, RADIO
(80058) RT-662/GRC
SM-D-500011 (AN/GRC-108
ONLY)
(4)
USUABLE
ON CODE
(5)
U/M
REQ’D
PAO
EA
2*
OR
5820-00-935-0033
RECElVER-TRANSMITTER, RADIO
80058) RT-834/GRC
SC-DL-501092 (AN/GRC-106A
ONLY)
PAO
EA
2*
5820-00-644-4554
REMOTE CONTROL GROUP (80058)
AN/GRA-6 SC-DL-41747
CONSISTING OF:
PAO
EA
1
40
5820-00-511-4319
lNTERCONNECTING BOX J-654/G
(80058) SC-DL-85578
EA
1
41
5820-00-404-6885
BAG CW-189/GR (80058)
SC-DL-40635
EA
1
42
5965-00-163-9947
HANDSET H-330PT (81349)
MlL-H-11134
EA
1
43
5820-00-170-4781
LOCAL CONTROL C-434/GRC
(81349) MIL-R-13028
EA
1
44
55820-00-170-5171
REMOTE CONTROL C-433/GRC
(81349) MIL-R-13028
EA
1
45
5815-00-553-6061
REPERFORATOR-TRANSMlTTER
TT-760/GRC (80058)
SM-D-134701
EA
1
39
*
One
half
the
quantity
Is
used
in
AN/GRC-142
PAO
models
Change 4
B-11
TM 11-5815-334-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (CONT)
B-12
Change 4
TM 11-5815-334-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (CONT)
(1)
ILLUS
NO.
(2)
NATIONAL
STOCK NUMBER
46
5411-00-432-7295
DESCRIPTION
FSCM AND PART NUMBER
SHELTER FACILITY (80058)
S-504/GRC-142
CONSISTING OF:
(4)
(5)
USUABLE
ON CODE
U/M
REQ'D
PAB,PAI
EA
1
PAC,PAJ
EA
1
PAE,PAL
EA
1
OR
46
5411-00-432-7295
SHELTER FACILITY (80058)
S-504A/GRC-142A
CONSISTING OF:
OR
46
5411-01-116-9583
SHELTER FACILITY (80058)
CONSISTING OF:
*
46
5411-01-115-6254
SHELTER, FACILITY (80058)
S504B/GRC-142
CONSISTING OF:
PAF,PAM
EA
1
46
5411 -00-432-2342
SHELTER FACILITY (80058)
S-502/GRC-142B
CONSISTING OF:
PAD,PAK
EA
1
46
5411 -01-115-6252
SHELTER FACILITY (80058)
S502A/GRC-142
CONSISTING OF:
PAG,PAN
EA
1
47
5410-01-070-3781
ADAPTER ASSEMBLY FOR AIR
CONDITIONING (80063)
SC-D-681087
PAC,PAD,
PAF,PAG,
PAJ,PAK,
PAM,PAN
EA
2
7420-00-935-3272
ADAPTER KIT, F/FUEL CAN
(80063) PLSMA603812
CONSISTING OF:
PAO
EA
1
48
7240-00-222-3088
CONTAINER, GAS CAN (81349)
MIL-6-1283
EA
1
49
2590-00-473-6331
HOLDER, F/GAS CAN (96906)
EA
1
50
4720-00-480-0073
HOSE ASSEMBLY (88044)
AN6270-450092
EA
1
51
5985-00-937-6719
ANTENNA MOUNTING SUPPORT
ASSEMBLY (80063)
SM-D-603560
PAO
EA
1
51
5985-00-937-6718
ANTENNA MOUNTING SUPPORT
ASSEMBLY (80063)
SM-D-603561
PAO
EA
1
One
half
the
quantity
is
used
in
AN/GRC-142
models.
Change 4
B-13
TM 11-5815-334-10
(1)
ILLUS
NO.
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (CONT)
(2)
NATIONAL
STOCK NUMBER
(4)
(5)
U/M
REQ’D
PAF,PAG,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
BLOWER ASSEMBLY (MODIFIED)
SC-D-960736-1
PAF,PAG,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
BOX, TELEPHONE (80063)
SM-D-603209
PAB,PAE,
PAI,PAL
EA
1
HOLDER, TELEPHONE (80063)
SM-D-603209
PAC,PAD,
PAF,PAG,
PAJ,PAK,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
DESCRIPTION
FSCM AND PART NUMBER
USUABLE
ON CODE
52
BLOWER ASSEMBLY (MODIFIED)
SC-D-960736
52
53
5805-00-089-4003
53
54
5995-00-494-8261
CABLE ASSEMBLY CG-2568A
SC-DL-612865 (6 FT, 6 IN.)
PC,PAD,
PAF,PAG,
PAJ,PAK,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
54
5995-00-935-0248
CABLE ASSEMBLY CG-2568A/U
(80058) (5 FT, 6 IN.)
PAB,PAE,
PAI,PAL
EA
1
54
5995-00-937-8458
CABLE ASSEMBLY CG-3366/U
(80058) CG 3366V1-6
(18 IN.)
PAC,PAD,
PAF,PAG,
PAJ,PAK,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
54
5995-00-494-8260
CABLE ASSEMBLY CG-3562/G
(80058) SM-C-613284
(17 IN.)
PAC,PAD,
PAF,PAQ,
PAJ,PAK,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
54
5995-00-935-0389
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-2340/A
(80058) (9 FT)
PAB,PAE,
PAI,PAL
EA
1
54
5995-00-421-1730
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-3384/U
SM-C-603918
(2 FT)
PAB,PAE,
PAI,PAL
EA
1
54
5995-00-682-3315
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-4541
(80058) 30X204977
(3 FT, 1 IN.)
PAO
EA
2
54
5995-00-889-0899
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-4541/U
(80058)SC-D-48461 (3 FT)
PAF,PAG,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
54
5995-01-012-3629
CABLE ASSEMBLY
CX-10463/GRC-142 (80058)
SM-C-603917 (15 FT)
PAO
EA
1
* One half the quantity is used
B-14
in AN/GRC-142 models.
Change 4
TM 11-5815-334-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (CONT)
✷
(1)
ILLUS
NO.
(2)
NATIONAL
STOCK NUMBER
(4)
(5)
U/M
REQ’D
54
5995-00-937-8620
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10507/G
(80058) SM-C-603101
(4 FT, 5 IN.)
PAF,PAG,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
54
5995-00-453-9428
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10507/G
(80058) SC-DL-612825 (9 FT)
PAC,PAD,
PAF,PAG,
PAJ,PAK,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
54
5995-00-937-8621
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10508/G
(80056) SM-C-603102 (6 FT)
PAB,PAC,
PAD,PAI,
PAJ,PAK
EA
1
55
5995-00-937-8622
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10509/G
(80058)SM-C-603103
(12 FT, 3 IN.)
PAB,PAC,
PAD,PAI,
PAJ,PAK
EA
1
55
5995-00-937-8623
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10510/G
(80058) SM-C-60314
(11 FT, 7 IN.)
PAB,PAC,
PAD,PAI,
PAJ,PAK
EA
1
56
5995-00-246-4426
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10511/G
(80058) SM-C-603105
(6 FT
PAB,PAC,
PAD,PAI,
PAJ,PAK
EA
1
56
5995-00-248-4431
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10512G5-6
(80058) PL-SM-A603885
(6 FT)
PAB,PAE,
PAI,PAL
EA
1
56
5995-00-453-9433
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10512/G
(80058) SC-DL-612830 (10 FT)
PAC,PAD,
PAF,PAG,
PAJ,PAK,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
56
5995-00-251-9104
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-105I3/G
SC-DL-612831
(10 FT)
PAO
EA
2
56
5995-00-935-2542
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10514G
(80063) SM-C-603109
(6 FT, 9 IN.)
PAO
EA
1
56
5995-00-937-8627
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10514/G
(80063) PL-SM-A-603110 (9 FT)
PAO
EA
1
56
5595-00-937-8460
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10515/G
(80058) SM-C-603889 (6 FT)
PAO
EA
1
DESCRIPTION
FSCM AND PART NUMBER
USUABLE
ON CODE
One half the quantity is used in AN/GRC-142 models.
Change 4
B-15
TM 11 -5815-334-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (CONT)
(1)
ILLUS
NO.
(2)
NATIONAL
STOCK NUMBER
56
5995-00-935-0396
56
(4)
DESCRIPTION
FSCM AND PART NUMBER
USUABLE
ON CODE
U/M
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10515/G
(80058) PL-SM-A-603889 (7 FT)
PAO
EA
1
5995-00-937-8461
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10516/G
(80058) PL-SM-A603891 (4 FT
PAO
EA
1
56
5995-00-937-8467
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10517/G
(80058) PL-SM-A603896 (4 FT)
PAO
EA
1
57
5995-00-937-8462
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10518/G
(80058) SM-C-603893 (6 FT)
PAO
EA
1
57
5995-00-937-8463
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10519/G
(80058) SM-C-603895 (6 FT)
PAO
EA
1
57
5995-00-937-8464
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10520/G
(80058) PL-SM-A603896 (4 FT)
PAO
EA
1
57
5995-01-129-2231
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10521/G
(80058) (10 FT, 4 IN.)
PAO
EA
1
57
5995-00-937-8841
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10522/G
(80058) PL-SM-A-603899 (6 FT)
PAO
EA
1
57
5995-00-937-8048
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10523/G
(80058) SM-C-603903 (6 FT)
PAO
EA
1
57
5995-00-494-9602
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10523/G
(80058) SC-DL-612849
(6 FT, 6 IN.)
PAO
EA
1
57
5995-00-248-4467
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10523/G
(80058) PL-SM-A603921
(9 FT, 4 IN.)
PAO
EA
1
57
5995-00-453-9427
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10524/G
(80058) SC-DL-612852 (5 FT)
PAC,PAD,
PAF,PAG,
PAJ,PAK,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
57
5995-00-937-8844
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10524/G
(80058) SM-C-603130
(8 FT. 8 IN.)
PAO
EA
1
57
5995-00-937-8843
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10525/G
(80063 SM-D-603908 (10 FT)
PAB,PAE,
PAI,PAL
EA
1
57
5995-00-937-8842
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10525/G
(80058) PL-SM-A603907 (8 FT)
PAB,PAE,
PAI,PAL
E A
1
* One half the quantity is used In AN/GRC-142 models.
B-16
Change 4
TM 11 -5815-334-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (CONT)
✷
(1)
ILLUS
NO.
STOCK NUMBER
57
5995-00-937-8631
57
NATIONAL
(4)
DESCRIPTION
FSCM AND PART NUMBER
USUABLE
ON CODE
U/M
REQ’D
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10526/G
(80058) SM-C-603909 (3 FT)
PAB,PAE,
PAI,PAL
EA
1
5995-00-453-9429
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10526/G
(80058) SC-DL-612856 (4 FT
PAC,PAD,
PAF,PAG,
PAJ,PAK,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
57
5995-00-937-8614
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10527/G
(80058) SM-C-603911
(3 FT, 1 IN.)
PAO
EA
1
57
5995-00-935-0398
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10527/G
(80058) SM-C-603134
(3 FT, 4 IN.)
PAO
EA
1
57
5995-01-129-2230
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10526/G
(80058) (6 FT, 8 IN.)
PAO
EA
1
57
5995-00-937-8834
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10529/G
(80058) SM-C-603120 (2 FT
(SERIAL NO. 1 THRU 697 ONLY)
PAB,PAE,
PAI,PAL
EA
1
57
5995-00-937-8833
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10530/G
(80058) (9 FT. 10 IN.)
PAO
EA
1
57
5995-01-130-9890
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10530/G
(80058) (10 FT, 5 IN.)
PAO
EA
1
57
5995-00-789-3622
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10531/G
(80058) (10 FT, 5 IN.)
PAO
EA
1
57
5995-00-935-2513
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10532/G
(80058) SM-C-603923
(4 FT, 7 IN.)
PAO
EA
1
57
5995-00-937-8617
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10533/G
(80058) PL-SM-A603913
(15 FT, 8 IN.)
PAO
EA
1
57
5995-00-937-8613
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10534/G
(80058) SM-C-603136
(16 FT, 8 IN.)
PAO
EA
1
57
5995-00-089-4497
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10551/U
(80063) SM-C-603147
(14 FT, 2 IN.)
PAB,PAE,
PAI,PAL
EA
1
One half the quantity is used in AN/GRC-142 models.
Change 4
B-17
TM 11-5815-334-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (CONT)
(4)
USUABLE
ON CODE
(5)
U/M
REQ’D
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10614/G
(80058) SM-C-603905
(4 FT, 8 IN.)
PAO
EA
1
5995-00-935-2535
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10614/G
(80058) SM-C-603137
(6 FT, 2 IN.)
PAB,PAE,
PAI,PAL
EA
1
57
5995-00-935-2537
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10616/G
(80058) SC-C-603146
(4 FT, 2 IN.)
PAO
EA
1
57
5995-00-935-2538
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10617/G
(80058) SM-B-603148
(4 1/12 IN.)
PAO
EA
1
57
5995-00-935-5236
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-10951/G
(80063) SM-C-612898 (50 FT
PAO
EA
1
57
5995-00-246-4478
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-11992/G
(80063) SM-C-613151 (5 FT)
PAC,PAD,
PAF,PAG,
PAJ,PAK,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
57
5995-00-144-0048
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-1192/G
(80058) SM-D-613139 (9 FT)
PAC,PAD,
PAF,PAG,
PAJ,PAK,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
57
5995-00-246-4476
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-11994/G
(80058) SM-C-613151
(3 FT, 8 IN.)
PAC,PAD,
PAF,PAG,
PAJ,PAK,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
57
5995-00-177-4678
CABLE ASSEMBLY CX-12330/G
(80058) SC-DL-61336J (1 FT)
PAC,PAD,
PAF,PAG,
PAJ,PAK,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
57
5995-00-165-3728
CABLE ASSEMBLY SC-C-446368
(80063) (9 IN.)
PAO
EA
1
58
CABLE ASSEMBLY, AC POWER
SC-D-960630-002 (1 FT)
PAF,PAG,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
58
CABLE ASSEMBLY, AC POWER
SC-D-960630-006 (8 FT)
PAF,PAG,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
58
CABLE ASSEMBLY, AC POWER
SC-D-960027-000
PAE,PAL
EA
1
(1)
ILLUS
NO.
NATIONAL
STOCK NUMBER
57
5995-00-935-2534
57
DESCRIPTION
FSCM AND PART NUMBER
✷ One half the quantity is used in AN/GRC-142 models.
B-18
Change 4
TM 11-5815-334-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (CONT)
(1)
ILLUS
NO.
(2)
NATIONAL
STOCK NUMBER
58
(4)
USUABLE
ON CODE
(5)
U/M
REQ’D
CABLE ASSEMBLY, AC POWER
SC-D-960027-003
PAE,PAL
EA
1
DESCRIPTION
FSCM AND PART NUMBER
58
5995-01-234-1237
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SIGNAL
SC-D-960624-000 (6 FT)
PAF,PAG,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
58
5995-01-237-4895
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SIGNAL
FRONT SC-D-960624-005
PAE,PAL
PAN
EA
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SIGNAL
SC-D-960625-004
PAE,PAF,
PAG,PAL,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY, BATTERY
SC-D-960025-001 (2 FT)
PAE,PAF,
PAO,PAL,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
59
CABLE ASSEMBLY, BATTERY
SC-D-960025-003 (4 FT
PAF,PAG
PAM,PAN
EA
1
59
CABLE ASSEMBLY, POWER
SC-D-960628-006 (8 FT)
PAF,PAG,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
59
CABLE ASSEMBLY, POWER
SC-D-960628-022
PAF,PAG,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
58
59
5995-01-114-9697
✷ One half the quantity is used in AN/GRC-142 models.
Change 4
B-19
TM 11-5815-334-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (CONT)
B-20
Change 4
TM 11-5815-334-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (CONT)
(1)
ILLUS
NO.
(2)
NATIONAL
STOCK NUMBER
(4)
(5)
USUABLE
ON CODE
U/M
REC’D
60
7110-00-438-4659
CHAIR (80063) SM-D-613130
PAO
EA
1
61
6645-00-410-2395
CLOCK 1.5V
PAO
EA
1
62
5820-00-226-5727
CROSS BAR, LONG (80063)
SM-C-50068
PAA
EA
4*
63
5820-00-078-5615
CROSS BAR, SHORT (80063)
SC-DL-502745
PAH
EA
2
64
7230-00-937-7409
CURTAIN SM-C-603260
PAB,PAE,
PAI,PAL
EA
1
65
6110-00-089-7348
DISTRIBUTION BOX, AC-DC
J2276/GRC-142 (80058)
SM-D-603784
PAB,PAE,
PAI,PAL
EA
1
66
5815-00-926-7377
DUMMY BOX J-2728/GRC-142
(80058) SC-DL-603317
PAO
EA
2
67
4720-00-937-7088
EXHAUST HOSE (80063)
SM-C-603459
PAO
EA
2
68
4210-00-555-8837
FIRE EXTlNGUISHER W/BRACKET
(81349) MIL-E-52031
PAO
EA
1
69
8345-00-937-5532
FLAG, SAFETY
PAO
EA
2
70
5975-00-224-5260
GROUND ROD MX-148/G (80058)
SC-D-14158
PAO
EA
2
71
5120-00-265-7462
HAMMER (81348) GGG-H-86
PAO
EA
1
72
HEATER HOSE EXHAUST
SM-C-613248
PAC,PAF,
PAJ,PAM
EA
1
72
HEATER HOSE EXHAUST
SM-C-613229
PAD,PAG,
PAK,PAN
EA
1
(3)
DESCRIPTION
FSCM AND PART NUMBER
72
4720-00-089-2635
HOSE ASSEMBLY FOR EXHAUST
(80063) SM-C-603557
PAB,PAE,
PAI,PAL
EA
1
73
6230-00-729-9614
LANTERN (80063) SC-C-539491
PAO
EA
1
HOLDER, BATTERY BOX
SC-D-960667
PAF,PAG,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
* One half the quantity is used in AN/GRC-142 models.
Change 4
B-21
TM 11-5815-334-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (CONT)
B-22
Change 4
TM 11-5815-334-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (CONT)
(1)
ILLUS
NO.
(2)
NATIONAL
STOCK NUMBER
74
5995-00-935-2539
LEAD, CX-10618 (80058)
PL-SM-A603693 (4 FT, 4 IN
74
5995-00-089-7798
74
5995-00-089-7799
74
U/M
(5)
QTY
REQ’D
PAB,PAE,
PAI,PAL
EA
1
LEAD CX-10760/U (80058)
(6 17.2 IN.)
PAB,PAE,
PAI,PAL
EA
1
LEAD CX-10761/U (80058)
SM-B-603823 (6 FT)
PAB,PAE,
PAI,PAL
EA
1
LEAD, SC-C-613152
PAC,PAD,
PAF,PAG,
PAJ,PAK,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
USUABLE
ON CODE
74
5995-00-935-2536
LEAD, Electrical CX-10615/G
(80058) SM-B-603149
(11 FT)
PAO
EA
1
75
5340-00-682-1508
PADLOCK (80063) SM-D-555531-1
PAO
EA
1
76
6110-00-937-6439
PANEL SB-3018/GRC-142
(80058) SM-D-602937
PAB,PAE,
PAI,PAL
EA
1
77
6110-00-228-8570
PANEL, POWER DISTRIBUTION
SB-3358/GRC (80058)
SM-D-613063
PAC,PAD,
PAJ,PAK
EA
1
78
PANEL, POWER DISTRIBUTION
(80063) SC-F-900672
PAF,PAG,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
79
POWER TERMINAL ASSEMBLY
SM-D-613267
PAC,PAD,
PAF,PAG,
PAJ,PAK,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
REMOTE CONTROL BOX
C-7279/GRC-142 (80058)
SC-DL-603308
PAO
EA
1
80
✷
(4)
(3)
DESCRIPTION
FSCM AND PART NUMBER
5815-00-937-5973
One half the quantity is used in AN/GRC-142 models.
Change 4
B-23
TM 11-5815-334-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (CONT)
(1)
ILLUS
NO.
(2)
NATIONAL
STOCK NUMBER
82
8940-00-115-6380
83
5815-01-108-9180
U/M
(5)
QTY
REQ’D
SLING ASSEMBLY
PAO
EA
1
SUPPORT ARM FOR TARPAULIN
(80063) SM-C-685215
PAC,PAD,
PAF,PAG,
PAJ,PAK,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
✷ One half the quantity is used in AN/GRC-142 models.
B-24
Change 4
(4)
USUABLE
ON CODE
(3)
DESCRIPTION
FSCM AND PART NUMBER
TM 11-5815-334-10
This page left blank intentionally.
Change 4 B-25
TM 11-5815-334-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (CONT)
(B-25 blank)/B-26 Change 4
TM 11-5815-334-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (CONT)
(4)
U/M
(5)
QTY
REQ’D
PAB,PAE,
PAI,PAL
EA
1
SWITCH ASSEMBLY
SA-1555/GRC-142 (80058)
SM-D-602953
PAB,PAE,
PAI,PAL
EA
1
5815-00-220-5255
SWITCH ASSEMBLY SA-1650/GRC
(80058) SM-D-613051
PAC,PAD,
PAF,PAG,
PAJ,PAK
PAM,PAN
EA
1
87
5820-00-937-5530
TARPAULIN, SHADE (80063)
SM-D-603394
PAO
EA
1
89
4010-00-937-0790
WIRE ROPE (80063)
SM-C-564739 GR1
PAO
EA
1
89
4010-00-937-0791
WIRE ROPE (80063)
SM-C-564739 GRII
PAO
EA
2
89
4010-00-937-0792
WIRE ROPE (80063)
SM-C-564739 GRIII
PAO
EA
1
90
6625-00-682-4464
STANDING WAVE RATIO-POWER
METER ME-165/G (80056)
PAO
EA
1
91
5805-00-543-0012
TELEPHONE SET TA-312/PT
(80058) MIL-T-14358
PAO
EA
1
92
5815-00-503-2764
TELETYPEWRITER TT-98( )/FG
(80058) MlL-T-11750
PAB,PAC,
PAD,PAI,
PAJ,PAK
EA
2*
PAB,PAC,
PAD,PAI,
PAJ,PAK
EA
2*
(3)
(1)
ILLUS
NO.
(2)
NATIONAL
STOCK NUMBER
84
5815-00-937-6113
SWITCH ASSEMBLY
SA-1554/GRC-142 (80058)
SM-R-602945
85
5930-00-937-5352
86
DESCRIPTION
FSCM AND PART NUMBER
USUABLE
ON CODE
OR
92
✷ One
5815-01-017-9172
half
the
quantity
is
used
in
TELETYPEWRITER TT-722( )/TG
(80058)
AN/GRC-142
models.
Change 4
B-27
TM 11-5815-334-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (CONT)
B-28
Change 4
TM 11-5815-334-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (CONT)
(1)
ILLUS
NO.
(2)
NATIONAL
STOCK NUMBER
93
5815-01-062-8194
(4)
(5)
U/M
REQ’D
PAE,PAL
PAF,PAM
PAG,PAN
EA
2*
PAE,PAL
PAF,PAM
PAG,PAN
EA
2*
(3)
DESCRIPTION
FSCM AND PART NUMBER
TERMINAL, COMMUNICATlONS
AN/UGC-74A(V)3 (80058)
SM-E-915600
USUABLE
ON CODE
OR
93
5815-01-214-6237
TERMINAL, COMMUNICATIONS
AN/UGC-74B(V)3
WHIP ANTENNA CONSISTING OF:
94-A
5935-00-259-0205
ADAPTER CONNECTOR UG-201/U
(80058) MIL-A-55-339/20
PAO
EA
1
94-B
5935-00-847-2600
ADAPTER, CONNECTOR
UG-306B/U (81349)
MS35368-306B
PAO
EA
1
95
5965-00-930-7223
ANTENNA TIP ASSEMBLY (80063)
SC-C-446046
PAO
EA
2*
96
5820-00-200-2329
BAG CW-206/GR (80058)
SC-DL-23003
PAO
EA
1
97
5620-00-571-1628
CLAMP (80063) SM-B-356781
PAO
EA
2*
98
5620-00-078-4769
COVER, ANTENNA (80063)
SM-D-500428
PAO
EA
2*
99
5620-00-078-4770
MAST BASE AB-652/GR (80058)
AB652UR
PAO
EA
2*
100
5985-00- 199-8831
MAST SECTION MS-116A
(80063) SC-D-12521
PAO
EA
6*
101
5985-00- 115-7149
MAST SECTION MS-117A
(80063) SC-D-12521
PAO
EA
2*
102
5885-00-238-7474
MAST SECTION MS-118A
(80063) SC-D-12521
PAO
E A
2*
103
4020-00-073-3276
ROPE (81349) MIL-C-43588
(40 FT)
PAO
EA
1
104
5820-00-906-6416
ANTENNA TIEDOWN KIT (80063)
SC-C-446180
PAO
EA
4
* One half the quantity is used in AN/GRC-142 models.
Change 4
B-29
TM 11-5815-334-10
B-30
Change 4
TM 11-5815-334-10
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (CONT)
(1)
(2)
ILLUS
NO.
NATIONAL
STOCK NUMBER
105
(4)
(5)
USUABLE
ON CODE
U/M
REQ’D
lNTERCONNECTING BOX
PAP
EA
1
(3)
DESCRIPTION
FSCM AND PART NUMBER
106
5815-01-219-2666
MOUNTING BASE MT-6442/U
PAP
EA
1
107
5995-01-216-1969
CABLE ASSEMBLY, POWER,
ELECTRICAL CX-13315/G
PAP
EA
1
106
5995-01-216-1999
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL
PURPOSE, ELECTRICAL
PAP
EA
1
CX-13316/G
109
5995-01-216-2000
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL
PURPOSE, ELECTRICAL
CX-13317/G
PAP
EA
1
110
6625-00-069-7166
VOLTMETER, A.C.
ME-345/GRC
PAB,PAE,
PAI,PAL
EA
1
* One half the quantity is used In AN/GRC-142 models
Change 4
B-31
TM 11-5815-334-10
Section III BASIC ISSUE ITEMS
B-32
Change 4
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (CONT)
TM 11-5815-334-10
(1)
ILLUS
NO.
NATIONAL
STOCK NUMBER
1
5920-00-727-1452
1
(4)
(3)
USUABLE
ON CODE
U/M
(5)
QTY
REQ’D
FUSE 10 AMP FO3B32V10A
(81349) MIL-F-15160-03
PAO
EA
5
5920-00-199-9498
FUSE 1/2 AMP FO2B250V1/2A
(81349) MIL-F-15160/2
PAO
EA
10
1
5920-00-229-1312
FUSE 1/1 6 AMP (FOR TT-98/FG)
(81349) MIL-5-15160/2
PAB,PAC,
PAD,PAI,
PAJ,PAK
EA
3
1
5920-00-131-9817
FUSE 1.6 125V (FOR
TT-7220/TG) (64959)
SM-B-342103
PAB,PAC,
PAD,PAI,
PAJ,PAK
EA
2
1
5920-00-296-0451
FUSE 1/8 AMP FO2A250V 1/8A
(FOR TT-7220/TG) (81349)
MIL-F-15160/2
PAB,PAC,
PAD,PAI,
PAJ,PAK
EA
3
1
5920-00-280-4960
FUSE 2A 250V FO2A250V2A
(81349) MIL-F-15160/2 FOR
AN/GRC-106 AND AN/GRC-106,
-106A, AND MD-522/GRC
PAO
EA
10
1
5920-00-581-4144
FUSE 2A 250V (FOR TT-760/
GGC) (81535) BTL65626A
PAO
EA
2
1
5920-00-228-7882
FUSE 2A (FOR TT-98F/G)
(81349) MIL-F-15160/2
PAO
EA
1
2
5920-00-851-9476
FUSE 5A FO2B32V5A (81349)
MIL-F-15160
PAO
EA
10
2
5920-00-342-5828
FUSE 10A 250V FO3G10ROB
(81349)
PAC,PAD,
PAF,PAG,
PAJ,PAK,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
2
5920-00-755-3656
FUSE 30A F03B32V30A (81349)
MIL-F-15160-03
PAO
EA
10
3
6545-00-922-1200
KIT, FIRST AID (80063)
SM-D-539483
PAO
EA
1
4
2540-00-848-8483
LADDER MX-3543/G (80063)
SC-D-147189
PAO
EA
1
5
6240-00-223-9100
LAMP, GLOW (FOR N/GRA-6)
(81349) M15098-10-001
PAO
EA
2
6
6240-00-155-8651
LAMP, INCANDESCENT 30V 25W
(08108) MS15586-7
PAF,PAG,
PAM,PAN
EA
2
DESCRIPTION
FSCM AND PART NUMBER
Change 4
B-33
TM 11-5815-334-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS
NATIONAL
STOCK NUMBER
6
6240-00-617-1717
DESCRlPTION
FSCM AND PART NUMBER
LAMP, INCANDESCENT (FOR
TT-76()/GGC) (08806)
(5)
U/M
REQ'D
PAB,PAC,
PAD,PAE,
PAG,PAI,
PAJ,PAK,
PAL
EA
1
USUABLE
ON CODE
6240-00-892-6102
LAMP 120V 10W (FOR
TT-722( )/TG) (08108)
PAB,PAC,
PAD,PAI,
PAJ,PAK
EA
1
6
6240-00-155-8651
LAMP 30V 25W (08108)
MS15586-7
PAO
EA
1
6
6240-00-155-8706
LAMP 6- 8V 0.15A (FOR
TT-76( )/GGC (06840)
MS15571-2
PAO
EA
1
7
6240-00-152-2996
FLUORESCENT LAMP
PAF,PAG,
PAM, PAN
EA
2
8
6240-00-155-8653
INCANDESCENT COLD START
LAMP
PAF,PAG,
PAM, PAN
EA
2
9
6250-00-194-4794
FLUORESCENT LAMP STARTER
PAF,PAG,
PAM, PAN
EA
2
10
5820-00-078-4769
COVER, ANTENNA (80063)
SM-D-500428
PAO
EA
2*
11
5985-00-199-8831
MAST SECTION MS-116A
(80063) SC-D-12521
PAO
EA
6*
12
5985-00-115-7149
MAST SECTION MS-117A
(80063) SC-D-12521
PAO
EA
2*
13
5985-00-238-7474
MAST SECTION MS-118A
(80063) SC-D-12521
PAO
EA
2*
14
5820-00-078-4770
MAST BASE AB-652-GR (80058)
AB652UR
PAO
EA
2*
15
5985-00-930-7223
ANTENNA TIP ASSEMBLY (80063)
SC-C-446046
PAO
EA
2*
16
5815-00-378-5593
GEAR, WORM WHEEL: 60 wpm
Kleinschmidt, p/n 50352A
PAO
EA
1
17
5815-00-351-7944
GEAR, WORM WHEEL 100 wpm
Sig dwg SC-B-70478
PAO
EA
1
18
5815-00-203-1678
GEAR, WORM: 80 wpm, Sig dwg
SC-B-69681
PAO
EA
1
19
5815-00-203-1327
GEAR, WORM: 100 wpm, Sig dwg
SC-B-70842
PAO
EA
1
Change 4
—
—
6
✷ One half the quantity is used in AN/GRC-142 models.
B-34
(4)
(3)
(1)
ILLUS
NO.
TM 11 -5815-334-10
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (CONT)
(4)
(3)
(1)
ILLUS
NO.
NATIONAL
STOCK NUMBER
20
5815-00-356-3227
21
USUABLE
ON CODE
U/M
SPOOL, PRINTING RIBBON:
Kleinschmidt p/n 10900
PAO
EA
1
7530-00-634-6237
TAPE, TELETYPEWRITER, perforator
Fed Spec UU-T-120, 7/8 inch
PAO
ROLL
1
22
7510-00-082-2648
RIBBON, TELETYPEWRITER Fed Spec
DDD-R-311d, Type 1, Grade 1, Class 1
PAO
23
5815-00-224-9717
FORK, TUNING: Sig dwg SC-DL-70237
PAO
TM 11-5815-238-10
DESCRIPTION
FSCM AND PART NUMBER
1
EA
1
TECHNICAL MANUAL
EA
1
DA PAM 25-30
EA
1
* One half the quantity is used in AN/GRC-142 models.
Change 4
B-35/(B-36 blank)
TM 11-5815-334-10
APPENDIX C
ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST
Section I INTRODUCTION
C-1. SCOPE
This appendix lists additional items you are authorized for the support of the radio set.
C-2. GENERAL.
This list identifies items that do not have to accompany the terminal set and that do not have to be
turned in with it. These items are all authorized to you by CTA, MTOE, TDA, or JTA.
C-3. EXPLANATION OF LISTING.
National stock numbers, descriptions, and quantities are provided to help you identify and request the
additional items you require to support this equipment. The items are listed in alphabetical sequence
by item name, under the type of document (ie CTA, MTOE, TDA, or JTA) which authorizes the items
to you. If item required differs for different models of this equipment, the model is shown under the
“Usable On” heading in the description column. These codes are identified as follows:
CODE
PAA
PAB
PAC
PAD
PAE
PAF
PAG
PAH
PAI
PAJ
PAK
PAL
PAM
PAN
PAO
USED ON
Ail AN/GRC-122(*) Models
Model AN/GRC-122
Model AN/GRC-122A
Model AN/GRC-122B
Model AN/GRC-122C
Model AN/GRC-122D
Model AN/GRC-122E
All AN/GRC-142(*) Models
Model AN/GRC-142
Model AN/GRC-142A
Model AN/GRC-142B
Model AN/GRC-142C
Model AN/GRC-142D
Model AN/GRC-142E
All models (without MK-2488/G)
Change 2
C-1
TM 11-5815-334-10
Section II ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST
(3)
NATIONAL
STOCK NUMBER
USUABLE
ON CODE
FSCM AND PART NUMBER
U/M
REQ’D
EA
1
4120-00-730-7072
AIR CONDITIONER, 6000 BTU COOLING
1250W HEATING 110VAC, 60HZ,
20 AMPERES, USED WITH AN/GRC-142
S/N 1 THRU 697 ONLY (FSC 06534,
CE-6A-60)
6115-00-738-6340
GENERATOR SET, GASOLINE
ENGINE DRIVEN TRAILER
MOUNTED PU-620/M (80058)
MIL-P-52557
PAO,PAP
EA
1
4520-00-177-6198
HEATER, ELECTRIC (81349)
MIL-H-52641
PAO
EA
1
4520-00-878-9393
HEATER, MULTI-FUEL (81349
MIL-H-52204 THERMOSTAT P/O
MULTI-FUEL HEATER SM-D-613001-1
PAO,PAP
EA
1
5815-00-553-6061
REPERFORATOR-TRANSMITTER
TT-76( )/GRC (80058) SM-D-134701
PAO,PAP
EA
1
5815-00-503-2764
TELETYPEWRITER TT-98( )/FG (80058)
MIL-T-11750
PAB,PAC,
PAD,PAI,
PAJ,PAK
EA
1
5815-01-062-8194
TERIMNAL, COMMUNICATIONS
AN/UGC-74A(V)3 (80058)
SM-E-915600
PAE,PAF,
PAG,PAL,
PAM,PAN
EA
1
6625-01-139-2512
MULTIMETER AN/PSM-45 OR
EQUIVALENT
PAO,PAP
*U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1994 - 510/106/00361
C-2
Change 4
PIN: 057349-004
TM 11-5815-334-10
Section II ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST
(1)
NATIONAL
STOCK
NUMBER
5810-01-118-7766
(2)
DESCRIPTION
FSCM AND PART NUMBER
USABLE
ON CODE
COMMUNICATIONS SECURITY
EQUIPMENT TSEC/KW-7
PAO
EA
1
COMMUNICATIONS SECURITY
EQUIPMENT TSEC/KG-84, KG-84A
PAP
EA
1
PAP
EA
OR
5810-01-250-6618
COMMUNICATIONS SECURITY
EQUIPMENT TSEC/KG-84(*)
Change 2
1
C-3/(C-4 blank)
TM 11-5815-334-10
APPENDIX D
EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST
Section I INTRODUCTION
D-1. SCOPE.
This appendix lists expendable supplies and materials you will need to operate and maintain Radio Set
AN/GRC-122/142(*). These items are authorized to you by CTA 50-970, Expendable items (Except
Medical, Class V, Repair Parts, and Heraldic Items).
D-2. EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS.
a. Column 1, Item Number. This number is assigned to the entry in the listing, and is referenced
in the narrative instructions to identify the material (eg, Use Cleaning Compound, Item 5, app E).
b. Column 2, Level. This column identifies the lowest level of maintenance that requires the listed
item.
C
O
F
H
–
–
–
–
Operator/Crew
Organizational Maintenance/Aviation Unit Maintenance
Direct Support Maintenance/Aviation Intermediate Maintenance
General Support Maintenance
c. Column 3, National Stock Number. This is the National stock number assigned to the item. Use
it to request or requisition the item.
d. Column 4, Description. Indicates the Federal item name and, if required, a description to
identify the item. The last line for each item indicates the Federal Supply Code for Manufacturer
(FSCM) in parentheses followed by a part number.
e. Column 5, U/M, (Unit of Measure). Indicates the measure used in performing the actual maintenance function. This measure is expressed by a two-character alphabetical abbreviation (eg, ea,
in., pr). If the unit of measure differs from the unit of issue, requisition the lowest unit of issue that will
satisfy your requirements.
D-1
TM 11-5815-334-10
Section II EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST
(1)
ITEM
NUMBER
LEVEL
1
O
8020-00-721-9657
BRUSH, PAINT, 2 IN.
(81848) MB-451
EA
2
O
8305-00-222-2433
CLOTH, CHEESECLOTH
(81348) CCCC 660
EA
3
O
8010-00-111-7937
PAINT, FOREST GREEN ALKYD ENAMEL
TB-43-0118 (81349) MILE-52-798A
GAL.
4
C
PAPER, FANFOLD, SINGLE PLY
BX
5
C
PAPER, FANFOLD, 3-PLY
BX
6
C
7530-00-223-7966
PAPER, ROLL, SINGLE-PLY (81348)
RL
7
C
7530-00-223-7966
PAPER TELETYPEWRITER (81348)
UU-P-577
EA
8
C
7510-00-281-5234
PENCIL NUMBER 2 (81348) SS-P-166
DOZ
9
C
7510-00-082-2648
RIBBON, PRINTING, TELETYPEWRITER
(81348) DDD-R-306
EA
10
C
7510-00-923-0252
RIBBON, TELETYPEWRITER (80063)
SM-B-765911
EA
11
O
5970-00-816-6056
TAPE, ELECTRICAL INSULATING; LOW
TEMPERATURE P295 (99742)
YD
12
O
8315-00-290-8306
TAPE, REINFORCED
YD
13
C
7530-00-634-6237
TAPE, TELETYPEWRITER PAPER
(81348) UU-T-137
EA
14
C
7920-00-965-5700
TOWEL, MACHINERY (81348)
CCC-C-444
EA
15
C
6850-00-105-3084
TRICHLOROTRIFLUOROETHANE 16 OZ CAN
(18596)
OZ
D-2
(2)
(3)
NATIONAL STOCK
NUMBER
(4)
DESCRIPTION (FSCM)
(5)
U/M
TM 11-5815-334-10
INDEX
Subject
Page
A
Additional authorization list . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Air inlets and outlets and gasoline can . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Antenna Group AN/GRA-50 installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Antenna tip cap installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Antenna wire length chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Antijamming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-151
C
Camouflage procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54
Changing shelter door combination lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
..
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..3-21
Cleaning of shelter door air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Cold-start lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Communications Terminal AN/UGC-74A(V)3, operation and self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
Complete shelter weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Complete shutdown of shelter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-143
Components of end item and basic issue items list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Consolidated index of Army publications and blank forms .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Control panel indicator lamp replacement (AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C
models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ............ ....
3-26
D
Dc and ac power connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Description and use of operator’s controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 2-1
Description of controls and indicators for:
AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Ac entrance box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Ac entrance box circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Ac voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 2-12
Control Panel SA-1554/GRC-142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Dc entrance box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Distribution Box J-2776/GRC-142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Low-Level Signaling Device TT-523/GGC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Power Distribution Panel SB-3018/GRC-142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Remote box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 2-6
Standing Wave Ratio Meter ME-165/G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Switchbox SA-1555/GRC-142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, and E models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Lighting controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Low-Level Signaling Device TT-523/GGC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Power Distribution Panel SB-3358/GRC-142 (AN/GRC-122/142A and B models
only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... ....
2-12
Power Distribution Panel SC-F-960672 (used in AN/GRC-122/142D and E
models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..2-14
Power/signal entrance box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Index 1
TM 11-5815-334-10
INDEX (CONT)
Page
Subject
D (CONT)
AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, and E models (Cont)
Power terminal assembly (used on AN/GRC-122/142A and B models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Power terminal assembly (used on AN/GRC-122/142D and E models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Remote box .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Shelter exhaust blower switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2-21
Standing Wave Ratio Meter ME-165/G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch Assembly SA-1650/GRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Destruction of Army electronics materiel to prevent enemy use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Differences between models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Dipole antenna assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Discrepancy in shipment report (DISREP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-36
Duplex operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AN/GRC-122 Plain and C models .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
1-38
AN/GRC-122A, B, D, and E models .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
E
2-144
Emergency stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment characteristics, capabilities, and features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-5
Capabilities and features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Equipment data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
1-5
Equipment description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Erecting AB-155(*)/U with Tripod Adapter AB-1089/U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Expendable supplies and materials list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
F
Fluorescent lamp and starter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Fuel heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
G
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Ground rod installation .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
H
Hand receipt (-HR) manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Heater exhaust hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Index 2
TM 11-5815-334-10
INDEX (CONT)
Page
Subject
I
Incandescent lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Installation of:
Antenna Group AN/GRA-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Antenna tip cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 2-37
Ground rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Remote equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56
Security equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-69
Shade tarpaulin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 2-55
Whip antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... 2-34
1-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............
J
recognition and identification of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-149
L
List of abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Local duplex operation (AN/GRC-122(*) models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-120
Local owr cw operation
AN/GRC-122/142(*) models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . 1-33
Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ....... 1-33
Local owr operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-111
Local owr radio teletypewriter operation
AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . 1-30
Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, and E models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . 1-31
Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Local owr voice operation
AN/GRC-122/142(*) models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . 1-32
Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Local owr voice plus teletypewriter (NSK) operation
AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . 1-34
Transmit .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1-34
AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, and E models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Receive .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 1-35
Location and description of major components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
.
AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models
Exterior roadside and rear wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Front and curbside wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Index 3
TM 11-5815-334-10
INDEX (CONT)
Subject
L (CONT)
AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models (Cont)
Rear and roadside wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11
AN/GRC-122/142A and B models
Front and curbside wall .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Rear and roadside wall .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
AN/GRC-122/142D and E models
Front and curbside wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Rear and roadside wall .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, and E models
Exterior curbside and front wall .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Exterior roadside and rear wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
AN/GRC-122/142(*) models
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Loop current test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
Lubrication instructions .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
M
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Maintenance forms, records, and reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Mast AB-155/U erection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
N
Nomenclature cross-reference list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
0
Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-111
Operation at low temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-148
Operation during radio silence and output power measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
Operation in desert climates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-149
Operation in tropical climates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-149
Operation
Duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
AN/GRC-122 Plain and C models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
1-36
AN/GRC-122A, B, D, and E models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-120
Local duplex (AN/GRC-122(*) models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local owr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111
Local owr cw
AN/GRC-122/142(*) models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
.
Local owr radio teletypewriter
1-30
AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, and E models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Local owr voice
AN/GRC-122/142(*) models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Index 4
TM 11-5815-334-10
INDEX (CONT)
Subject
Page
O (CONT)
Local owr voice plus teletypewriter (NSK)
AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, and E models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-35
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-129
Remote cw
AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
AN/GRC-122/142A, B, C, and E models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Remote field telephone
AN/GRC-122/142(*) models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Remote owr teletypewriter
AN/GRC-122/142(*) models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Remote owr voice
AN/GRC-122/142(*) models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Teletypewriter order wire (pony circuit)
AN/GRC-122 Plain and C models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-137
AN/GRC-122A, B, D, and E models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-137
Operation under unusual conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-147
Operation under usual conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Operator maintenance procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... ......
3-21
Operator Preventive Maintenance Check and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
P
Power Distribution Panel SB-3018/GRC-142 power indicator lamp replacement
(AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Power Distribution Panel SB-3358/GRC indicator lamp replacement (AN/GRC122/142A and B models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Power Distribution Panel SB-F-960672 indicator lamp replacement (AN/GRC122/142D and E models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Power Distribution Panel SB-3018/GRC-142 fuse replacement (AN/GRC-122/142
Plain and C models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Power output measurement with doublet antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
Power output measurement with whip antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Power sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... 2-76
Preliminary Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Preoperational equipment checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
Preoperational equipment settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Ac entrance box circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Amplifier AM-3349/GRC-106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
.
Communications Terminal AN/UGC-74A(V)3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
Control Panel SA-1554/GRC-142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
Distribution box ac power - dc power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Electric heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
Local Control C-434/GRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-94
Loudspeaker LS-166/U and duplex LS-166/U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
Low-Level Signaling Device TT-523/GGC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
Index 5
TM 11-5815-334-10
INDEX (CONT)
Page
Subject
P (CONT)
Preoperational equipment settings (Cont)
Modem MD-522(*)/GRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-88
Power Distribution Panel SB-3018/GRC-142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
Power Distribution Panel SB-3358/GRC-142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
Power Distribution Panel SC- F-960672 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
Power Supply PP-4763(*)/GRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81,
2-86
2-87
Radio Receiver-Transmitter RT-662/GRC and duplex RT-662/GRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Control Box C-7279/GRC-142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-93
.
Remote Control C-433/GRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
Standing Wave Ratio Power Meter ME-165/G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
Switch Assembly SA-1650/GRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
Switch Box SA-1555/GRC-142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
Telephone Set TA-312/PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
Teletypewriter TT-98/FG and duplex TT-98/FG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89
Teletypewriter TT-76(*)/GGC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
Preoperational procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Preparation for movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-146
Preventive maintenance checks and services, operator (PMCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
R
Recognition and identification of jamming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote cw operation
AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C modeIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AN/GRC-122/142A, B, C, and E models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Remote equipment installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote field telephone operation
AN/GRC-122/142(*) models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote owr teletypewriter operation
AN/GRC-122/142(*) models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Remote owr voice operation
AN/GRC-122/142(*) models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index 6
2-151
A-1
1-42
1-42
1-42
1-43
1-43
1-43
2-56
1-39
1-39
1-39
2-129
1-41
1-41
1-41
1-40
1-40
1-40
TM 11-5815-334-10
INDEX (CONT)
Page
Subject
R (CONT)
Replacement of:
Cold-start lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 3-24
Control panel indicator lamp (AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and C models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Fluorescent lamp and starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Incandescent lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Power Distribution Panel SB-3018/GRC-142 power indicator lamp (AN/GRC122/142 Plain and C models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Power Distribution Panel SB-3358/GRC indicator lamp (AN/GRC-122/142A
and B models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-28
Power Distribution Panel SB-F-960672 indicator lamp (AN/GRC-122/142D and
E models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... 3-29
Power Distribution Panel SB-3018/GRC-142 fuse (AN/GRC-122/142 Plain and
C models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ........ 3-30
Switch assembly indicator lamp (AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, and E models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Reporting equipment improvement recommendations (EIRs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Report of packaging and handling deficiencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Reports of maintenance and unsatisfactory equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
S
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ............ ......... 1-1
Security classification markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Security equipment installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
Shade tarpaulin installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Shelter door combination lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Shelter exterior dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Site and shelter requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Standby procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-143
Stopping procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-142
Switch assembly indicator lamp replacement (AN/GRC-122/142A, B, D, and E
models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... .... 3-25
Symptom index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 3-2
System planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ... 2-29
T
Technical principles of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
1-29
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... ......
Teletypewriter order wire (pony circuit)
AN/GRC-122 Plain and C models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . 1-44
Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 1-44
AN/GRC-122A, B, D, and E models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . 1-45
Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 1-45
Teletypewriter slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77
Terminal, communications AN/UGC-74A(V)3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Index 7
TM 11-5815-334-10
INDEX (CONT)
Page
Subject
T (CONT)
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Troubleshooting procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Truck exhaust pipe hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Tuning procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
Using whip antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
Using doublet antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
V
Vehicle boarding ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
W
Whip antenna installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Whip or doublet antennas and ground rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Index 8
TM 11-5815-334-10
EL6VR187
FO-1. Radio Teletypewriter Sets
AN/GRC-122/142(*) Cording Diagram.
FO-1
TM 11-5815-334-10
FO-1.1.
FI1-1. RADIO TELETYPEWRITER SETS DIAGRAM IN
ALL MODELS WITH MK-2488/G.
1
TM 11-5815-334-10
EL6VR188
FO-2. Radio Teletypewriter Sets
AN/GRC-122/142A and B Cording
Diagram.
FO-2
TM 11-5815-334-10
FO-2.1.
Radio Teletypewriter Sets
AN/GRC-122/142A and B With
MK-2488/G Cording Diagram.
TM 11-5815-334-10
FO-3. Radio Teletypewriter Sets
AN/GRC-122/142C Cording Diagram.
FO-3.
TM 11-5815-334-10
FO-3.1. Radio Teletypewriter Sets
AN/GRC-122/142C (With MK-2488/G)
Cording Diagram.
TM 11-5815-334-10
FO-4. Radio Teletypewriter Sets
AN/GRC-122/142D and E Cording
Diagrams.
FO-4.
TM 11-5815-334-10
FO-4.1. RADIO TELETYPEWRITER SETS AN/GRC-122/142D AND
E WITH MK-88/G CORDING DIAGRAM.
TM 11-5815-334-10
FO-5. Radio Set AN/GRC-122/142
Plain and C Block Diagram.
FO-5.
TM 11-5815-334-10
FO-5.1.
INTERCONNECTION OF UNITS WITHIN AN/GRC-122A, B, D AND E MODELS WITH MK-2488/G AND
AN/GRC-142 A, B, D AND E MODELS WITH MK-2488/G.
TM 11-5815-334-10
FO-6. Radio Set AN/GRC-122/142A, B,
D, and E Block Diagram.
FO-6.
TM 11-5815-334-10
FO-6.1. INTERCONNECTION OF UNITS WITHIN AN/GRC-122 PLAIN AND C MODELS WITH MK 2488/G
AND AN/GRC-142 PLAIN AND C MODELS WITH MK-2488/G.
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
JOHN A. WICKHAM JR.
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
DONALD J. DELANDRO
Brigadier General, United States Army
The Adjutant General
DISTRIBUTION:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-51,
Operator's Maintenance requirements for AN/GRG-142 and
AN/GRC-122.
* US GOVERNMENT
PRINTING
OFFICE
1993 - 324 - 421/62524
THE METRIC SYSTEM AND EQUIVALENTS
PIN: 057349-004
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement